JP6668428B2 - Unit control method - Google Patents

Description

  An embodiment of the present invention is based on an M2M (Machine to Machine) application technology or IoT that can collect information using various sensors installed in public facilities or homes and perform control based on the information. (Internet of Things) related to applied technology.

  As shown in Non-Patent Document 1 regarding the M2M or IoT application technical field, global standardization work is in progress. Here, we aim to formulate a general-purpose standard for comprehensively integrating and managing information obtained from various types of sensors and adapting the results to various services.

D. Boswarthick et.al .: M2M Communications: A Systems Approach (2012, John Wiley & Sons Ltd.)

  As described in Non-Patent Document 1, the standardization activities up to now are based on the premise that information is collected from “sensor-embedded devices (devices)” and the information is used in an integrated manner to provide services. Also, due to the versatility requirement of standardization, it is necessary to be able to handle information obtained from various sensors in a comprehensive manner. Further, in order to maintain the utility value of the established standard for a long period of time, it is necessary to be able to cope with the scalability of the types of sensors built into the device in response to future technological progress of the sensor built-in device. In this way, it is not only extremely difficult to ensure consistency between the mutually contradictory (sensor) diversity and (standard) versatility, but also versatility and (sensor) There is an inherent inconsistency of standardization activities where flexibility and scalability are guaranteed.

  The current specific technical issues are as follows. First, the accuracy of information collection to be used for providing services greatly depends on the power ON / OFF of each sensor-incorporated device. That is, in order to select the optimum service content, it is necessary to estimate / determine the state in the predetermined system or the behavior or state of the user by integrating information obtained from various sensors. However, when most of the devices in the network system are turned off, the amount of information to be collected is too small, and the accuracy of the estimation / judgment is greatly reduced.

  Next, there is a difficulty in responding to future changes in the functions of the sensor embedded device. For example, since the function of a television was previously limited to only receiving broadcast waves and displaying an image, a case where a communication standard that can grasp only a television display state is considered will be considered. In contrast, high-end Japanese televisions now have a built-in recording function. Furthermore, there is a high-end television having a data communication function using a network line. Although it is not widely used at present, it is possible to detect positional information of a viewing user with naked-eye 3D TV (3 Dimensional Television). Further, in the future, there is a possibility that a light sensor is built in the television (to optimally control the brightness of the display screen). In order to upgrade the standard every time the TV function is improved in this way, there is a problem that it takes too much time to study the standard and the response is delayed. Conversely, if the number of corresponding items in the standard is increased in advance in anticipation of future expansion of the TV function, the standard itself becomes redundant, and the corresponding control in the device becomes complicated.

  As a third technical problem, the current communication standard aiming at versatility and expandability is finely hierarchized (see FIG. 32 for details), so that duplication and redundancy occur in communication information. Hierarchical communication standards can cope with various technical fields by replacing specific layers, but lead to an increase in the amount of communication information and complexity of processing. As long as communication is performed by a personal computer or a smartphone equipped with a processor having a high processing capability, the increase in the amount of communication information and the complexity of the processing did not pose any problems. However, they are not suitable for demands for power saving and simplified processing.

  As a final technical problem, if communication information is made versatile, a large processing power is required, which leads to higher price and higher power. For example, there is a communication method in which communication information is described in an XML (Extensible Markup Language) format to provide flexibility and expandability of the communication information. However, in this case, the XML decoding function (parser) is required on the receiving side, and the receiving side function is complicated. On the other hand, there is a communication method in which a different standard table is provided for each type of device as communication information to cope with the variety of devices. However, even in this case, the standard table that can support the same type of high-end device becomes complicated, and the load of communication processing on a single-function device increases.

  An object of the present embodiment is to provide a unit control method that enables various uses of the unit.

According to a control method of a unit of an embodiment, a control method of a unit including a first connection unit, a second connection unit, a signal processing unit, a memory unit, and a processor, wherein the first connection unit is connected to a network system The second connection unit is connected to a predetermined module including a sensor function or a driving function, the signal processing unit is connected to the first connection unit and the second connection unit,
The memory unit is connected to the signal processing unit; the processor controls at least one of the signal processing unit and the memory unit; the signal processing unit operates based on an application; A control method in which software for executing a new application is transferred via the first connection unit based on information relating to the change of the application. Changes, additions, and updates are performed.

FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a wide area network structure in the system of the embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a local network structure in the system of the embodiment. Explanatory drawing (1) of a unit of embodiment. Explanatory drawing (2) of an embodiment of a unit. Explanatory drawing (1) of embodiment of a composite module. Explanatory drawing (2) of embodiment of a composite module. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view (3) of the embodiment of the composite module. Explanatory drawing (4) of an embodiment of a composite module. Explanatory drawing (5) of embodiment of a composite module. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view (6) of the embodiment of the composite module. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a specific structure in a sensor / communication module. 1st Embodiment which shows the specific structure in a drive / communication module. 2nd Embodiment which shows the specific structure in a drive / communication module. The third embodiment showing a specific structure in the drive / communication module. The fourth embodiment showing a specific structure in the drive / communication module. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a specific structure in a communication module. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view of another embodiment of the specific structure in the communication module. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of another embodiment relating to a local network structure. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view of another embodiment relating to a local network structure. Application example on local network structure. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a basic application / communication layer structure of the system according to the embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of information exchanged in a communication middleware layer. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a transmission data structure in a network line according to the embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a data structure in a physical layer header and a MAC layer header. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of an IEEE extension address in the embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a data structure in an IPV6 header. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a communication middleware data structure in a C-format. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a communication middleware data structure in an E-format. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a communication middleware data structure in an A-format. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of an application example regarding a basic application / communication layer structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment (1) relating to the application / communication layer structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment (2) related to the application / communication layer structure. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram around a device driver in a computer system. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram around a management / control area of a unit in the system. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of another embodiment relating to management / control of units in the system. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a method for managing / controlling units in the system from a software perspective. Comparison between the existing file system and the unit management method in the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of a structure inside a unit management pseudo drive. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of a structure in a folder corresponding to a composite module. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the internal structure of a folder corresponding to a sensor / communication module. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of sensor information in a sensor / communication module. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a position management routine in a section of a device or various modules. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of an address table managed by the system according to the embodiment. FIG. Explanatory drawing of a spatial unit section related to sensing and services. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a basic processing flow in the system controller. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a method for collecting information from devices or composite modules fixedly arranged in a section and estimating / determining the information. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an estimation / judgment method according to the embodiment. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a time-series change example of communication information. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a service providing method in section units. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a method of collecting information from a device or a composite module movable between sections and estimating / determining the information. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a position monitoring method of devices and various modules. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a structure of a direction detecting unit of a radio wave transmission source in the embodiment. FIG. 3 is a structural explanatory view of a stealth plate according to the embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the principle of detecting the direction of a radio wave transmission source in the embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of section division in the social infrastructure field. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a composite module between different middleware layers. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a composite module is applied between different systems. Explanatory drawing showing an example to which a composite module is applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the composite module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the composite module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the composite module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the composite module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the composite module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the composite module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the composite module was applied.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the following table of contents shows the structure of chapters and sections relating to the description of the present embodiment.
Chapter 1 Overview of Overall System in this Embodiment Section 1.1 Overview of Overall System in This Embodiment Section 1.2 Explanation of Unit Shape 1.3 Section Description of Configuration in Composite Module 1.4 Structure in Sensor / Communication Module Section 1.5 Description of Structure in Drive / Communication Module Section 1.6 Description of Structure Example in Communication Module Section 1.7 Description of Overall Structure of Wide Area Network System in Present Embodiment 1.8 Description of Network System Structure Section 1.9 Example of Using Composite Module in Local Network System Chapter 2 Overview of Hierarchical Structure and Data Structure of Communication Information Section 2.1 Hierarchical Structure 2 of Network Communication-Related Functions in Present Embodiment Section 2.2 Relationship between hierarchical structure of communication-related functions and communication information on network lines Section 2.3 Physical layer and media access Section 2.4 Data Structure of Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer 2.5 Data Structure of C-Format at Communication Middleware Layer Section 2.6 Data Structure of E-Format at Communication Middleware Layer Data structure section 2.7 Data structure of A-format in communication middleware layer Section 2.8 Address table used in this embodiment system and examples of its use Chapter 3 Unit management / display method 3.1 Basic 3.2 Outline of typical unit management method Section 3.2 Unit management means Section 3.3 Specific unit management examples and display examples Chapter 4 Section outline in this embodiment system 4.1 Section in this embodiment system Section positioning Section 4.2 How to manage locations of various modules and devices in sections Section 4.3 Information for each section Processing method from collection to service provision Section 4.4 Tracking method between sections of various modules and various devices Section 4.5 Compatibility between systems with different units (composite modules and devices) Chapter 5 Application by application field Example 5.1 Example of application to consumer field Section 5.1.1 Example of application of wide area network system to consumer field Section 5.1.2 Example of application of composite module to consumer section 5.1.3 Section division method Example of application to consumer field Section 5.2 Example of application to social infrastructure section 5.2.1 Example of application of wide area network system to social infrastructure section 5.2.2 Example of application of composite module to social infrastructure field Section 5.2.3 Example of application of section division method to social infrastructure field Section 5.3 Example of application to healthcare field 5.3.1 Section of wide area network system to healthcare field Example 5.3.2 Example of application of combined module to healthcare field Section 5.3.2 Example of application of section division method to healthcare field Next, each section / section will be described below according to the above table of contents. .
Chapter 1 Overview of Overall System in Present Embodiment Section 1.1 Overview of Overall System of First Embodiment First, an overview of the overall system of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 shows the overall structure of a wide area network system in the overall system of the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 shows the structure of a local network system which constitutes a part of the wide area network system. Further, the embodiment, service contents, and new effects described in FIG. 1 are applied to the system of the embodiment shown in FIG. Similarly, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 2 (or described later with reference to FIGS. 8A to 8B and FIG. 9), the service content, and the newly generated effect are also applied to the entire wide area network system of FIG. You.

  In FIG. 1, the main closing organization or organization that handles predetermined products and information is referred to as wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2. Further, organizations or groups that provide a predetermined service are referred to as service providers A to C — 1112-1 to 3. Here, each of the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 has one or more servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n_1116-1 to n. In the system of the present embodiment, the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n_1116-1 to n are also referred to as cloud servers or clouds. Then, the service providers A to C — 1112-1 to 3 acquire the products (or information) from the wholesalers B1 — 1104-1 and / or the wholesalers B2 — 1104-2 that handle similar products (or information), and each of the domains 1 to 3 — 1122. Service is provided to 1-3. Here, domains 1 to 3 — 1122-1 to 3 represent a predetermined network space, and one domain 2 — 1122-2 comprises one or a plurality of systems α_1132 and β_1134. In the following description, as another name for the above-mentioned systems α_1132 and β_1134, they may be called a network system or a client system. Therefore, the names “network system” or “client system” appearing in the following description mean a synonym of the above “system α_1132, β_1134”. Further, as described above, one domain 2_1122-2 may be configured from a plurality of different systems α_1132 and β_1134. Therefore, in the following description, the domain 2_1122-2 may be referred to as a composite client system. Therefore, the nickname "composite client" appearing in the future description indicates a synonym of "domain 2_1122-2".

  Here, the wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2, the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3, and the domains 1 to 3_11122-1 to 3 are network-connected. In addition, the respective service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 are also connected to each other via a network, so that information sharing or resource coordination 1114 can be performed with each other.

  The system α_1132 shown in FIG. 1 means a minimum network system unit in which the insides are connected to each other via a network. In addition, one system controller α_1126 is often installed in the system α_1132. The system controller α_1126 manages or operates the (network) system. Here, one system β_1134, which is the smallest network system unit, may be composed of only one system controller β_1128. In addition, the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 configuring the same domain 2_1122-2 may exist at locations physically separated from each other. Further, cooperative processing between different systems α_1132 and β_1134 in the same domain domain 2_1122-2 is also possible.

  In the system of the present embodiment, predetermined service units provided to the user in the same system α_1132 are defined as sections 1 to m — 1142-1 to m. Also, the invention is not limited thereto, and units related to integration, management, and control of information collected in the same system α_1132 may be defined as sections 1 to m — 1142-1 to m. As a matter of course, the same section 1 to m — 1142-1 to m may also serve as a unit of service to the user and a unit of integration / management / control of information. By providing services and collecting / managing information in units of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m, an effect of increasing the efficiency of providing services and collecting / managing information and an effect of improving convenience for the user are produced.

  FIG. 2 shows the structure of the local network system formed by the system α_1132 of FIG. The processor 1230 and the memory unit 1232 are built in the system controller α_1126, and network communication is performed in the system α_1132 via the communication module 1202-3. At the same time, the system controller α_1126 can also perform network communication with the outside via the same communication module 1202-3.

  In the system of the present embodiment, basic units having a network communication function other than the system controller α_1126 in the network system α_1132 are defined as units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7. In the present embodiment, predetermined various functions scattered in the network system α_1132 are managed or controlled on a unit basis. This facilitates integrated management / control of various functions within the same network system α_1132 regardless of the physical form of the unit. FIG. 2 shows an example in which communication modules 1202-4 to 10 are built in each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 as a form for realizing the network communication function in each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7. However, the means for realizing the network communication function is not limited to this. For example, a part of a predetermined module or a part of a device may have a network communication function. Alternatively, a network communication function may be realized as a part of the function in the specific software.

In the system of this embodiment, basically, the system controller α_1126 is responsible for management / operation / control of network communication in the network system α_1132. In many cases, the system controller α_1126 is physically installed in the network system α_1132 as shown in FIG. In this case, each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 in FIG. 2 can individually and directly communicate information with the system controller α_1126. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As will be described later with reference to FIG. The invention is not limited thereto, and independent information communication can be performed among different units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 under the management of the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128.
Section 1.2 Explanation of Unit Configuration The feature that predetermined various functions scattered in the system α_1132 are managed or controlled in units of the unit by the system controller α_1126 has already been described in the previous section. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, since a large number of various kinds of function implementing means are scattered in the same network system α_1132, conventionally, the integrated management and control thereof have involved a great deal of complexity. Furthermore, the physical form of the unit that realizes various functions is various, such as the device 1250, the composite module 1295 (the description of the composite module will be described later in Section 1.3), the sensor module 1260, and the drive module 1270. Therefore, the complexity of integrated management and control is further increased.

As a countermeasure against the increase in complexity, in the system of the present embodiment, a network communication function is used as a reference for various kinds of function realizing means scattered in the network system α_1132 (the basic means for realizing each network communication function is basic). It is characterized in that it is managed / controlled as a unit). That is, a single function or a set of various functions that can be realized in cooperation with the minimum network communication function is grouped by a common / generalized concept called a unit. Also, as described above, various physical forms can be taken for each individual unit, but management or control or information collection is performed using a common / generalized unit that does not depend on a specific physical form as a basic unit. By defining a unit that does not depend on an individual function or a physical form as a management unit (or a control / information collection unit) in the network system α_1132 in this manner, the management in the network system α_1132 by the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 or There is an effect that control / information collection can be greatly simplified. (A specific management / control example using a unit will be described later in Chapter 3.)
Here, as a specific example of the physical form of the unit, the entire device (Device) 1_1250-1 may correspond to the unit 4_1290-4 as shown in FIG. 2, or the compound modules 1_1129-1, 7_1295 that exist independently. -7 may correspond to the units 1_1290-1 and 7_1290-7. Further, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the composite modules 6_1295-6, 2_1295-2, and 3_1295-3 that constitute a part of the device 2_1250-2 and the device 5_1250-5 correspond to the units 6_1290-6, 2_1290-2, and 3_1290-3, respectively. May be. In FIG. 2, the unit 2_1290-2 and the unit 3_1290-3 overlap at the communication module 1202-10. Thus, in the present embodiment, partial overlap between the different units 2_1290-2 and 3_1290-3 is allowed. Further, there may be an inclusion relationship between different units (a state in which one unit is completely included in the other unit).

  Although a specific example is shown in FIG. 2, a general form that the unit can take will be described with reference to FIG. 3A. In the unit configuration shown in FIG. 3A (a), the entire device (Device) 1250 having a network communication function corresponds to one unit 1290. Here, when the device 1250 has a complex multi-function, the unit 1290 is similarly managed or controlled / collected in the network system α_1132 as a basic unit having a complex multi-function.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3A (b), a composite module 1295 (specific contents will be described later in Section 1.3) that exists alone in the network system α_1132 may correspond to one unit 1290. Further, as another management mode (or control / information collection unit mode), a predetermined composite module 1295 is added to or connected to a specific device 1250 (which may or may not have a network communication function by itself) to add an additional device. The whole performed may be regarded as one unit 1290 as shown in FIG. 3A (c).

  The unit form defined in the device 5_1250-5 shown in FIG. 2 will be described in an easy-to-understand manner with reference to FIG. 3B. As shown in FIG. 3B, in the device 5_1250-5, one sensor module 1260-9 having a sensor function and two drive modules 1_1270-5 and 2_1270-6 having different driving functions or operating functions are provided. Built-in. Further, a communication module 1202-10 having a network communication function with the system controller α_1126 in the network system α_1132 is also incorporated. The device 5_1250-5 has a device controller 1240-3 that integrally controls the operation of these modules and collects and manages the state information of these modules and the sensor information obtained therefrom. Here, the information acquired or independently generated by the device controller 1240-3 can be stored in the memory unit 1246.

  As described above, the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 can appropriately set (define) a unit form as a reference unit of optimal management or control / information collection in the network system α_1132. For example, when the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 wants to perform detailed control / information collection of individual sensor functions and drive (operation) functions in the device 5_1250-5 via a network (that is, via the communication module 1202-10). , The unit 2_1290-2 is set as shown in FIG. In this case, the unit 2_1290-2 includes a sensor module 1260-9, two drive modules 1_1270-5, 2_1270-6, and a communication module 1202-10. Then, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) can perform detailed control on each module in the unit 2_1290-2.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B (b), the unit 3_1290-3 includes only the communication module 1202-10 and the device controller 1240-3. Therefore, when the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) performs information communication with the unit 3_1290-3, it is possible to perform advanced control integrating the entire device 5_1250-5 or collectively collect information. Information communication with the unit 3_1290-3 does not require detailed information communication processing for each module such as when information is communicated with the unit 2_1290-2. Therefore, when the unit 3_1290-3 is set (defined), the processing in the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) is greatly simplified, and the processing efficiency is improved. When the form (configuration) of the unit 1290 changes as described above, the content of communication information with the unit 1290 viewed from the system controller α_1126 (system controller β_1128) changes.

  As described above, the unit takes the form of a predetermined function realized in cooperation with the minimum network communication function. Therefore, the unit has a minimum network communication function. When the communication module 1202-10 is configured as shown in FIG. 3B as an example of an implementation form of the network communication function, the unit includes the communication module 1202-10. As a result, as shown in FIG. 3B (c), the communication module 1202-10 is shared as a common part between the unit 2_1290-2 and the unit 3_1290-3.

As described above, when the specific form of the unit 1290 can be flexibly set in the network system α_1132, for example, by setting a plurality of different units overlapping in the same function unit, the management of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) can be performed. Alternatively, the effect of improving the degree of freedom of control / information collection) is produced.
Section 1.3 Configuration Description in Composite Module As one mode of the unit 1295, FIG. 3A (b) shows the configuration of the composite module 1295. In this embodiment, the composite module is defined as a communication module and a functional module capable of realizing other functions than the communication function. In particular, there is a feature in that a communication function is involved in realizing the other functions. Information communication with the outside related to the other function (outside the composite module 1295) is performed via this communication function. That is, using the communication function in the composite module 1295, information obtained as a result of executing the specific function of the composite module 1295 can be collected from outside (outside the composite module 1295). On the other hand, the communication function in the composite module 1295 may be used to control a specific function of the composite module 1295 from outside (outside the composite module 1295).

  Here, specific examples of the other functions include a sensor function, a driving (or operating) function, a control (process) function, a memory function, a display function, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the composite module may have any function other than the communication function. In particular, a composite module having a sensor function is called a sensor / communication module 1460, and a composite module having a drive (or operation) function is called a drive / communication module 1470. Further, a composite module having a control (process) function is called a processor / communication module 1465, a composite module having a memory function is called a memory / communication module 1475, and a composite module having a display function is called a display / communication module 1478.

  Next, differences between the composite module described here and the unit described in section 1.2 will be described. The composite module 1295 can constitute a part of the device 1290 as a predetermined module. Further, the composite module 1295 may exist alone in the network system. On the other hand, the unit 1290 means a basic unit of management / control / information collection in a network system in which various forms such as the device 1290, the composite module 1295, or a combination thereof are common and generalized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3A (b), there is an inclusion relationship in which one unit 1290 can include one or more composite modules 1295. As a specific example, the device 1290 corresponds to one mode of the unit 1290, whereas the composite module 1295 merely constitutes a part of the device 1290. Here, in the above-mentioned inclusion relation, the above-described means for realizing the communication function is commonly owned in the unit 1290 as well as in the composite module 1295. It has been described in section 1.2 that the system controller α_1126 is not included in the unit 1290. On the other hand, there is a great difference from the unit 1290 in that a part of the system controller α_1126 can be set in the composite module 1295.

  The means of realizing the communication function and other functions in the composite module may be either software (program) or hardware (circuit), or a combination of software and hardware (partially realized with hardware and the rest realized with software) ). The communication function and other functions do not need to be separated from each other in either software or hardware, and both functions realizing means may be mixed on software or hardware, or may be partially overlapped or inclusive. . Further, it is not always necessary that means for realizing both functions are directly connected on software or hardware. In other words, the configuration may be such that the means for realizing the communication function and the means for realizing the other functions are separately arranged at a large distance on hardware or in a program, and the means for realizing the two functions can cooperate using some kind of link means.

  For convenience of explanation, the configuration in the composite module is shown by a block structure in FIGS. 4A to 4F. This block may be a predetermined circuit (hardware) or a program (software) having a predetermined group. The blocks do not necessarily need to be separated on software or hardware, and as described above, there may be a mixture / dispersed interspersion / partial overlap (shared) / inclusion relationship among the blocks.

  FIG. 4A shows the configuration of a basic composite module 1295. As means for realizing the communication function in the composite module 1295, a communication module 1660 is possessed. Meanwhile, FIG. 4A (a) shows a configuration in which an antenna 1480 for transmitting and receiving wireless signals is separately arranged and connected to the communication module 1660. On the other hand, in FIG. 4A (b), an antenna for transmitting / receiving a radio signal is built in the communication module to constitute a communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna. Further, the communication module with built-in antenna 1666 has a structure that is functionally connected to the other function module (function other than communication) 1440 that realizes a function other than the communication function (they function in cooperation with each other). Here, as shown in FIG. 4A (b), the communication module with built-in antenna 1666 and the other function module 1440 do not necessarily need to be directly connected, and if a link is formed between both functions in some form. good. As an example of the link formation, as shown in FIG. 4A (a), a configuration is possible in which a communication module 1660 and another function module (functions other than communication) 1440 which are separately arranged at a remote distance from each other can be connected by a long distance cable or the like. And the two may perform remote cooperation 1444. (For example, when a composite module is configured by software, and a program configuring the communication module 1660 and a program configuring the other function module 1440 are arranged on a server at a remote place, link data corresponding to the remote cooperation 1444 ( Both programs may cooperate via a URL (Uniform Resource Locator))). ) Other function modules (functions other than communication) in a special environment where wireless transmission / reception (realization of a communication function by the communication module 1660 using the antenna 1480) is impossible, for example, underground, underwater, deep inside a steel building, or the like. When the user wants to operate the 1440, the remote cooperation 1444 has an effect that the composite module 1295 can function stably even in a special environment. The configuration of the composite module other than the configuration shown in FIG. 4A is not prohibited. For example, a communication module with built-in antenna 1666 and another function module (functions other than communication) 1440 are remotely located, and a remote cable is used between them. Cooperation 1444 may be used.

  FIG. 4B shows a configuration example in which the sensor / communication module 1460 is used as an example of the composite module 1295. The portion of the other function module (functions other than communication) 1440 in FIG. 4A is a sensor module 1260 in FIG. 4B. The sensor module 1260 means a sensor function unit having a quantitative or qualitative information collecting function or a signal detecting function in the predetermined system α_1132. The sensor module 1260 has an attribute that can be installed or movable (portable) in the predetermined system α_1132, and can contribute to state measurement and observation in the corresponding system_1132.

  Specific examples of objects to be sensed include common body information such as body temperature, pulse, heart rate, and respiratory rate, identifiable information such as human facial expressions, individual face shapes and appearances, size information such as height and width, and illuminance. Physical information such as (brightness), acceleration, temperature, humidity, power / current / voltage, flow rate (such as water and gas), the number of people in the predetermined section 1142, congestion status or human detection information, Movement information such as traffic conditions, structure information such as the temperature and strain of the structure, the shape, the number of cracks, and the internal cavity volume, etc., can be raised.

  FIG. 4C shows a configuration example in which a drive / communication module 1470 is used as a next example of the composite module 1295. The part of the other function module (functions other than communication) 1440 in FIG. 4A is a drive module 1670 in FIG. 4C. The external antenna 1480 and the communication module 1660 may be connectable (FIG. 4C (b)), or may be configured with the antenna built-in communication module 1666 including an antenna for transmitting / receiving a radio signal (FIG. 4C (a)). Is also good. In the embodiment of FIG. 4C (a), the communication module with built-in antenna 1666 and the driving module 1670 are arranged at remote locations from each other, and the two companies can perform remote cooperation 1444 via a remote cable or the like. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the communication module 1660 connectable to the external antenna 1480 and the driving module 1670 perform remote cooperation 1444 may be employed.

  The driving module 1670 defined here means a service providing related function unit for providing a specific service or a state change control function unit used for controlling a predetermined state change in the system α_1132. The term "actuator" as used herein in the term drive module is easily misunderstood to be limited to only moving parts and moving parts with actual movement, but need not be accompanied by movement. Accordingly, specific examples of the function of the drive module include a function of displaying voices and images, a function of maintaining the intensity of light illuminance and odor, and a function of changing the functions, and an information transmission path for controlling the functions. A predetermined information transmission function (such as a remote control function), an information communication relay function, or a remote operation function (of the predetermined device 1250) serving as a unit may be provided.

  The sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 described so far often communicate information relatively passively under the control of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128). In contrast, the processor / communications module 1465 shown in FIG. 4D performs a relatively spontaneous or active function. In this embodiment, not only the device controller 1240 in the device 1250 but also the processor 1230 (FIG. 2) in the system controller α_1126 and the processor in the system controller β_1128 as control (process) function realizing means in the processor / communication module 1465. 1734 (FIGS. 17A / B). In particular, the communication module 1202-3 in the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 enables information communication with a device (for example, the server α_1116-n) installed outside the system α_1132 or the system β_1134. Here, the information communication function in the system α_1132 (or the system β_1134) is at least required as the composite module 1295. Accordingly, in FIG. 4D, the inside of the communication module 1202-3 is functionally separated into a communication module 1752 in the same system and a communication module 1758 outside the system, and only the communication module 1752 in the same system constitutes the processor / communication module 1465. Take shape. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the communication module 1758 for outside the system may be included in the processor / communication module 1465. Also, when the processor (communication module) 1465 that has been set (defined) exists in the device 1250, the device 1250 often does not originally include the communication module 1758 outside the system.

  In the case where the processor / communication module 1465 relatively or spontaneously performs a function in the network system α_1132 (or β_1134), the management information (table) related information described later with reference to FIGS. In many cases, information recorded in the recording area 1740 is utilized. Therefore, when the processor / communication module 1465 is required to perform spontaneous / active functions, a part of the memory units 1242 and 1246 in the device 1250 and the memory in the system controller α_1126 are stored in the processor / communication module 1465. A part of the unit 1232 (FIG. 2) or a part of the memory unit 1248 in the system controller β_1128 (FIG. 17A / B) may be included.

  For example, when the system controller α_1126 reads the information recorded in the memory unit 1242 in the device 1_1250-1 in FIG. 2, generally, between the processor 1230 in the system controller α_1126 and the device controller 1240-1 in the device 1_1250-1. It is necessary to exchange advanced communication information exchanged at the same time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4E, a memory / communication module 1475 composed of only a recording area 1740 for management information (table) related information in the memory sections 1242, 1246, 1232, and 1248 and a corresponding communication module 1752 in the same system. With this configuration, information communication can be directly performed between the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) and the memory / communication module 1475 using a very simplified communication protocol. Therefore, the memory / communication module 1475 has an effect of simplifying communication of information recorded in the recording area 1740 of the management information (table) related information therein.

  As functions realized by the other function module 1440 in FIG. 4A, only a single function example has been described in FIGS. 4B to 4E. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of different functions may be realized in one composite module 1295 as shown in FIG. 4F. For example, a plurality of different sensing functions (corresponding to the sensor modules 1_1260-1 and 2_1260-2) and a plurality of different driving (operating) functions (corresponding to the driving modules 1_1670-1 and 21670-2) and control ( A process function (corresponding to the processors 1230 and 1734 or the device controller 1240), a memory function (corresponding to the memory units 1232 and 1248), and a display function (display module 1226) may be simultaneously realized. Further, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4F, the sensor module 1_1260-1 and the drive module 1670-2 are individually arranged at a place far away from the place where the antenna 1480 and the communication module 1660 are connected, and a long-distance cable or the like is provided. A structure that allows remote cooperation 1444 may be used.

In FIG. 4F, each of the other function modules having functions other than the communication is individually wired and connected from the communication module 1660. However, instead of being connected for each other function module, the communication module 1660 and many other function modules may be connected to a common bus line. In this case, the other function module directly connected to the communication module 1660 changes over time based on the selector action or the address designation.
Section 1.4 Description of Structure in Sensor / Communication Module FIG. 5 shows a more specific and detailed structural example in the sensor / communication module 1460 outlined in FIG. 4B. As a basic structure, a sensor signal or detection information obtained by the sensor module 1260 is transferred to the communication module 1660. This sensor signal or detection information is transmitted to the communication module 1202-3 (FIG. 2) in the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1660. Here, processing of information communicated by the communication middleware layer APL02 conforming to the C-format described later in Chapter 2 with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B is also executed in the communication module 1660 in FIG.

  On the other hand, electric power supplied to the sensor module 1260 and the communication module 1660 is obtained from a power storage module (battery) 1554. Further, a (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 having a photoelectric conversion function is built in the sensor / communication module 1460 in FIG. 5, and the (solar) power generation module (solar cell) having the photoelectric conversion function is provided. Electric power generated in 1552 is stored in power storage module (battery) 1554. Although FIG. 5 illustrates a (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 having a photoelectric conversion function as a power generation unit, any other energy conversion unit may be used instead. As an energy conversion means other than the above-mentioned photoelectric conversion element, for example, a thermo-electric conversion means such as a thermocouple may be used. An end user may wear the sensor / communication module 1460 having such a built-in thermo-electric conversion means, and operate the sensor / communication module 1460 by power generation using the body temperature of the end user. As still another embodiment, the wireless energy received by the communication module 1660 from the communication module 1202-3 in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 2 may be converted into electric power and stored, and the near-field communication module 1560 described later may be connected to an external device. May be converted into electric power and stored. In this manner, by incorporating the energy conversion means such as the (solar) power generation module 1552 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in the sensor / communication module 1460, the sensor / communication module 1460 can be used for a long time without external power supply. Operation becomes possible.

  When measuring light, external temperature, or external humidity using the sensor module 1260 at a place, or when the sensor module 1260 corresponds to a human sensor or the like, the sensor module 1260 is used for the devices 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, 5_1250-5 (FIG. 2). At the same time, the (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 is also mounted so as to be exposed on the surfaces of the devices 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, and 5_1250-5.

  If the sensor / communication module 1460 is left in a dark place for a long time, the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 decreases, and there is a risk that a sufficient amount of power cannot be supplied to the sensor module 1260 and the communication module 1660. On the other hand, when the output voltage of the power storage module (battery) 1554 or the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 falls below a predetermined reference value, the system controller α_1126 in FIG. . More specifically, as will be described in detail in Chapter 2 with reference to FIG. 14, information indicating that “the remaining battery level is low” is transmitted from a specific sensor / communication module 1460 to the system controller α_1126 in the form of “alarm notification”. Will be notified. When the processor 1230 in the system controller α_1126 detects a decrease in the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 incorporated in the specific sensor / communication module 1460, the processor 1230 notifies the end user via the user I / F unit 1234. As described above, the output voltage or the storage amount of the power storage module (battery) 1554 is appropriately notified to the system controller α_1126, so that the operation stop of the specific sensor / communication module 1460 due to the reduction in the power storage amount can be prevented, and the system of the present embodiment can be prevented. This has the effect of ensuring the overall operation stability.

The near-field communication module 1560 capable of near-field wireless communication is also built in the sensor / communication module 1460 shown in FIG. As the proximity wireless transfer technology used here, for example, TransferJet or FeliCa (registered trademark) (a coined word combining Felicity and Card) of the non-contact type IC card standard may be applied. As a method of using the near-field communication module 1560, in addition to the above-described power supply from the outside, the near-field communication module 1560 may be used for detecting the installation location of the sensor / communication module 1460 at the time of initial setting as described below. Specifically, when the composite module 7_1295-7 corresponding to the sensor / communication module is installed alone in the system of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 2 (or a device incorporating the composite module 6_1295-6 corresponding to the sensor / communication module) As an initial setting for (when 2_1250-2 is installed), a portable external device (not shown) having a built-in GPS (Global Positioning System) function is approached to communicate with the near-field communication module 1560. The GPS position information at this time is notified to the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1202-3. As a result, the position information where the combined module 7_1295-7 corresponding to the sensor / communication module alone (or the device 2_1250-2 incorporating the combined module 6_1295-6 corresponding to the sensor / communication module) is registered in the system controller α_1126. Is done. This registration information is stored in the memory unit 1232 (FIG. 2) in the system controller α_1126, for example, as information in the format of FIG. 23 described in Chapter 2. Since the installation position of the sensor / communication module 1460 can be known by incorporating the GPS function and performing initial setting by near-field communication by a portable external device, it is possible to provide an effect that a detailed service can be provided to an end user.
Section 1.5 Description of Structure in Drive / Communication Module FIGS. 6A to 6D show more specific and detailed structural examples in the drive / communication module 1470 outlined in FIG. 4C. When the drive / communication module 1470 that can be controlled from the outside is used as a part of a circuit (a circuit component) in the device 1250, the function of the circuit component is “ON / OFF switch”, “predetermined voltage output”, or “variable voltage output”. Resistance ”function in many cases. In the present embodiment, the standard functions (most frequently used in the circuit) are provided as modules in the specific device 1250. Thus, there is a feature in that the cost of the corresponding device 1250 and the ease of assembly are improved. Among the functions described above as examples, the internal structure of the drive / communication module 1470 that provides the function of “variable resistance value” is shown in FIG. 6A, and the internal structure of the drive / communication module 1470 that provides the function of “ON / OFF switch” FIG. 6B shows the structure, and FIG. 6C shows the structure inside the drive / communication module 1470 which provides the function of “predetermined voltage output”. In order to provide a function of “variable resistance value” and a function of “ON / OFF switch”, an input terminal 1602 and an output terminal 1604 are required. FIG. 6A shows a structure in which a variable resistance section 1610 is arranged between the two terminals so that a variable resistance value between the two companies can be set. On the other hand, in FIG. 6B, a conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614 is provided between both terminals to form an ON / OFF switch between the two. A CMOS (Complementary Metal-oxide-Semiconductor) type FET (Field-effect Transistor) element may be used as a specific circuit element of the variable resistance section 1610 and the conduction / cutoff switching section 1614. Here, an element having a gentle gamma characteristic (resistance characteristic between the input terminal 1602 and the output terminal 1604 with respect to the input voltage applied to the variable resistance unit 1610 or the conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614) (even if the applied input voltage value is largely changed) An element having a gradual change in resistance value is used for the variable resistance section 1610, and an element having a steep gamma characteristic (a slight change in input voltage around a predetermined threshold value causes the resistance value to change from a conductive state close to “0” to a resistance value). (A device that rapidly changes to a “very large” disconnection state) can be used for the conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described CMOS type FET element, and any circuit element that provides a function of providing a variable resistance value under some control or a function of an ON / OFF switch may be used. On the other hand, the terminal for outputting the “predetermined voltage” may be a single voltage output terminal 1606 as shown in FIG. 6C. The output voltage output from this terminal is connected to the output of the predetermined voltage generator 1618 in the drive module 1670. In the present embodiment, as a specific circuit example in the predetermined voltage generation unit 1618, a constant voltage source generated inside the drive / communication module 1470 or a constant voltage (for example, power supply voltage) supplied from the outside to a ground line (earth line) ) To extract an intermediate voltage from a variable resistor connected between the variable resistor and a current supply buffer circuit (electrons capable of supplying a relatively large external current to maintain an output voltage even when the external impedance is low. Circuit). However, the invention is not limited thereto, and any method or circuit capable of generating and maintaining a predetermined voltage may be used.

  6A to 6C, the set value is provided from the communication module 1660 located outside the drive module 1670. Here, the feature of the present embodiment lies in that the storage unit of the set value is internally possessed so that the set value does not change even if the power of the drive / communication module 1470 is cut off. 6A, the setting state storage unit 1624 in FIG. 6B, and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 in FIG. 6C. Each of these is configured by a nonvolatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND (Not And) memory as an example. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the storage unit may be configured by any nonvolatile memory. That is, in any of FIGS. 6A to 6C, the set value notified from the communication module 1660 is once notified to the set resistance value storage unit 1620, the set state storage unit 1624, and the set voltage storage unit 1628. Is stored. At the same time, the stored setting values are output from those storage units, and control the operation of the variable resistance unit 1610, the conduction / cutoff switching unit 1614, or the predetermined voltage generation unit 1618.

  When the driving modules 1270-1 and 1270-6 are used for controlling the setting of the devices 1_1250-1 and 5_1250-5 in FIG. 2 and changing the setting state, specifics of these driving modules 1270-1 and 1270-6 are used. An extended form of the remote controller using existing infrared communication may be adopted as a suitable form. That is, a drive / communication module 1470 (a type of composite module 1295) is configured by the drive module 1270-1 and the communication module 1202-4 in the device 1_1250-1, and is separated from the device 1_1250-1 as a “new type remote controller”. Can be placed in a different position. Similarly, a drive / communication module 1470 (a type of composite module 1295) is configured by a drive module 1270-5 in the device 5_1250-5 and a part of the communication module 1202-10, and the device 5_1250- is referred to as a “new type remote controller”. 5 may be arranged at a remote position outside. As a specific example of the image, the “new remote controller” may be used as an extension system (alternative product) of a remote controller using conventional infrared communication attached to an air conditioner, a television, lighting equipment, or the like.

  FIG. 6D shows the internal structure of the drive / communication module 1470 suitable for this use method. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 6D, both control of transition between binary states such as “switching ON / OFF” (change of state setting) and control of “change of fine state setting by multi-value information” are both performed. Is possible. Control of transition between binary states (change of state setting) from the communication module 1660 that has received communication information exchanged in the network system α_1132 is stored or updated in the setting state storage unit 1624. On the other hand, the control information regarding “change of fine state setting by multi-value information” sent from communication module 1660 is stored or updated in set voltage storage section 1628.

  The information stored or updated in the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 is format-converted by the format conversion unit 1644, and then light emission modulated by the infrared light emitting element 1608 via the infrared light emission driving circuit 1648. , Reaches the remote control-compatible infrared light receiving unit in the device 1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5. Accordingly, the existing infrared communication remote controller is replaced with the drive / communication module 1470 shown in FIG. 6D without replacing the body of many existing devices 1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5 such as an air conditioner, a television, and lighting equipment. This has the effect that the existing device 1250 can be easily and cheaply incorporated into the network system α_1132.

  Here, with the minimum necessary functions required for the existing remote controller, the state at the time of controlling the device 1250 does not necessarily need to be stored. However, since the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 are built in the driving module 1670 in the driving / communication module 1460, there is an effect that the system controller α_1126 can later confirm the control history via the communication module 1660. . Note that a NAND (Not And) memory or another nonvolatile memory may be used for the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 as described above.

  Here, as the communication information transmitted between the system controller α_1126 and the drive / communication module 1470, a C-format described later in detail in Chapter 2 may be used. Hereinafter, a method of transferring communication information exchanged with the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 2 in the drive / communication module 1470 based on the C-format will be described. However, the information communication process may be performed with the system controller α_1126 in an A-format, an E-format, or any other format.

  First, when the system controller α_1126 issues an operation start (power ON) command to the existing device 1250 (issues a command) from the system controller α_1126, communication information from the system controller α_1126 to the corresponding drive / communication module 1470 ( The communication access control information 1830 in FIG. 14D is set to [111] (reset instruction), the multi-level transmission data part CTMDT is set to [0000], and the value of the binary transmission data part CT2DT is set to [1] ( ON). Then, when the communication module 1660 receives the information, the information of [1] (power ON) is transferred / stored in the setting state storage unit 1624 in the drive module 1670. The information passes through the setting state storage unit 1624 and is notified to the format conversion unit 1644, and is converted into information indicating that the power is turned on with the existing remote controller. Then, the converted information is transferred to the infrared light emission drive circuit 1648, and the light emission of the infrared light emitting element 1608 is controlled. The converted information is transmitted to the existing device 1250, and the device 1250 is turned on.

  By the way, in the C-format shown in FIG. 14D, the change setting (reset) of the multi-value information corresponding to, for example, a change in the set temperature of the air conditioner or a change in the illuminance of the lighting equipment can be performed together. In this case, the communication access control information 1830 in the communication information (FIG. 14D) from the system controller α_1126 to the drive / communication module 1470 is set to [111] (reset instruction), and the multi-level transmission data part CTMDT is set to [ 0000]. In this case, in the 5-bit information including the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT, a range from 0% to 100% is assigned to a value from [00010] to [11111]. Next, when the communication module 1660 receives the information, the changed set value is converted into a percentage. The information after the percentage conversion is transferred / stored to the set voltage storage unit 1628 this time. Further, the information passes through the set voltage storage unit 1628 and is notified to the format conversion unit 1644, and is converted into information indicating a state setting change value of the existing remote controller. Then, the converted information operates the infrared light emission drive circuit 1648 to control the light emission of the infrared light emitting element 1608, and the setting state of the existing device 1250 is changed.

  Next, a description will be given of a method in which the system controller α_1126 confirms a state already set in the drive / communication module 1470. In this case, first, communication information in which the communication access control information 1830 is set to [011] (response (data) request) is communicated from the system controller α_1126 to the drive / communication module 1470. When the communication module 1660 in FIG. 6D receives a response (data) request from the system controller α_1126, the communication module 1660 reads out information already stored in the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628. Then, the result is set in the binary transmission data section CT2DT or the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT in FIG. Here, the communication access control information 1830 in the communication information communicated from the drive / communication module 1470 to the system controller α_1126 is set to [010] (response response).

  The operation of the drive / communication module 1470 has been disclosed in the form of hardware (electric circuit) in consideration of the ease of explanation of the operation of the drive / communication module 1470 in the present embodiment. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the drive / communication module 1470 may be formed as a software module in the system of the present embodiment. However, even when the drive / communication module 1470 is formed by the software module, the input / output terminals 1602 and 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 or the infrared light emitting element 1608 as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are provided. The following describes a case where a software module is used. The processors 1960 and 1736 are built in the communication modules 1202-4 to 10 of FIG. 2 and the communication module 1660 of FIGS. 6A to 6D as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, and perform communication control processing according to a predetermined communication control program. It is carried out. The communication control program corresponds to any program language executable in the processors 1960 and 1736.

  Hereinafter, the program of the entire communication control will be referred to as a “main program”, and a predetermined small program block called from the main program will be referred to as a “subprogram module”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and Java (registered trademark) scripts that do not depend on an OS (Operation System) or Java applets corresponding to HTML / HTML5 are also considered and terms used in Java are also described. In a main program (Class) for causing a processor built in the communication module 1660 in FIGS. 6A to 6D to process, processing along a subprogram module (a predetermined method (Method)) corresponding to the driving module 1670 Is executed. In this sub-program module (predetermined method), processing corresponding to the input / output terminals 1602 and 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 is executed based on a preset value set in the sub-program module (predetermined method (Method)). Is done. When a setting change command is issued (command issuance) from the system controller α_1126 to the drive / communication module 1470 in FIG. 2, another “set value change” process is performed in the main program (Class). Call the subprogram module (another method) to perform the setting value change processing. After that, a corresponding process for the input / output terminals 1602 and 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 is executed based on the changed set value.

  In the above description, the drive / communication module 1470 included in one type of the composite module 1295 has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any combination module 1295 such as the sensor / communication module 1460, the processor / communication module 1465, and the memory / communication module 1475 may be realized by the above-described software module.

Although not shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D for simplification of description, the (solar) power generation module 1552 in the drive / communication module 1470 shown in FIGS. For example, an energy conversion means such as a power storage module (battery) 1554 and a near-field communication module 1560 may be incorporated.
Section 1.6 Description of Structure Example in Communication Module FIGS. 7A and 7B show structure examples in the externally mounted communication module 1660 of the antenna 1480 constituting the composite module shown in FIGS. 4A to 4F. 4A to 4E, the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 7A or the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 7B supports communication in the same system. An antenna 1480 is incorporated.

  Here, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) in FIG. 2, the device controllers 1240-1 and 1240-3 in the device 1_1250-1 or the device 5_1250-5, and the compound modules 1_11295-1 and 7_1295-7 that exist alone. The major feature of the present embodiment lies in that the device is devised so as to have a structure in which the same communication module 1660 can be used in common. In this way, by sharing the communication module 1660 having the same structure between many constituent members (the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) and the unit 1290) in the same network system α_1132, the communication module 1660 can be used by utilizing the mass production effect. This has the effect of lowering the cost.

As a specific method of realizing the above features, the communication module 1660 has a function common to all the composite modules 1295 shown in FIGS. 4B to 4F. Here, the functions common to all the composite modules 1295 shown in FIGS. 4B to 4F are:
1) supporting a common communication protocol used in the same network system α_1132; 2) supporting information communication of all information related to functions other than the communication function. As described in Sections 1.2 and 1.3, in the unit 1290 and the composite module 1295, the communication module 1660 is always connected to another function module having a function other than communication. Function becomes important.

  The communication module 1660 has the function of realizing the above [1] and [2]. Specifically, the function [1] described above is mainly realized by the communication control unit 1700 in FIG. 7A. Further, the function [2] is mainly realized in the interface unit 1710 in FIG. 7A. In FIG. 7A, the communication control unit 1700 / interface unit 1710 and the area are described separately for each function for easy understanding. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and circuits implementing the above two points may coexist, or some functions may be shared by the same circuit.

  In the present embodiment, the communication module 1660 is provided with versatility so that the communication module 1660 can be shared among many composite modules 1295. The present embodiment is also characterized by the structure of an interface unit (I / F unit) with the other function module 1440. Have. More specifically, the connection part with the other function module 1440 is separated into a content information I / F unit 1950 and an address information I / F unit 1940, and the connection method is determined according to the type of the other function module 1440 to be connected. Variable. Thereby, the versatility for various types of other function modules 1440 is improved, and an effect that can be applied to a multipurpose (various) composite module 1295 is produced.

  The above features are described in detail below. When the composite module 1295 takes the form of the single-function sensor / communication module 1460 shown in FIGS. 4B and 5 or the single-function drive / communication module 1670 shown in FIGS. 4C and 6A to 6D, the composite module If only the address information unique to 1295 and the address information of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) are stored, information communication within the network system α_1132 is established. Therefore, when connecting only one sensor module 1260 (FIG. 4B) or only one drive module 1670 (FIG. 4C) as the other function module 1440 (FIG. 4A), the address information I / F unit 1940 of FIG. Is not used.

  On the other hand, when used in the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) as a part of the processor / communication module 1465 in the form shown in FIG. 4D, the unit 1290 (communication partner) in the network system α_1132 ( Alternatively, the address information is different for each composite module 1295). Accordingly, the address information of the communication partner is notified from the processors 1230 and 1734 of FIG. 4D via the bus line 1490 to the communication module 1752 in the same system. At this time, an address information I / F unit 1940 is used as the address information transmission means (information transmission input / output terminal).

  When used in the memory / communication module 1475 as shown in FIG. 4E, the address range in which the recording area 1740 of the management information (table) related information is stored in the memory units 1242, 1246, 1232, and 1248 is represented by a bus. It must be specified from the communication module 1752 in the same system via the line 1490. Thus, in the processor / communication module 1465 shown in FIG. 4D and the memory / communication module 1475 shown in FIG. 4E, both the content information I / F unit 1950 and the address information I / F unit 1940 in FIG. Connected to.

  Meanwhile, at the end of section 1.3, a method of connecting to a plurality of other function modules using a common bus line instead of FIG. 4F has been described. In this case, a corresponding address of another function module directly connected to the communication module 1660 in a part of the address information I / F unit 1940 is specified. This makes it possible to switch over time with another function module directly connected to the communication module 1660.

  When wireless is used as a communication medium used for network communication in the network system α_1132, a current flows through the antenna 1480 on the transmitting side to transmit radio waves, and flows on the receiving side through the antenna 1480. A weak current is detected to detect a signal. Then, both the current supply corresponding to the antenna 1480 and the signal detection are performed in the information communication execution unit 3016.

  On the other hand, communication information exchanged between the information communication execution unit 3016 and another communication module 1660 via the antenna 1480 has the structure shown in FIG. (Note that a detailed description of the communication information shown in FIG. 11 will be described later in Section 2.2.) The communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) shown in FIG. The processing is performed in the unit 1710. That is, the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) are analyzed in the content extracting unit 1938, and necessary information is transmitted to the other function module 1440 via the content information I / F unit 1950. As a specific example, when the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) in FIG. 11B includes state setting change information (control information) for the device 1250 and the drive / communication module 1470, the specific The target content is decrypted in the content extraction unit 1938, and the decryption result is notified to the drive module 1670 via the content information I / F unit 1950. Then, the operation (or the state setting change) of the drive module 1670 is started in accordance with the content of the notification.

  Information input from the other function module 1440 via the content information I / F unit 1950 is subjected to format conversion in the content setting unit 1934 to generate communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT). As a specific example, when the connection destination of the content information I / F 1950 is the sensor module 1260, the sensor information obtained in the sensor module 1260 is converted into communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) in the content setting unit 1934. Is done. Then, the communication information is transmitted to the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) via the information communication execution unit 3016 and the antenna 1480.

  The information in FIGS. 11C to 11F in the structure in FIG. 11A is processed in the communication control unit 1700 in FIG. 7A. That is, the information shown in FIG. 11C to FIG. 11F is generated in the physical layer frame generation unit 1914, and is combined with the information shown in FIG. The communication information is transmitted to 3016 and transmitted. On the other hand, in receiving communication information, the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918 analyzes the communication information having the structure shown in FIG. 11A, and extracts the information shown in FIG. 11B to the content extraction unit 1938. Sent.

  If the address information I / F unit 1940 is connected at the time of transmission, the address information of the transmission destination is notified via the address information I / F unit 1940. Then, address information conforming to the format of FIG. 11A is generated in the address information generation unit 1924, and the communication information in FIG. 11A is generated in the physical layer frame generation unit 1914.

  If the address information I / F unit 1940 is connected at the time of reception, the information in FIG. 11C to FIG. Will be forwarded to Then, only predetermined address information is extracted in the address information extracting section 1928 and is passed to the address information I / F section 1940.

  When this communication module 1660 is used in the single-function sensor / communication module 1460, instead of not using the address information I / F unit 1940, the system controller α_1126 (system The address information of the controller β_1128) is stored in advance. Thereby, the sense information can be automatically communicated to the system controller α_1126 (system controller β_1128).

  When this communication module 1660 is used in single-function drive / communication module 1470, instead of not using address information I / F section 1940, address information extraction section 1928 stores its own address information in advance. I remember. That is, all pieces of wireless information detected in the information communication execution unit 3016 are transferred to the content extraction unit 1938 and the address information extraction unit 1928 via the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918. The receiving side address information extracted in the address information extracting unit 1928 is sequentially determined whether it matches its own address information. Here, if the receiving-side address information does not match its own address information, the information temporarily stored in the content extracting unit 1938 is appropriately discarded. Only when the address information on the receiving side matches the address information of the receiver itself, the information is determined to be communication information for the corresponding composite module 1295, and the information temporarily stored in the content extracting unit 1938 is transferred to the content information I / F 1950. .

  The series of processes described above is controlled by the processor 1960. In FIG. 7A, the connection line of the processor 1960 is omitted, but the processor 1736 may be directly connected to the bus line BUS or the like in FIG. .

  Another embodiment within communication module 1660 is shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is characterized in that the memory unit 1790 is built in the communication module 1660. Thus, when the unit 1290 including the communication module 1660 is moved into another system (for example, when the unit 1290 is moved from the system α_1132 to the system β_1134), it is possible to easily adapt to a different system easily. to be born.

  The external module connection unit 1778 in FIG. 7B corresponds to the content information I / F unit 1950 and the address information I / F unit 1940 in FIG. 7A. The signal processing unit 1780 in FIG. 7B corresponds to the content extraction unit 1938 and the content setting unit 1934 in FIG. 7A. 7B, the signal processing unit 1780 in FIG. 7B may further include the address information extracting unit 1928 and the address information generating unit 1924 in FIG. 7A. The unit 1918 and the physical layer frame generation unit 1914 may be included and corresponded.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 7B is used by attaching, embedding, bonding, or attaching to another function module 1440 having a function other than communication. Then, the composite module 1295 is configured by attaching, embedding, bonding, or mounting the communication module 1660. Then, as shown in FIG. 3A (b) or (c), a unit 1290 including the composite module 1295 is configured. The unit 1290 can take various forms such as parts, products, goods, devices, materials, and goods. Therefore, the communication module 1660 is used by attaching, embedding, bonding, or attaching to an integrated object such as any part, product, product, device, material, product, etc. (unit 1290).

  Specifically, the communication module 1660 has various functional blocks built on the insulating substrate 1660-1 using an integration technology. The communication module 1660 includes an antenna connection unit 1774 for connecting an antenna ANT_1772 for transmitting and receiving radio 1770. Here, the antenna ANT_1772 may be formed over the insulating substrate 1660-1 of the communication module 1660. The communication module 1660 has an external module connection 1778, and can be connected to, for example, a plurality of other function modules 1766-1, 1766-2,... 1766-n via the external module connection 1778. . Examples of the other function modules 1766-1, 1766-2,... 1766-n include a sensor module 1260 and / or a drive module 1670, a processor module 1680, a memory module 1680, a display module 1226, and the like.

  There are various sensors as the sensor module 1260 used in the other function module 1761-1-1766-n. Sensors include temperature detection, humidity detection, pressure detection, strain detection, water quality detection (using scientific reactions, filtration, etc.), gas detection (using scientific reactions), light / dark detection, There is a sensor that performs sound wave detection, color detection, pulse detection, and the like. One or a plurality of sensors are selectively set according to the usage environment of the communication module 1660. Further, different types of sensors may be prepared in combination depending on the order. Some sensors are connected to the external module connection unit 1778 via radio waves (radio waves, infrared rays, ultrasonic waves, etc.).

  Further, as a specific form of the drive module 1670 used in the other function module 1766-1-1766-n, an electric switch, a mechanical switch, a light emitting body, a heating element, a displaced object (shape storage medium), an elastic body (rubber) ) Is arbitrarily selected according to the purpose of use.

  Here, one or more of the other function modules 1766-1, 1766-2,... 1766-n may be configured on the insulating substrate 1660-1. In addition, some other function modules may be additionally connected via an external module connection unit 1778 as an option.

  The communication module 1660 has a power supply unit 1776, and can be connected to a power supply through the power supply unit 1776. The power supply may be arranged at a position remote from the communication module 1660. Further, a power supply mounting portion may be provided on insulating substrate 1660-1, and the power supply may be integrated with communication module 1660.

  By the way, as a method for storing power in a power supply (not shown), various methods described below are possible. As an example of such a method, there is a method in which a current from a power generating element that generates power by sunlight is charged in a storage unit. This method corresponds to the combination of the (solar) power generation module 1552 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in FIG. As another method, there is a method in which a current induced in a coil under the influence of an electromagnetic wave is charged in a power storage unit. This method corresponds to the combination of the near-field communication module 1560 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in FIG. Further, there is a method in which, when mechanical vibration is applied to a piezoelectric element, a voltage generated in the piezoelectric element is converted into a current and charged in a power storage unit. As the mechanical vibration, for example, pressure / vibration due to sound, pressure / vibration due to gas (wind, gas, etc.), pressure / vibration due to liquid (water, oil) or the like can be selectively used. Either one method or a combination of a plurality of methods is selected according to the usage environment of the communication module 1660.

  The antenna connection unit 1774, the external module connection unit 1778, and the power supply unit are connected to the signal processing unit 1780. In the communication module 1660, the processor 1736, the memory unit 1790, and the signal processing unit 1780 are connected via a bus BUS so that they can communicate with each other. Here, the processor 1736 controls the overall operation of the communication module 1660 based on the application stored in the application storage unit 1792 of the memory unit 1790.

  The processor 1736 and the signal processing unit 1780 operate based on the application, capture an output from the sensor module 1260, output a control signal to the drive module 1670 and the display module 1226, perform a cooperative control process with the processor module 1666, It performs input / output processing of recording information with respect to the module 1690, supply of a transmission signal to the antenna ANT_1772, capture of a reception signal from the antenna ANT_, processing of writing data to the memory unit 1790, processing of reading data from the memory unit 1790, and the like.

  The memory unit 1790 has an application change software storage unit 1791 and a security target data storage unit 1799. The memory unit 1790 further includes a drive module management data storage unit 1792, a sensor module management data storage unit 1796, a self-attribute data storage unit 1793, a life management data storage unit 1794, and an operation period management data storage unit 1795.

  The drive module management data storage unit 1792 inside the memory unit 1790 stores management data of the drive module 1670 connected via the external module connection unit 1778. The sensor module management data storage unit 1796 stores management data of the sensor module 1260 connected via the external module connection unit 1778.

  For example, the communication module 1660 may be inspected at the time of inspection of the communication module 1660 or at the time of factory shipment. When an inspection device (not shown) gives a predetermined command to the communication module 1660 via the antenna ANT_1772 at the time of inspection, the management data of the drive module 1670 stored in the drive module management data storage unit 1792 and / or Alternatively, the management data of the sensor module 1260 stored in the sensor module management data storage unit 1796 is read. The read management data is transmitted to the inspection device via the antenna ANT_1772. Accordingly, the inspection device can know the sensing capability and the driving capability of the communication module 1660.

  Although not shown in FIG. 7B, a processor module management data storage unit that stores management data of the processor module 1680 in a memory unit 1790, a memory module management data storage unit that stores management data of the memory module 1690, Alternatively, a display module management data storage unit for storing management data of the display module 1226 may be set.

  Incidentally, in the system of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of different systems (system α_1132 and system β_1134) are formed in the same domain 2_1122-2. Similarly, one or more systems (often a plurality of systems) are formed in each of the domains 1_1122-1 and 3_1122-3. Further, for example, a difference in a field to which the system is applied or a difference in a purpose of using the system, such as a response to a consumer field, a response to a social infrastructure field, or a response to a healthcare field, are allowed. Even if the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 including the communication module 1660 of FIG. 7B moves across a plurality of systems having different application fields and usage purposes from each other, optimal operation according to each system can be performed. I have. That is, when the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 moves between different systems α_1132 and β_1134 in the same domain 2_1122-2, or different systems in different domains 1_1122-1, 2_1122-2, and 3_1122-3, The major feature of the present embodiment lies in that the operation of the above-described composite module 1295 or unit 1290 is appropriately switched so as to be able to be optimized according to the field of application of the system α_1132 (or the system β_1134) to which the unit belongs. To enable the feature, an application storage unit 1792, an application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791, a security target data storage unit 1799 or a self-attribute data storage unit 1793, a life management data storage Unit 1794 and / or operation period management data storage unit 1795. As a result, there is an effect that flexible system compatibility of the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 in the present embodiment can be ensured and general-purpose use is possible.

  As described above, the communication module 1660 or 1202 shown in FIG. 7B is incorporated to configure a composite module 1295 (see FIG. 4) or a device 1250 (see FIG. 2) to form a unit 1290 (FIG. 3A). At the stage when the unit 1290 is formed, the application storage unit 1792 and the security target data storage unit 1799, the self-attribute data storage unit 1793, the life management data storage unit 1794, the operation period management data storage are performed using an external radio wave. Information may be recorded in advance in at least one of the sections 1795. Alternatively, the system controller α_1126 may write the above information at the time of a check-in process or a plug-in process executed after the user purchases the unit 1290 (described later in section 4.2).

  The application change software storage unit 1791 is used when an application that controls the operation of the communication module 1660 is modified or changed. For example, when the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 moves into a system different from the conventional one (for example, when moving from the system β_1134 to the system α_1132), the affiliation will be described later in section 4.2. "Plug-in processing" is executed each time the system changes. If the field of application or the purpose of use is significantly different between the system β_1134 before the movement and the system α_1132 after the movement, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) that manages / controls / operates the system α_1132 after the movement. 2 sends software for executing a new application via the communication module 1202-3 in FIG. Then, the software for executing the new application is appropriately stored in the application change software storage (application change software) 1791 described above. Since the processing of the processor 1736 is executed based on the software for executing the new application, when the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 moves to a system α_1132 having a completely different field of application or use purpose, the processing is optimal for the system α_1132. Operation is possible.

  Here, there are a case where the communication module 1660 requests a new application and a case where an application change command is given from the outside (for example, the system controller α_1126). The timing of changing the application is when the communication module 1660 is manufactured and shipped from the factory, when it is necessary to switch the operation mode during use, when the use environment of the communication module 1660 is changed (system There are various cases such as a case where the use period of the communication module 1660 has expired, such as movement between α_1132 and β_1134). By providing the application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791 inside the memory unit 1790 in this way, the communication module 1660 can freely change, add, or change the application according to the above-mentioned change in the use environment or the purpose of use. Can be updated.

  On the other hand, the application storage unit 1792 in the memory unit 1790 in FIG. 7B stores common application software independent of system changes. Therefore, even when the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 moves between different systems, the common application software previously stored in the application storage unit 1792 is stored / continuously used without being changed. You.

  The application software stored in the application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791 and the application storage unit 1792 is described in a predetermined program language (including a machine language) or a script language. The application software 3050 may include an API command 3045 (or a predetermined) corresponding to a predetermined OS_3030 as described later with reference to FIG. 18B. The invention is not limited thereto, and may be described in a Java script as described later with reference to FIGS. 19A and 19B, or may be described in a machine language or a language similar thereto. Further, it may be described in a Web-related language such as HTML (Hyper-text Markup Language) or XML (Extensible Markup Language).

The security target data storage unit 1799 can be used when storing, for example, personal information with high importance. The security target data storage unit 1799 may be used as a part for storing arbitrary data personally.
For example, as a scene where the communication module 1660 is used, the communication module 1660 may be buried in a personal chart holder in a hospital. In such a case, personal information (name, age, disease name, progress of medical examination) and the like may be stored in the security target data storage unit 1799. The medical record holder is not always used permanently and may be discarded. In addition, the medical chart holder may be replaced with a new one. In such a case, the security target data in the communication module of the old chart holder needs to be erased.

  Various methods can be used for erasing the security target data. For example, the communication module 1660 may not communicate with the system controller α_1126 for a certain period or more. In this case, it is determined that the communication module 1660 has been independently discarded or replaced, and the security target data is deleted. In some cases, the system controller α_1126 positively requests the communication module 1660 to delete the security target data. Furthermore, when the sensor module 1260 connected to the communication module 1660 detects a specific atmosphere and / or a detection element (for example, pressure, heat, humidity, liquid, or the like), the security target data may be deleted. . That is, when the sensor module 1260 detects a specific atmosphere and / or a detection element (eg, pressure, heat, humidity, liquid, or the like) in this manner, the processor 1736 automatically determines that the environment has changed from a normal usage environment. It is determined that the security target data is deleted. The invention is not limited to this, and the security target data may be deleted when predetermined various conditions are satisfied.

  On the other hand, for example, when an old chart holder is replaced with a new chart holder and it becomes necessary to move the security target data of the old chart holder to the new chart holder, the system controller α_1126 performs control such as inheritance or transfer of the security target data. You may go.

  The self-attribute data storage unit 1793 stores attribute data relating to the handling (handling) of a unit (product, part, material, product, or the like) to which the communication module 1660 is attached, adhered, mounted, or embedded, for example. The specific attribute data may include identification data (such as a product name, a part name, and a product name) of the corresponding unit, and identification data such as a manufacturing location and a manufacturer.

  For example, the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 may be bonded or embedded in an aluminum beverage can. Aluminum beverage cans are discarded after use and transported to a recycling factory. Here, if the information that "the material of the bonded or buried object is made of aluminum" is stored as the attribute data, the beverage can can be automatically classified into the aluminum processing unit in the recycling factory. . In this case, the entire recycling factory corresponds to the system α_1132, and the classification device in the recycling factory corresponds to the system controller α_1126. Then, the classification device corresponding to the system controller α_1126 transmits a specific command to the communication module 1660, and reads the self-attribute data. Then, it is possible to determine what the beverage can is based on the self-attribute data.

  On the other hand, a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 may be embedded in a plastic beverage bottle. In this case, the classification device sends a specific command to the communication module 1660 to read the self-attribute data and detect that the beverage can is made of plastic. Thereby, the classification device can easily and automatically classify the beverage can into the plastic processing section. However, the present invention is not limited to the above example, and any integrated object (part, product, product, product, device, material, material, Self-attribute data may be used for products and the like.

  When the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 moves across different systems, the environment in which the module is located may change. Then, the content of the self-attribute data may gradually change according to the environmental change. For example, when the beverage can is displayed at the store, the selling price of the beverage can, the display location in the store, or the product category may be stored in the memory unit 1790 as the self-attribute data. In this case, the system controller α_1126 for managing the inside of the store may use the self-attribute data to perform inventory management and settlement processing for customers.

  As another example, a case where the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) is used as a tag attached to a fish will be described. The fish suspended in the sea are transported to the port by fishing boats, purchased by traders at the port's auction market, transported by car, displayed at supermarkets, and purchased by consumers.

  A case where a temperature sensor and a humidity sensor for quality control are installed as the sensor module 1260 in the tag (combined module 1295 / unit 1290) integrated with the fish will be described. As the self-attribute data at this time, appropriate temperature range data, appropriate humidity range data, and expiration date data are stored. Here, the crew of the fishing boat or the market manager inputs the self-attribute data.

  When the temperature or humidity of the surrounding environment exceeds an appropriate range during the transportation or storage of the fish, the communication module 1660 outputs a first warning signal to the system controller α_1126 installed in the fishing boat or the transportation truck. Can be. Further, the second warning signal and the third warning signal can be output via the antenna 1772 even when the expiration date is approaching or the expiration date has passed.

  At the time of display at a store, a sales price, a display place in the store, a product category, and the like are added as self-attribute data. In this case, the above-described self-attribute data is automatically stored in the memory unit 1790 from another system controller α_1126 installed in the store. Using this self-attribute data, inventory management and settlement of accounts for customers can be performed.

  In accordance with the movement of the system in which the composite module 1295 / unit 1290 is arranged (belongs to) as described above, the system controller α_1126 that manages / controls / operates the system α_1132 automatically adds the self-attribute data 1793 or There is also a feature of the system of the present embodiment in a place where it can be updated. Accordingly, there is an effect that the flexibility and versatility of utilizing the corresponding composite module 1295 and unit 1290 are greatly improved. That is, by using the above-described added / updated self-attribute data, the system controller α_1126 can execute processing optimal for the system α_1132.

  Alternatively, the self-attribute data may be used as data for the communication module 1660 to respond to a specific command (request signal) and output a response signal indicating that the communication module 1660 is present. For example, communication module 1660 may be embedded in a surgical instrument or in a service tool of an aircraft or train. In this case, the work site is regarded as a specific system α_1132, and the system controller α_1126 installed at the work site requests the communication module 1660 for a response. The presence or absence of a response in the work site (system α_1132) can be used to determine whether or not there is a lost item such as a surgical instrument or an inspection tool at the work site. By utilizing the information communication processing relating to the self-attribute data, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of a lost item after an operation or after an inspection.

  As an example of using the self attribute data 1793 other than the above, the owner information of the corresponding unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295 or the device 1250) may be recorded in this area. When the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295 or the device 1250) on which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is sold, it is displayed at the store as described above. At this time, the inside of the displayed store corresponds to one system β_1134. Then, when the user purchases the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295 or the device 1250), the user moves it to his / her home. Then, the home of the purchased user corresponds to the system α_1132 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, before and after the purchase of the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295 or the device 1250), the system in which the unit 1290 is arranged changes. When the unit 1290 is placed in the user's home, the system controller α_1126 that manages / operates / collects information in the new system α_1132 performs a check-in process described later in section 4.2. At this time, the system controller α_1126 records user information on the owner in a part of the self-attribute data 1793. The user information is not limited to the owner name, but may be any of user ID information, user address information, telephone number information, mail address information, and the like. If the user information recorded in a part of the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded in this way, there is an effect that when the corresponding unit 1290 is left outside, it becomes easy to search.

  The owner is not limited to the direct owner of the unit 1290. That is, a person, an organization, or a company related to use of the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295 or the device 1250) is also included. Further, the composite module 1295 in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded may be a person, an organization, or a company related to the use of a product, a part, or a material that is installed, inserted, or mixed.

  As an example, a tablet or a powder medicine in which the composite module 1295 in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is inserted or mixed will be described. For example, when the drug is taken at a hospital, facility, or home, the system controller α_1126 records the name of the person who took the drug and the date and time of the drink in the self-attribute data 1793. In the self attribute data 1793, the name of the medicine is also recorded in advance. Then, even when the user who took this medicine goes out, the system controller β_1134 installed in the outside can manage “who took what medicine and when?”. For people with a chronic illness, regular dosing is very important but easy to forget. If the system controller β_1134 constantly manages the medication taking state as described above, the effect of forgetting to take a drink and causing a painful effect is produced.

By recording a plurality of pieces of information related to each other as the self-attribute data 1793 as described above, it is possible to easily manage the use state with high accuracy in the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded. .
Life management data for managing the life of the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) in which the communication module 1660 is built can be stored in the life management data storage unit 1794. The life management data indicates a life period in which the combined module 1295 (or the unit 1290) in which the communication module 1660 is built is used up. Then, when the life period has elapsed, the communication module 1660 automatically converges and stops. As a result, unnecessary radio waves are not emitted after the lifetime.

  For example, the use of the corresponding tag (composite module 1295 / unit 1290) is not required for the above-described beverage cans after disposal and fish after cooking. As described above, the life management data storage unit 1794 is provided in the memory unit 1790, and the activity is automatically stopped after the life period, so that unnecessary radio wave generation in the system α_1132 can be prevented. By preventing the generation of unnecessary radio waves, the effect of improving the information communication efficiency in the system α_1132 is produced.

Data for setting the operation period of the communication module 1660 can be stored in the operation period management data storage unit 1795. When the communication module 1660 has an operation period and a sleep period according to the use environment and use conditions, the power saving effect is improved and the effect of preventing interference with surrounding devices is also obtained. As the operation period management data, for example, the operation period and the sleep period can be set in units of time, or the operation period and the sleep period can be set according to the sensor output.
Section 1.7 Description of overall structure of wide area network system in the present embodiment The outline of the system in the present embodiment has been described in section 1.1. In contrast, in this section, the overall structure of the wide area network system according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the service provider B_1112-2 obtains goods (or information) from wholesalers B1_1104-1 and / or wholesalers B2_1104-2 that handle similar goods (or information) and provides a service. .

  Here, the wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 mean a base closing organization or organization that handles predetermined products and information. As a specific example of the institution or organization, for example, not only a company related to a private profit organization such as a foundation corporation or a business corporation, but also a public organization such as a nation, a local government, a public corporation or a public interest corporation may be supported. Therefore, the position of the wholesaler viewed from the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 is not limited to “commercial business partner”, and may correspond to “predetermined service consignee” or “prescribed service guidance or authorization partner”. good. For example, when the wholesaler corresponds to a business partner of the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3, the products handled by the wholesaler are not limited to public consumption such as electricity, gas, water, and gasoline, but are also general consumption and money. , Fixed assets such as real estate such as bonds, precious metals, etc., and information with commercial value that is difficult to obtain on the normal Internet (market research information, specialized for specific individuals and specific regions) Information (weather information or traffic information limited to a very small area) may be targeted.

  Next, the service providers A to C — 1112-1 to 3 in the system of the present embodiment mean organizations or groups that provide predetermined services. In particular, the service providers A to C — 1112-1 to 3 also have a feature of performing “integrated management regarding a predetermined service”. The service provided by the service provider may correspond to any type of service using information obtained from the sensor module 1260 described later. In particular, information obtained from the sensor modules in domains 1 to 3_11122-1 to 3 to be described later via the network and a part of information related thereto are transmitted to the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2, and based on the information. This is characterized in that the service provider B_1112-2 can provide a predetermined service. As described above, in the system according to the present embodiment, it is possible for the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 to download products and information from the domains 1 to 3_11122-1 to 3_1. Further, the service provider B_1112-2 owns a plurality of servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n and manages the databases 1118-1 to n for each of the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n. Further, cooperative distributed processing is performed between the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n, and the processing is speeded up. Although omitted in FIG. 1, a server and a database corresponding to the server are similarly installed in the service provider A_1112-1 and the service provider C_1112-3.

As one of the concrete operations of the service provider, goods and information wholesaled from the wholesaler A_1102 or the wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 are distributed in the domains 1-3_11122-1-3 (both inflows and outflows). Included). An example of this specific service is shown below.
α] Retail service to end users of products and information handled by wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 β) Products and information handled by wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 independently Processed and provided to the end user using the processing result γ] Provide the service determined to be optimal based on the information obtained from the sensor module δ] Combination of the above [α]-[γ] The products handled by the service provider are not limited to retailing of public consumption materials such as electricity, gas, water and gasoline, but may be retailing of general consumption materials, retailing of current assets and fixed assets, and the like. In addition, information (products) to be handled includes, but is not limited to, information with commercial value that is difficult to obtain on the normal Internet (market research information, information specific to specific individuals or specific areas (weather information limited to very small areas) And traffic information)) may be handled as commodities.

  On the other hand, the service provider A_1112-1 obtains goods (or information) different from the wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 from the wholesaler A_11102, and provides another type of service. Here, between the service provider A_1112-1 and the service provider B_1112-2, or between the service provider B_1112-2 and the service provider C_1112-3, information sharing or resource coordination 1114 is performed with each other to improve the efficiency and sophistication of the service. ing. In the service provider A_1112-1, a predetermined product storage unit 1154 for storing products obtained from the wholesaler A_1102 is installed. Then, the predetermined product generation unit 1152 in the service provider A_1112-1 shown in FIG. 1 manufactures a new product using the product to be obtained from the wholesaler A_1102 as a material, or obtains the product (or the product obtained from the wholesaler A_1102). Information) to produce new products (or new information). Although not shown in FIG. 1, a predetermined product storage unit 1154 and a predetermined product generation unit 1152 are also installed in the service provider B_1112-2 and the service provider C_1112-3.

  The predetermined product generation unit 1152 shown in FIG. 1 means a place where a unique product to which a unique added value is added is generated. As a specific example of the generation of the unique product, there is a processing of raw materials purchased from the wholesaler A_1102. For example, in the manufacturing industry, a product manufacturing factory or the like corresponds to the predetermined product generation unit 1152. Further, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, a substation, a transmission station, or the like as an electric power plant or a related peripheral device that owns a solar cell, a wind power generator, a thermal power generator, a geothermal generator, or the like may be used. . In addition, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to the above, and a place of production of other public consumables such as a gasoline smelter or a water storage facility may be made to correspond to the embodiment of the predetermined product generation unit 1152. Further, as another product form other than the above, a place where “unique information created in the service provider A” is generated may be made to correspond to the predetermined product generation unit 1152. For example, market trend information, weather forecast information, and the like also correspond to one form of the product as newly obtained analysis information as a result of analyzing various information published on the Internet.

In the meantime, the predetermined product storage unit 1154 shown in FIG. 1 temporarily stores any of the following products (including information).
α] merchandise and information wholesaled from wholesaler A_1102 or wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 β) merchandise and information generated by the predetermined merchandise generator 1152] merchandise extracted from domains 1-3_1122-1-3 And information δ] a combination of the above [α] to [γ], for example, when the product that is temporarily stored is electric power, the predetermined product storage unit 1154 includes a storage battery and a charge / discharge amount monitoring unit (a smart meter in the system α_1132). 1124) and a charge / discharge amount control unit. On the other hand, when the product to be temporarily stored is clean water or city gas, it is composed of a water or gas tank, a storage / release amount monitor unit, and a storage / release amount control unit.

  The side receiving the service from the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 is the domain 2_1122-2 described later or the system α_1132 (details described later). The system is a system for directly paying for the provision of the service to the service providers A to C — 1112-1 to 3. Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2 and the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in the service provider A_1112-1 are provided with the domain 2_11122-2 and the smart meter 1124 installed in the system α_1132. And a network controller α_1126 to be described later. Also, as described by the broken line in FIG. 1, the smart meter 1124 is connected to the wholesaler A_1102 via a network, and can directly communicate information. In FIG. 1, the communication partner of the measured value of the smart meter 1124 is the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2, the system controller α_1126 in the same system α_1132, or the wholesaler A_1102. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the measured value of the smart meter 1124 is communicated to the system controller β_1134 existing in the same domain 2_11122-2 but belonging to a different system β_1134 or another device in the same domain 2_11122-2. Is also good.

  The smart meter 1124 refers to a device (Device) that measures the amount of incoming and outgoing goods (similar) between the inside and outside of the domain 2_1122-2 (or the system α_1126) for each predetermined time interval. I do. Mainly refers to the measurement of the volume of public consumption such as electricity meters, gas meters, water and water meters, and sewage meters, and particularly from the inside to the outside in parallel with the amount of inflow from the outside (or internal consumption). Volumes (eg, sold externally) also have characteristics that can be collected as measurements. However, in the system of the present embodiment, not only the inflow and outflow of the public consumables, but also the inflow and outflow of general consumables and liquid assets or specific information purchased by mail order or the like are measured by the smart meter 1124, and as a result, May be communicated.

  In particular, in the system of the present embodiment, the communication module 1202-1 is built in the smart meter 1124 (FIG. 8A), and has a function of transmitting the measured value of the smart meter at predetermined time intervals. Further, the time interval for transmitting the communication can be appropriately changed by the server n_1116-n, the system controller α_1126, the wholesaler A_1102, or the like. Further, the timing at which the measured value obtained from the smart meter 1124 is transmitted and transmitted is not limited to the above-described predetermined time, and may be transmitted as appropriate in response to a request from the system controller α_1126, the server n_1116-n, or the wholesaler A_1102. Alternatively, the communication may be performed when the smart meter 1124 voluntarily determines that communication transmission to the outside is necessary.

  An embodiment of a service mode provided by the service provider A 1102 using the smart meter 1124 will be described below. In this embodiment, predetermined products and predetermined information previously stored in the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in the service provider A 1102 are stored in the domain 2_1122-2 (or in the system α_1132) via the system controller α_1126 or the smart meter 1124. Supplied to Conversely, surplus merchandise remaining in the domain 2_1122-2 (or in the system α_1132) may be returned to the predetermined merchandise storage unit 1154 via the smart meter 1124. In this case, the difference value between the product amount supplied from the predetermined product storage unit 1154 into the domain 2_1122-2 (or the system α_1132) and the product amount returned to the predetermined product storage unit 1154 via the smart meter 1124 is calculated. A fee is charged from the service provider A_1112-1 as the used product amount.

  At the same time, the merchandise (or information) may be directly received using an infrastructure or a distribution system owned or managed by the wholesaler A_1102 or the wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2. That is, supply of goods (or information) handled by the wholesaler A_1102 in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 in the domain 2_1122-2 via the smart meter 1124 according to the broken line from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124 in FIG. You may receive it directly. In this case, information regarding the content and quantity of the product (or information) supplied in the domain 2_1122-2 at the same time is sequentially notified from the smart meter 1124 to the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2. The user is periodically charged by the service provider B_1112-2 based on the notification information. Here, there are a plurality of merchandise supply routes from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124 serving as a window for supplying predetermined goods in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 (“from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124”). The present embodiment system shown in FIG. 1 is characterized in that a new unique service based on the service provider A_1112-1 can be provided by the existence of the direct path indicated by the broken line and the path via the service provider A_1112-1. . The unique effect that takes advantage of this feature will be described in detail in section 5.2.1.

  Next, a description will be given of the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 in which the service can be provided from the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 via the wide area network. As shown in FIG. 1, one domain 2_1122-2 is composed of one or more systems α / β_1132 / 1134, and a system controller α / β_1126 / 1128 is installed in each system α / β_1132 / 1134. ing. In addition, the system controller α / β_1126 / 1128 or the smart meter 1124 is connected to the network directly or via a server n_1116-n to enable information communication between them. The system α_1132 is allowed to be divided into a plurality of sections 1 to m — 1142-1 to m (sections will be described in detail in Chapter 4).

  As described above, the present embodiment system is characterized in that a plurality of different systems (client systems) can coexist simultaneously. That is, taking into account the contents described in FIG. 2, a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating and communicating information and a system controller α_1126 (and β_1128) acquiring and managing the information from the unit 1290 are provided. A composite client system (corresponding to domain 2_1122-2 in FIG. 1) including a plurality of client systems α_1132 (and β_1134) (a plurality of client systems α_1126 and client systems β_1134). The system controller α_1126 which manages the included client system α_1132 manages a plurality of units 1295-1 to -7-7 in a section to be managed (section 1 in FIG. 2). _1142-1, section 2_1142-1, and section m_1142-m), and holds information (section information in FIG. 23) on the section to which each unit belongs.

  Here, the above domains 1-3 to 1122-1 to 3-2 mean a network space composed of one or a plurality of systems cooperating with each other. In particular, the domain in the system of the present embodiment corresponds to "a network space to be subjected to various state observations" or "a network space to be subjected to a predetermined operation or execution or a network space to be operated and executed (related to a specific service)". I do. Here, in order to participate in and operate in a specific domain, an identification information ID (Identification Information) unique to the domain and a unique password may be required. If one system α / β_1132 / 1134 is made to correspond to a specific area physically or geographically close, one domain 1 to 3 — 1122-1 to 3 is assigned to the physical or geographical space. Corresponds to a predetermined area on the network managed / used by the members of the specific group that exceeds.

  Next, the above-mentioned system α_1132 means a minimum network system unit in which the inside is connected to each other via a network and one system controller α_1126 is installed inside. This network system is managed or operated by the system controller α_1126 described above. In particular, as a specific area physically or geographically close to one or more specific users (for example, an area defined within an activity range of one or more specific users within a predetermined time), one system α_1132 May be located in a physical or geographical area. In addition, one system α_1132 in the system of the present embodiment is specifically based on predetermined identification information in a PAN (Personal Area Network), a LAN (Local Area Network), a MAN (Metropolitan Area Network), a WAN (Wide Area Network), or the like. It can correspond to the specified network unit. For example, IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) 802.15.4 specifies the setting of individual identification information PANID (Personal Area Network Identifier) for each PAN, which is specified by this specific PANID. One PAN may be associated with one system in the present embodiment. As another specific example, one system may be associated with one home (Home), one vehicle, one mobile terminal peripheral space, one work environment (Work Station Area), or the like.

  The system controller α / β_1126 / 1128 is one or more devices that are arranged in one system and perform communication control and communication state management and operation in a network system corresponding to the system α / β_1132 / 1134. Point to. In addition, as described above, it is also connected to a wide area network (a network used for information communication with the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3) outside the system α / β_1132 / 1134 via the system controller α / β_1126 / 1128. I have. The system controller α / β_1126 / 1128 collects signals and information obtained from one or more sensor modules (a sensor module 1260 described later with reference to FIGS. 8A and 9) in the same system α / β_1132 / 1134. Built-in processor for proper processing. Specific examples of the system controller include one personal computer (PC), a mobile terminal such as a smart phone, a tablet, and a mobile phone; a distribution board with a built-in processor; a refrigerator with a built-in processor; A recording device for recording the information may be used. A processor may be built in the smart meter 1124, and the function of the system controller α_1126 may be provided in the smart meter 1124 itself. Alternatively, the processor and the communication module (FIG. 8A, A communication module 1202) described later with reference to FIG. 9 may be incorporated and used as a system controller. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, any processor with a built-in processor in which a program for collecting signals and information obtained from sensor modules in the system and providing appropriate services to the user is set to correspond to the system controller. Is also good. Also, one system controller may be configured based on a physical combination / cooperation of a plurality of devices.

  In particular, if the remote controller used as a system controller with a built-in processor and communication module inside is temporarily placed on a wall or a shelf in a fixed or movable form such as screwed, the unique usage (and the resulting Effect) is born. However, in this case, it is necessary to fix or dispose it in a place where infrared communication can be performed with main devices such as an air conditioner, a television, and a lighting fixture. Furthermore, sensor / communication modules (described later with reference to FIG. 8B) related to a temperature sensor, a wind sensor, or a short-range motion sensor are installed throughout the room, and the remote controller (system controller α_1126) Within the system α_1132. This allows the user to efficiently control the temperature of only the place where a plurality of users are present in the room with high priority, or to control the display method of the naked-eye television so that the display method can be viewed three-dimensionally at the place of the plurality of users at the same time. Can provide good service. As a result, by simply replacing the existing remote controller with the remote controller with the system controller function described above, it is possible to operate it more efficiently without replacing the existing main units (such as air conditioners, televisions, and lighting fixtures). Effect is produced.

In a conventional technology called M2M (Machine to Machine) or IoT (Internet of Things), a cloud server (corresponding to the server n_1116-n in FIG. 1) collects all signals and information obtained from a home sensor module in each house. In many cases, services were directly provided from cloud servers to end users. In this case, the system controller α_1126 functions as a gateway and a router shown in FIG. 9 only to relay the transmission of signals and information on the network. In such prior art, (1) since the personal information of the user is easily transmitted to the relatively public server n_1116-n, there is a problem from the viewpoint of protecting the personal information of the user. (2) The system controller α_1126 or There is a problem that there is a vulnerability in the entire system that if a trouble occurs in a communication line between the smart meter 1124 and the server n_1116-n, service to an end user is interrupted. In the present embodiment, the system controller α_1126 is not limited to a function of transmitting and relaying signals and information on a network as a gateway or a router, but also determines, integrates, processes, or determines or integrates signals and information from a sensor module collected by a built-in processor. It is unique in that it performs a specific process including a unique service to the underlying user. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, (1) the system controller α_1126 independently determines whether transmission of individual signals or information to the server n_1116-n is possible, and thus protection of personal information of the user is maintained. (2) Collection from the sensor module The system controller α_1126 can provide a unique service to the user based on the determined signals and information, and this service can be executed regardless of the presence or absence of a communication line trouble with the server n_1116-n. The effects such as improvement are produced. In particular, the system controller α_1126 in the present embodiment integrates the information obtained from the sensor module 1260 and integrates the behavior of the user (behavior such as presence / absence of the user or sleep / wake) and the situation (for example, whether the user is a child / adult?). Is characterized in that it has a function that can determine / estimate, and can further perform estimation to the user's request. As a result, even in a state where the server n_1116-n is not provided, there is an effect that a comfortable service can be provided to the user independently in the domain 2_1122-2.

  Further, the system of this embodiment has a great feature in that cooperative work can be performed among a plurality of system controllers α / β_1126 / 8 in the same domain 2_1122-2. Accordingly, one system controller α_1126 collects signals and information obtained from all sensor modules (not shown, but also included in the system β_1134) existing in the same domain 2_1122-2. It is possible. As a result, there is an effect that the system controller α_1126 can provide the optimal service in the system α_1132 to the user by integrating and using the information in the same domain 2_11122-2.

In the system according to the present embodiment, as the emphasis work between the plurality of system controllers α / β_1126 / 8 in the same domain 2_1122-2, as shown in FIG. 1, the system controller α / β_1126 / 8 and a network path in which the system controller α / β_1126 / 8 indirectly exchanges information between the system controllers α / β1126 / 8 via the server n_1116-n using, for example, the Internet path. There are features. As a result, there is an effect that the user can receive various services. For example, when a system controller α_1126 that is a home PC and a system controller β_1128 corresponding to a portable terminal such as a smartphone or a tablet are physically close to each other, a WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) or a WPAN (Wireless Personal Local Area Network) is provided. ) To exchange information at high speed. On the other hand, by using an Internet line including a wire on the way, there is an effect that mutual information exchange is guaranteed no matter how far apart the two are physically. On the other hand, by directly exchanging information, a private service can be obtained independently without involvement of the server n_1116-n. Therefore, personal confidential information leaks to the relatively public server n_1116-n. Danger can be prevented. On the other hand, the server n_1116-n can acquire information that cannot be acquired in the domain 2_1122-2, such as local weather forecast information and traffic congestion information, using another network route. Therefore, by indirectly exchanging information between the system controllers α / β_1126 / 8 via the server n_1116-n, it is possible to provide users with various services utilizing information owned by the server n_1116-n. By appropriately switching the network communication path in this way, there is an effect that various services can be provided more than the user desires. As described above, since the system controller α_1126 can estimate the user's action or state or the user's desire / request, the connection route between the system controllers α / β_1126 / 8 can be switched by the system controller α_1126's own judgment. .
Section 1.8 Description of Local Network System Structure in the Present Embodiment In section 1.1, the structure in the local network system configured in system α_1132 included in domain 2 — 1122-2 described in FIG. An example was outlined using FIG. In this section 1.8, an application example of the embodiment system other than the above-mentioned FIG. 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A to 9.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, each of the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1 incorporates communication modules 1202-4 to 6 so that information communication can be performed within the same system α_1132. Further, the sensor modules 1260-1 to 1260-1 or the drive (Actuator) module 1270-1 are built in the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1 to 3250-3. On the other hand, in FIG. 8B, the related state between the communication modules 1202-4 to 6 and the sensor modules 1260-1 to 1260-5 is grasped or managed by the concept of the sensor / communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-5. Similarly, the related state between the communication module 1202 and the drive module 1270 is grasped or managed by the concept of the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-2. In addition, as described in Section 1.3 without being limited thereto, the concept of the processor / communication module 1465, the memory / communication module 1475, the display / communication module 1478, and the like is collectively managed by the concept of a composite module 1295. You. However, one composite module may exist alone as in the sensor / communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B.

  In the system of the present embodiment, the amount of consumption (or the amount of accumulation) of public consumption materials such as electricity and gas, water supply / sewerage, etc., used in total within one system (for example, in the system α_1132) is automatically measured, A smart meter 1124 for automatically transmitting the measurement data periodically is provided. Actually, different smart meters 1124 are installed for each public consumption material such as electricity, gas, and water supply / sewage. However, FIG. 8A / B shows only one smart meter 1124 as a representative. The present invention is not limited to the above, and the usage amount (or the integrated amount) of the public consumption material for each of sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 described below may be automatically measured / automatically transmitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 9, the detailed structure of the smart meter 1124 is provided with a discharge amount monitor unit 1206 (for example, a power sales amount measurement unit) separately from an inflow amount monitor unit 1208 (for example, a power purchase amount measurement unit). ing. Then, by using the emission amount monitoring unit 1206, the amount of surplus (consumed electricity) to be sold to the wholesaler A_1102 in the system α_1132 is measured. Each measurement value (or integrated value) obtained in the smart meter 1124 is periodically reported to the server n_1116-n via the communication module 1202-1. At the same time, it is reported to the wholesaler A_1102.

  The communication module 1202 illustrated in FIG. 8A or FIG. 9 indicates a communication function unit capable of communicating information using a wired or wireless communication. As the wired communication supported by the communication function unit, any communication method starting from a local video signal transmission line or an audio signal transmission line to an Ethernet (registered trademark) compatible communication related to a telephone line or the Internet is used. May be involved. In addition, as the wireless communication supported by the communication function unit, short-range wireless systems such as ZigBee (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), UWB (Ultra Wide Band), Z-Wave, Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity), Medium-range wireless systems such as EnOcean, 2G / PDC, GSM (registered trademark) (Second Generation / Personal Digital Cellular, Global System for Mobile Communications), 3G / CDMA (Third Generation / Code Division Multiple Access), WiMAX (World wide Interoperability) For example, any wireless communication method of long-distance wireless communication such as for Microwave Access may be involved.

  In particular, the system of the present embodiment has a function of executing a minimum necessary process in the communication modules 1202 and 1660, as described later with reference to FIG. 10A. As a result, processing and execution of a communication protocol (communication information) having a structure from FIG. 11 to FIG. 15B as described later in Chapter 2 are processed in the communication modules 1202 and 1660. As this process processing, for example, a process processing conforming to a general-purpose (standard) application such as JavaScript (registered trademark) that does not require a specific OS may be supported. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Process processing corresponding to ECMA Script, or execution of a Java applet corresponding to a decoding function of HTML (Hyper-text Markup Language) or HTML5 or a corresponding function may be employed. Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described existing general-purpose script, and an original process method may be employed.

  In FIGS. 8A and 9, the communication module 1202 is built in the system controller α_1126, the smart meter 1124, and the various devices (Device) 1250, and can communicate with each other. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8A and FIG.

  In the system of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of devices (Devices) 1250-1 to 1250-3 installed in the same system α_1132 pass through built-in communication modules 1202-4 to 6 and communication modules 1202-3, respectively. And performs information communication with the system controller α_1126. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, devices 1250-2 to 1250-3 containing only one or more (plural) sensor modules 1260-3 to 5 and driving with one or more (plural) sensor modules 1260-1 to 12-2 The presence of a device 1250-1 containing both of the modules 1270-1 and a device 1250 not shown, but containing only the drive module 1270, are allowed. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, a device 1250- having a built-in device controller 1240-1 and having a memory unit 1242 capable of sequentially storing / managing history information on the sensor modules 1260-1 and 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1. 1 and devices 1250-2 to 3 which do not own them can be mixedly arranged.

  As in the service provider A_1112-1 described in Section 1.7 with reference to FIG. 1, by having a function corresponding to the predetermined product generation unit 1152 or a function corresponding to the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in the system α_1132, It is possible to secure and temporarily retain the surplus of the above-mentioned public consumables. FIGS. 8A / B show a usage example of (car) battery 1220 as an example of a function corresponding to predetermined product storage section 1154. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and in the system of the present embodiment, any device having the function of the predetermined product generation unit 1152 or the predetermined product storage unit 1154 may be installed in the system α_1132. For example, a battery center or a water storage tank (e.g., a storage device) may be installed in a building unit or a region unit to temporarily hold a surplus of public consumption material generated in a building or a region.

  8A / B, a usage example of (car) battery 1220 will be described as a specific example for convenience. Here, one vehicle interior space is made to correspond to one section 1_1142-1 described later. Therefore, all kinds of information detected in the vehicle (for example, gasoline consumption, engine speed, temperature in the vehicle, and information on the body of each occupant) are detected by the sensor module 1222, and the result is transmitted to the communication module 1202-2. To the system controller α_1126. Similarly, in section 1_1142-1 (in the car), an inflow amount monitor unit 1218 for measuring the amount of charge to the (car) battery 1220 and the amount of power released (sold) from the (car) battery 1220 to the outside are measured. The emission amount monitoring unit 1216 is installed, and each measured value is transmitted to the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1202-2. In particular, in the system of the present embodiment, the discharge amount control unit 1212 that can accurately control the amount of power released (sold) from the (car) battery 1220 and the power amount that is charged in the (car) battery 1220 with high accuracy A possible inflow control unit 1214 is provided. Both are connected to the system controller α_1126 via the communication modules 1202-2 and 3-2. Therefore, the system controller α_1126 can feed back the released (power sale) power amount sequentially measured by the release amount monitor unit 1216 to the release amount control unit 1212 and accurately control the power amount released (power sale) to the outside. . Similarly, the system controller feeds back the inflow (purchased) power amount sequentially measured by the inflow amount monitoring unit 1218 to the inflow amount control unit 1214 to accurately control the amount of power charged in the (car) battery 1220. .

  As described in section 1.7, the system controller α_1126 performs communication control and management and operation of a communication state in the corresponding system α_1132 (network system). As shown in FIG. 8A, the system controller α_1126 includes a processor 1230. The processor 1230 collects information from all the sensor modules 1222 and 1260-1 to 5 in the same domain 2_1122-2 and sequentially stores the information in the memory unit 1232 as history information. The command information for the drive module 1270-1 is also stored as history information. Further, the system controller α_1126 has a user I / F unit 1234 to enable direct input of a request from the user and display of the current progress state to the user. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the user I / F unit 1234 may be provided outside the system controller α_1126 and connected via the communication module 1202-3.

  In particular, in the system of the present embodiment, all the information on all the sensor modules 1222 and 1260-1 to 5 in the domain 2_1122-2 and the drive module 1270-1 is not automatically transferred to the server n_1116-n. A significant feature is that the processor 1230) autonomously selects and transmits only necessary information to the server n_1116-n. This produces an effect of protecting the user's personal information. Further, the present invention is not limited to the selection of information as described above, and a part of processing and analysis may be performed from the information, and only the result may be notified to the server n_1116-n. As a result, the server n_1116-n can collect only the minimum necessary information, which has the effect of increasing the efficiency of the integrated management process performed in the service provider B_1116-1.

  Further, in the system of this embodiment, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 therein) can collect unique information from the server n_1116-n via the communication module 1202-3 and store it in the memory unit 1232. The unique information means information that cannot be obtained from the domain 2_1122-2, such as traffic congestion information, local weather forecast information, and time-varying price information of public consumption materials. The information thus stored in the memory unit 1232 is analyzed / analyzed by the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 therein), and the behavior, state, or request of the end user is estimated / determined. Then, based on the content of the estimation / determination, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 therein) controls the system α_1132 (or the domain 2_11122-1) and provides an optimal service to the end user. As an example of this service providing method, the drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 8A may be remotely controlled. As described above, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 therein) independently analyzes / collects information collected from the sensor modules 1222, 1260-1 to 5 and the server n_1116-n and a command history to the drive module 1270-1. Since the analysis is performed, there is an effect that an original service can be provided, such as provision of a detailed service to a user in the domain 2_1122-2, which has been difficult in the past. Further, such a service unique to the domain 2_1122-2 can be stably provided even in a state in which communication with the server n_1116-n is impossible due to a system trouble, so that robustness of the service provided to the end user can be secured.

  FIG. 9 shows an application example of the present embodiment system shown in FIG. 8A. In FIG. 9, a processor 1330 or a device controller 1240-1-2 is built in all devices 1250-1 & 4 in the domain 2 — 1122-2 except the smart meter 1124 and the router (gateway) 1300, and a router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery , Direct information exchange with the server n_1116-n is possible.

  Here, the processor 1330 built in the section 1_1142-1 (in one vehicle) is not limited to controlling the amount of electric power charged / discharged from the (car) battery 1220, and is, for example, efficient in air conditioning management and fuel efficiency in the vehicle. All controls such as engine combustion control are performed, and these related information can be transmitted to the server n_1116-n via the router (gateway) 1300 (or directly). All communication modules 1202-1 to 120-7 are network-connected to server n_1116-n via router (gateway) 1300. Here, in the application example shown in FIG. 9, the router (gateway) 1300 does not perform any discrimination or selection, and automatically transfers all the information from the devices 1250- に to the server n_1116-n. There is a significant functional difference from the controller α_1126.

  On the other hand, in the application example shown in FIG. 9, the memory units 1244 and 1246 are built in all the devices 1250- ／ in the domain 2_1122-2. Then, signals and information detected momentarily by the sensor modules 1260-1 to 7-7 are sequentially stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246 in time series. Instruction information appropriately issued from the device controllers 1240-1 to 1240-2 to the drive modules 1270-1 to 1270-3 is also sequentially stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246. Utilizing the information stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246, the device controllers 1240-1 and 2240-2 can provide end users with unique services in units of the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1. At the time of providing this service, the device controller 1240-1 / 2 uses the history of detection signals and measurement information from the sensor modules 1260-1 to 12-7, which change from moment to moment, stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246. It estimates / determines the user's action, state or request, and controls the driving modules 1270-1 to 1270-3 (details will be described later in sections 4.2 to 4.4).

  The feature of the application example shown in FIG. 9 is that “the entire network communication system α_1132 is managed or controlled from outside (the physical space area formed by) the network communication system α_1132” or “the network communication system α_1132”. (The physical space area formed by the network controller) and does not have the system controller α_1126 that manages or controls the entire corresponding network communication system α_1132 ”. From this point of view, management of information communication within the same system network line 1782 formed between the devices 1250-1 and 4 in the system α_1132 via the router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery, The operation may be performed by the system controller β_1128 installed at a position physically separated from the system α_1132 instead of the server n_1116-n.

  As a further application example, a "mixed configuration" between the embodiment system shown in FIG. 2 or 8A / B and the embodiment system in FIG. 9 may be adopted. In this case, both the system controller α_1126 and the router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery may be provided as relay means inside and outside the system α_1132. In addition, both the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 may cooperate with each other to manage, operate, or control the entire network communication system α_1132, or usually only the system controller α_1126. Information is frequently exchanged between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128, and all information necessary for collecting information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and providing services to users is shared between the two companies. In this case, the related file stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 is mutually copied to the corresponding memory unit 1248 in the system controller β_1128 by mirroring as appropriate. Here, the address table in FIG. 23, which is an example of information necessary for collecting information and providing services to the user for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, the estimation / judgment collation table in FIG. 27, and the time-series information in FIG. The description of the tracking table will be described later. As described above, by appropriately sharing information between the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, even if the main body of management / operation or control is switched (or mixed) in the middle, processing in the stable system α_1132 is not performed. Continue. Alternatively, the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n may cooperate to manage, operate, or control the entire network communication system α_1132. In this case, in the same manner as described above (using mirroring or the like), all information necessary for collecting information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and providing services to the user is stored in the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116. n may be shared. By managing, operating, or controlling the entire network communication system α_1132 with a plurality of devices arranged at different positions in this way, it is possible to flexibly respond to emergencies, thereby improving the stability and reliability of the network communication system α_1132. It has the effect of doing. For example, if the system controller α_1126 shuts down due to some unexpected situation, or if all information stored in the memory unit 1232 is destroyed due to a head crash or the like, the system controller β_1128 and the server n_1116-n are automatically notified as an emergency response. Then, the processing of the system α_1132 can be stably continued without giving any stress to the user. In addition, for example, the user can operate the system controller β_1128 from a remote place to collect information from the network communication system α_1132 and control the inside of the network communication system α_1132, thereby improving user convenience. In this case, in the system α_1132, the devices 1250-1 and 1250-1 having the device controller 1240 and the memory unit 1242, the devices 1250-2 and 3 having no device controller 1240 and the memory unit 1242, or a sensor / communication described later, for example. A composite module generically referring to the module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 may be mixed.

  A supplementary explanation regarding the above-mentioned “mixed form” will be given. As shown in FIG. 5, the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) arranged in the network system α_1132 often has a power storage module (battery) 1554. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs in the system α_1132, many of the combined modules 1295 (or the units 1290) continue to operate without being affected. Further, in the embodiment system of FIG. 9, since a battery is built in a router (gateway) 1300 that relays information communication inside and outside the system α_1132, it is not affected by a power failure in the network system α_1132. Therefore, if a means for backing up the management / control in the network system α_1132 is set when an unexpected event such as a power failure or failure occurs, the information communication in the system α_1132 can be continued without interruption without being affected by the unexpected event such as a power failure or a failure. I do.

  As already described in section 1.1, "Only system controller α_1126 performs management / control / operation / information collection of information communication in network system α-1132", information communication in network system α_1132 at normal time is performed. Is performed by the system controller α_1126. However, when an unexpected event such as a power outage or failure occurs, the system controller β_1128 performs management / control / operation / information collection of information communication in the network system α_1132. At normal times, the system controller β_1128 may be handled as one unit 1290 belonging to the network system α_1132.

  Also, as already described with reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 in section 1.1, the system controller α_1126 for managing / controlling / managing / collecting information in the network system α_1132 is provided by each unit in the network system α_1132. In addition to performing information communication within the network system with the 1290, information communication outside the system is performed with a server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) existing outside the network system α_1132. Then, when the system controller β_1128 performs an extraordinary row of the system controller α_1126 at the time of occurrence of a power failure or a failure itself, information communication between each unit 1290 and the server n_1116-n in the same communication information format as before the extraordinary row is desired. . Because, the same communication information format can be used to smoothly and seamlessly perform extraordinary processing.

  As described later in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10A, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 between the system controller α_1126 and the composite module 1295 can use the C-format. On the other hand, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) may use an A-format, an E-format, a W-format, or the like. Therefore, when the system controller β_1128 performs proxy processing in place of the system controller α_1126, it is desirable to perform the same information communication. That is, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 between the system controller β_1128 and the composite module 1295 uses the C-format, and the communication information with the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) uses the A-format or E-format. -Use a format or the like.

  The features of the client system generated by combining the contents described below in section 2.1 with the above-described system of the present embodiment using FIGS. 10A and 17A are summarized below. That is, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or the router (gateway) 1300 or the system controller β_1128 in FIG. 17A). Yes, the client system (system α_1132) has a first system controller α_1126 that obtains and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) having a function of communicating the information obtained or created independently. A second system controller β_1128 different from the first system controller α_1126 for acquiring and managing the information from the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295); 23 manages the plurality of units 1290 (or the composite module 1295) by dividing them into sections 1142 (FIG. 1), and information on the sections to which each unit belongs (see the address table of FIG. 23 described later in section 4.3). Or a communication system between the second system controller β_1128 and the plurality of units 1290 (or the composite module 1295) in a first data format. (C-format in FIG. 17A), and communication between the second system controller β_1128 and the cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) is performed in a second data format (A / E / (W-format).

  In the meantime, it has already been described that the system controller β_1134 may be treated as one unit 1290 belonging to the network system α_1132 in which the system controller α_1126 performs management / control / operation / information collection. In the system of this embodiment, information communication between different units 1290 in the same network system 1132 is possible via the network system α_1132. When information is communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the unit 1290 as described above, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 can use the C-format. Therefore, when information is communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128, the use of the C-format for the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 makes the management / control / operation / information collection of the system controller α_1126 easier. Is born.

  On the other hand, even when the system controller β_1134 normally communicates information with the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server), the A-format, the E-format, and the W-format are used for the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL06. It is desirable to do. As a result, when the use of the system controller α_1126 becomes impossible due to a power failure, a failure, or the like, there is an effect that extraordinary processing relating to management / control / operation / information collection of the network system α_1132 can be performed smoothly and seamlessly.

  In other words, the contents can be expressed as follows. That is, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or the router (gateway) 1300 or the system controller β_1128 in FIG. 17A). The first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) having the function of communicating the information acquired or created independently and the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) A second system controller β_1128 different from the first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the first system controller β_1128, and the second system controller β_1128 Communication with the plurality of units 1290 via the stem controller α_1126 is performed using a first data format (such as a C-format), and communication between the second system controller β_1128 and the cloud (the server in FIG. 1) is performed. n_1116-n) using a second data format (A / E / W-format in FIG. 17B).

By the way, in other words, the paraphrases so far often have been relatively aware of the cooperative processing and the substitute processing between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the features of the system of the embodiment of FIG. 9 in which the system controller α_1126 does not exist from the beginning can be described as follows. That is, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or the router (gateway) 1300 or the system controller β_1128 in FIG. 17A). A unit 1290 (or a composite module 1295) having a function of communicating information obtained or created independently, and a system controller β_1128 for obtaining and managing the information from the unit 1290 (the device 1250 in FIG. 9); A unit 1290 (the device 1250 in FIG. 9) and a gateway 1300 having a function of communicating with the system controller β_1128, and the system controller β_1128 includes a plurality of units 1290. The device 1250 in FIG. 9 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 and managed, and information on the sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 to which each unit 1290 (the device 1250 in FIG. 9) belongs (section 4.3). An electronic device system that holds an address table shown in FIG. 23 or a time-series information tracking table shown in FIG. 28 described below, wherein communication between the system controller β_1128 and the plurality of units 1290 (the device 1250 in FIG. 9). The first data format (such as the C-format) is used for communication between the system controller β_1128 and the cloud (the server n_1116-n in FIG. 1). E / W-format).
Section 1.9 Example of Using Complex Module in Local Network System In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A or FIG. 9, the basic communication partner of the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A or the server n_1116-n in FIG. 1250-1 to 1250. In the past, since the basic function was determined in advance for each device, the contents of network communication information (communication protocol or exchange information 1810 in the communication middleware layer APL described in Chapter 2) adapted to the basic function of each device were set to the standard. As previously defined above. However, as each device evolves / develops and diversifies as the times change, it becomes difficult to quickly adapt a standard to equipment functions of each device, which change every moment. For example, a basic function of a television is to “receive broadcast waves and display the content to a user”. However, today's high-end Japanese televisions are not limited to the above basic functions, but also have a built-in data communication function or recording function using a network line. Although not widely used at present, the naked-eye 3D TV (3 Dimensional Television) has a built-in function for detecting the positional information of the user who watches. Furthermore, in the future, there is a possibility that a light sensor is built in the television (to optimally control the brightness of the display screen). Considering such diversification and expandability of each device, if communication information format (exchange information 1810) or communication protocol with devices 1250-1 to 4 is given versatility, communication information can be decoded. This leads to an increase in the price of the devices 1250-1 to 1250-4 incorporating the high-performance device controllers 1240-1 and 1240-2. That is, it is difficult for the device 1250-2 or 1250-3 of FIG. 8A to decode versatile and complicated communication information, and a device for performing decoding and performing various controls in the device according to the decoding result. Incorporation of the controller 1240 is required.

As a countermeasure, in FIG. 8B, it is possible to install the sensor / communication module 1460-1-5 or the drive / communication module 1470-1 or 2 belonging to the composite module 1295 in the device 1450-1 to 1450 or outside the device alone. I have.
Here, for convenience of explanation, all devices 1450-1 to 1450 in FIG. 8B have a structure in which sensor / communication modules 1460-1 to 4460 and drive / communication modules 1470-1 to 2 belonging to the composite module 1295 are built. . However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the embodiment shown in FIG. That is, for example, the composite module 1295 (the sensor / communication module 1460 or the drive / communication module 1470) may be additionally built in the devices 1250-1 to 1250-4 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9. In this case, the information communication regarding the basic function of each device (for example, the function of “receiving broadcast waves and displaying the content to the user” in the previous example) is performed within the devices 1250-1 to 1250-4 illustrated in FIGS. 8A and 9. Corresponding. The information communication relating to the newly developed and diversified new functions is directly performed by the newly added composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470. The entire functions possessed by the highly diversified / evolved device 1250 are integratedly managed / understood and controlled in the system controller α_1126. As a result, a new effect of facilitating expandability (expandability of built-in sensor / drive type) when a new function is added to the existing existing device is produced. Further, since the functions of each of the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 are very limited and simplified, the communication information exchanged between the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 with the outside can be further simplified. The effect is also born. When the communication information exchanged with the outside is greatly simplified in this way, the high-performance device controllers 1240-1 and 2240-2 for decoding / controlling the complicated communication information become unnecessary, and the above-described composite Modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be easily reduced in cost and size.

  In the description example of FIG. 8B, device 1450-1 and device 1450-2 are arranged in section 2_1142-2, and devices 1450-3 to 1450-4 are arranged in section m_1142-m. However, the installation locations of the devices 1450-1 to 1450 are not necessarily fixed, and any one of the specific devices 1450-1 to 1450-4 may be transported by an end user and shifted to another section.

  Similarly, in the embodiment system of FIG. 8B, the sensor module and the drive module are individually integrated with the communication module also in the smart meter 1124 and the section 1_1142-1 (corresponding to, for example, the entire inside of one vehicle). As a result, as shown in the smart meter 1124 in FIG. 8B, the emission amount monitor / communication module 1406 and the inflow amount monitor / communication module 1408 are configured, and individually connected to the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n by network. I have. Similarly, the section 1_1142-1 includes a discharge amount monitor / communication module 1416, an inflow amount monitor / communication module 1418, a discharge amount control / communication module 1412, and an inflow amount control / communication module 1414, each of which is individually a communication module 1202. -3 via the network with the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 therein). Here, the emission amount monitor / communication module 1406, the inflow amount monitor / communication module 1408, and the emission amount monitor / communication module 1416 and the inflow amount monitor / communication module 1418 correspond to the sensor / communication module 1460. The emission control / communication module 1412 and the inflow control / communication module 1414 correspond to the drive / communication module 1470. In this case, all the detection signals and measurement information obtained from the sensor / communication modules 1460-1 to 5 or the emission amount monitor / communication modules 1406 and 1416 and the inflow amount monitor / communication modules 1408 and 1418 in the system α_1132 are transferred to the system. The controller α_1126 collectively collects (and stores in the memory unit 1232). In addition, the system controller α_1126 collectively controls (issues a command) all of the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-2, the emission control / communication module 1412, and the inflow control / communication module 1414 in the system α_1132. As a result, the single system controller α_1126 enables efficient and integrated management and control of all the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 in the system α_1132 and provision of high-quality services to end users.

  Further, in the system example of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8B, there is an effect that the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 can be manufactured at very low cost. That is, by mass-producing a large number of standard composite modules 1460 and 1470 having versatility, the composite modules 1460 and 1470 can be manufactured at a significantly low cost. Further, a new interface unit for connecting the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is not required at all, and can be incorporated into the corresponding devices 1450-1 to 1450-1 very easily and inexpensively at a mere physical arrangement level. When the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-2 can be supplied at a low cost, the number of drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-2 incorporated in the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 can be increased as compared with the example in FIG. 8B. Furthermore, as a method of incorporating the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 into the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5, not only the screw fixing but also a temporary fixing using a double-sided tape or an adhesive tape by an end user, for example. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 8B, one sensor / communication module 1460-4 to 5 is built in each of the device 1450-1 and the device 1450-3, and a plurality of sensor / communication modules 1460- in the device 1450-2. 2-3 are built in. However, the use of the method described above makes it easier for the end user to reattach a particular sensor / communication module 1460-2-5 to another device 1450.

  In the present embodiment system shown in FIG. 8B, the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is not installed in the device 1450, but is installed alone at an arbitrary position in the specific section 1142 (or in the domain 1122). . As such an installation method using the sensor / communication module 1460-5 (or the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) alone, for example, the user can use a fixing member such as a tape, an adhesive, or a thumbtack to install the sensor / communication module 1460 (or The composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) may be fixed to a wall, roof, or floor, or may be mixed with paint and applied to the wall, roof, or floor. Although not shown, the drive / communication module 1470 (for example, in the form of a remote controller for controlling an air conditioner, a television, or lighting equipment) is installed alone at an arbitrary position in the specific section 1142 (or in the domain 1122). Is also good.

As another example of the system of the present embodiment, the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be moved together with the user, and the position change history of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is measured to collect the user's action history information. Is also good. In addition (not shown), the drive / communication module 1470 can be moved together with the user, so that any user within the specific section 1142 (or within the domain 1122) can be located (for example, controlling an air conditioner, a television, lighting equipment, etc.). (A) Control of state changes (for example, changes in air conditioning and brightness) in the section 1142 may be performed. Here, as a method of allowing the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 to be movable together with the user, for example, temporarily fixing with tape or an adhesive to a portable item worn by the user such as glasses, tie pins, shoes, wallets, etc. Attach. Alternatively, it may be fixed firmly with a screw or the like, or may be incorporated in a portable product.
Chapter 2 Overview of Hierarchical Structure and Data Structure of Communication Information In Chapter 1, the overall structure of the system according to the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. In the second chapter, features and details of the data structure (communication protocol contents) of communication information communicated with each other in the present embodiment described in the first chapter will be described.
Section 2.1 Hierarchical Structure of Network Communication-Related Functions in the Present Embodiment Regarding network communication used in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A / B and FIGS. There are great features. In this hierarchical structure, the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 corresponding to the lowermost physical functions shown in FIGS. 10A / B and FIGS. 16 to 17B are physical communication media required for network communication. Make provisions regarding When a wired (wired) Ethernet is used as a specific example of the physical communication medium, a cable and a connector having the shape and characteristics specified by the above-mentioned physical layer PHY06 standard are used. I do. On the other hand, when wireless is used as the physical communication medium, it is adapted to the frequency, channel, modulation method, basic communication frame configuration, and the like defined in the standard specifications of the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06.

  In the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 corresponding to an access function on a communication medium located above the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06, nodes connected to the network (the device 1250 in FIG. 8A or the device 1250 in FIG. 8B). Information necessary for correctly transmitting communication information to / from the composite modules 1460 and 1470) is defined. Further, the uppermost extended application layer EXL06 and the communication middleware layers APL06 and APL02 define various service provisions using network communication (corresponding to various service providing functions using communication).

  By providing a hierarchical structure corresponding to each function in this manner, it is possible to select / combine an optimal format for each layer according to the characteristics and performance of the communication partner. As a result, there is an effect that the function of the communication information (between the device 1250 and the device 1250 shown in FIG. 8A) can be enhanced at the same time as the price reduction (of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 8B) as the whole system of the present embodiment. . A specific example of this effect will be described below. First, the physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02 can employ a Z-format (for details, which will be described later in section 2.3), which is suitable for short-distance wireless communication and is required for "power saving" required for the composite modules 1460 and 1470. . Furthermore, in order to optimize the “low cost” required for the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the communication middleware layer APL02 adopts a C-format (simplified communication information) (details will be described later in section 2.5). You may. On the other hand, an A-format (see section 2.7 for details) in which the communication middleware layer APL06 can simultaneously communicate a plurality of pieces of information in order to adapt to higher functionality of communication required between the server n_1116-n and the device 1250-1. , An E-format (details will be described in section 2.6) or a W-format, and communication information of the extended application layer EXL06 may be used.

  In addition, an intermediate layer (a layer higher than the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 and a layer lower than the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06) of the communication information having the above-described hierarchical structure corresponds to an Internet protocol (internet protocol) function. This embodiment has the following features in that information specified by the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 can be "commonly" communicated. Here, "commonly communicable" means that all nodes connected to the network (communication objects corresponding to a communication source and a communication destination in network communication) in all of the present embodiment systems shown in FIGS. 1 to 8B. This means that a specific example in the present embodiment corresponds to the device 1250 of FIG. 8A, the server n_1116-n, the wholesaler A_1102, or the composite modules 1460 and 1470 of FIG. 8B. This means that communication information defined by version 6 layer IPv6 (details will be described later in section 2.4) may be transmitted. This situation is described in another way as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, communication information used (transmitted) on a network line 1788 outside the system described later and a network line 1782 within the same system (details will be described later) are common to the same Internet protocol. It may include information specified by a standard corresponding to version 6 layer IPv6. Here, the Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6 defines a communication protocol on the Internet, and performs address management and communication route management on the Internet. Therefore, according to the standard defined by the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6, regardless of the type of the node such as the wholesaler A_1102, the server n_1116-n, the system controller α_1126, the device 1250-1, and the composite modules 1460 and 1470. Each node (communication target) can have its own IP address (Internet Protocol Addresses) setting. As described above, at the time of communication between different systems in the same domain 2_1122-2 in the system of this embodiment (at the time of communication between the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 in FIG. 1), the communication partner of the communication partner is This has the effect of greatly simplifying management (the details will be described later in section 2.8). As a specific example of the effect, for example, from a business trip overseas (corresponding to the location of the system β_1134 in FIG. 1) to the home using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a tablet (corresponding to the system controller β_1128 in FIG. 1) (FIG. (Corresponding to the location of the first system α_1132) from the sensor / communication module 1460 or the operation of the drive / communication module 1470, thereby greatly improving user convenience. Further, at this time, since the business trip destination (system β_1134) and the home (system α_1132) are protected in the same domain 2_1122-2 in which entry from other outside is impossible, sufficiently strong security protection is provided. I have.

  First, a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to network communication is shown in FIG. 10A using the embodiment system model shown in FIG. 8B. In FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the composite modules 1460 and 1470 are described as the rightmost network nodes in consideration of the system model of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8B. Further, instead of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 as the rightmost network nodes arranged in the same system network line 1782, communication within the devices 1250-2 and 3250 which do not incorporate the device controller 1240-1 described in FIG. Modules 1202-5 and 1202 (and sensor modules 1260-3 to 5-5) may correspond.

  Here, the left side of FIG. 10A illustrates a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8B. The right side of FIG. 10A shows a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to communication between the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 8B and each of the composite modules 1460 and 1470.

  However, as shown in FIG. 1, in the system of this embodiment, the server n_1116-n can be installed at a location physically outside the area where the system α_1132 to which the system controller α_1126 belongs is located. Therefore, as shown on the left side of FIG. 10A, communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 uses the network line 1788 outside the system. The external network line 1788 may use a wired or wired or wireless Internet line. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and a network line used within a relatively narrow range such as a LAN (Local Area Network) can be used.

  Fiber optic cables may be used as the physical communication media using the above-mentioned wire. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of the above-mentioned physical media corresponding to the wire may be any of signal transmission means such as electric cords, telephone wires, and power lines. Either an analog signal or a digital signal may be used as the transmitted signal form. Not only the difference between the physical form of the communication medium and the signal form transmitted therein, but also the communication standard of the physical layer PHY06 differs depending on the communication line management company or the country or region that manages / supervises the communication. . Therefore, in the system of the present embodiment, all communication standards in the physical layer PHY06 via an existing line are generally referred to as “L-format”. On the other hand, when wireless is used in the physical layer PHY06 as the network line 1788 outside the system, a communication standard of 2G (Second Generation) or 3G (Third Generation) of a long-distance wireless system, or WiMAX (World Wide Interoperability for Microwave Access) is used. May be. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the system according to the present embodiment can use communication information conforming to any wireless communication standard including the medium-range wireless system. All wireless communication standards from the long-range wireless system to the middle-range wireless system are collectively referred to as "G-format".

  By comparison, all the composite modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 8B are commonly arranged in the system α_1132 managed by the system controller α_1126. The physical formation range of the system α_1132 is limited to a relatively small area. Therefore, information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is performed using the in-system network line 1782 of FIG. 10A. Then, in order to distinguish it from the “G-format” and “L-format” communication standards used in the above-described external system network line 1788, the information is used in the physical layer PHY02 of information communicated in the same system network line 1782. Communication standards are collectively referred to as “Z-format”. In the system of this embodiment, any of wireless and wired (or a mixture thereof) may be used as the network line 1782 in the same system.

  On the other hand, the standard used in the media access layer MAC02 / 06 shown in FIG. 10A is often examined / proposed by the same standard development organization together with the physical layer PHY02 / 06. Therefore, in the media access layer MAC06 transmitted on the external system network line 1788 between the server n_1116-2 and the system controller α_1126, “L-format” or “G-format” can be used in accordance with the physical layer PHY06. Similarly, the "Z-format" can be used in the media access layer MAC02 transmitted on the same system network line 1782 between the system controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a Z-format may be used for the physical layer PHY02, and an L-format or a G-format may be used for the media access layer MAC02. Alternatively, an L-format or a G-format may be used for the physical layer PHY06, and a Z-format may be used for the media access layer MAC06.

  The processing of information related to each function from the physical layer PHY06 to the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 (mainly communication control processing) is performed by the communication modules 1768 and 1202 in the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. -3 is executed. The communication modules 1660 in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 whose internal structure has been described with reference to FIGS. . In the communication control unit 1700, processing (mainly communication control processing) of information relating to each function from the physical layer PHY02 to the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is performed.

  The information related to each function from the physical layer PHY06 to the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is mainly related to communication control, and has little relation to the function, operation or performance of the device 1450, for example. In contrast, the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 of FIG. 10A relate to various service providing functions using network communication. Processing of communication information related to the functions of the communication middleware layer APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 (mainly processing related to service provision to the user) is executed by the processors 1738 and 1230 in the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. . On the other hand, information related to the function of the communication middleware layer APL02 communicated via the in-system network line 1782 is processed in the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660 in the composite modules 1460 and 1470. As described above, the complex modules 1460 and 1470 do not use an expensive processor, and all communication information communicated via the network line 1782 in the same system can be processed in the communication module 1660. There is. By eliminating the need to incorporate an expensive processor in this manner, an effect is produced in which the composite modules 1460 and 1470 can be provided at low cost.

  Among the information communicated via the external system network line 1788, unique information that can be used only on specific application software installed in both the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 is stored in the extended application layer EXL06. There is a great feature of the system of the present embodiment in that it can be stored and communicated with. This enables differentiation between application software installed in both the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. As a result, the application software of each company based on the principle of competition can be promoted in a friendly manner, and the progress of application software technology can be promoted, and the user's convenience can be improved. Further, by using the unique information stored in the extended application layer EXL06, there is an effect that the quality of the service provided by the application software to the user is improved. However, if the performance and additional extended functions possessed by the devices 1250-1 and 1250-2 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9 are improved / developed in the future, A-, E-, and W- used in the communication middleware layer APL06 will be adjusted accordingly. It is necessary to upgrade the format standard sequentially. However, since upgrading the standard requires extremely complicated work, there is a problem that it is difficult for the standard to follow up with the improvement of the performance of the devices 1250-1 and 1250 and the addition and extension of functions. On the other hand, by utilizing the extended application layer EXL06 by the application software vendor, there is an effect that the performance of the devices 1250-1 and 1250-2 can be easily improved and the functions can be easily expanded without waiting for the standard version upgrade. As described above, the information to be stored and communicated in the extended application layer EXL06 can be freely set based on a specific software vendor, and therefore, the description format of the communication information here does not need to be defined in advance as a global standard.

  On the other hand, the communication information related to the service providing function of the communication middleware layer APL02 / APL06 may use information conforming to a prescribed format such as A-, E-, W-, or C-format. . As described above, when the communication information related to the service providing function of the communication middleware layer APL02 / APL06 conforms to a predetermined standard format, the mutual compatibility between the server 1116 and the system controller 1126/1128 and between the composite modules 1460 and 1470. This has the effect of making it easier to take.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 both have a large-capacity memory unit 1232 (and a database 1118-n), and can have a high-speed and powerful processor 1738/1230. Therefore, various and large amounts of communication information corresponding to various service provisions can be set in the communication middleware layer APL06 transmitted between the two. On the other hand, in the composite modules 1460 and 1470, it is difficult to incorporate a processor capable of providing various services. Therefore, in the system according to the present embodiment, the information communication with the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is different from the format (A-format, E-format, W-format, etc.) used in the communication middleware layer APL06. A format (such as a C-format) may be used in the communication middleware layer APL02. In particular, by relatively simplifying the C-format used in the communication middleware layer APL02 (details will be described later in Section 2.5), the processing load in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is reduced, and the cost is reduced. In addition to the above, the effect of reducing the consumption of the built-in power storage module (battery) 1554 is obtained by improving the relative processing speed and shortening the processing time. However, the present embodiment system is not limited thereto, and an A-format, an E-format, or a W-format may be used for information communication with the composite modules 1460 and 1470.

  Here, information used in communication middleware layer APL02 included in communication information using network line 1782 in the same system and information used in communication middleware layer APL06 included in communication information using network line 1788 outside the system The switching (conversion) process between and is performed in the system controller α_1126. Incidentally, in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 of the system of the present embodiment, the communication information used in the network line 1782 in the same system and the communication information used in the network line 1788 outside the system need not always completely match. However, the communication information may be partially different between the two. This processing method will be described below. As already described in sections 1.1 and 1.7, and as shown in FIG. 8B, the management and operation of the network communication in the network system α_1132 are performed by the system controller α_1126. Information detected by all the sensor / communication modules 1460 sequentially obtained in real time through the same system network line 1782 and information of all the states controlled (set) by the drive / communication module 1470 are management information 1744. It is appropriately stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126. Here, the management information 1744 may be stored in a table format as a management table. 8A and 8B, the system controller α_1126 simultaneously saves information (detection information, current status information, etc.) of all the devices 1250 as a part of the management information 1744. . The system controller α_1126 extracts only the specific information in the range where the personal information of the user is protected from the management information 1744, and communicates the information to the server n_1116-n via the network line 1788 in the system. The information communicated to the server n_1116-n is stored in the database 1118-n as management information 1748 managed by the server n_1116 (or may be information in a table format). As described above, the system controller α_1126 performs conversion (switching of information) between the communication information used in the communication middleware layer APL02 and the communication information used in the APL06, thereby not only protecting the security of the user, but also By receiving the minimum required information in advance, the processing of the server n_1116-n is simplified.

  The following features occur as a client system that combines the contents described above with the general outline contents of the system of the present embodiment already described in section 1.1. That is, a unit that can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-n in FIG. 1) and manages information, and has a function of acquiring or creating and transmitting information to be provided to the system controller α_1126 ( The system controller α_1126 divides a plurality of existing units into sections to be managed (sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in FIG. 1). , An electronic device system that retains information on the section to which each unit belongs, wherein communication between the system controller and the plurality of units (composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) is a first Data format (Fig. 1 The communication between the system controller α_1126 and the cloud (server n_1116-n in FIG. 10A) is performed using a second data format (A / E / W). Format or L / G format). In particular, the data format is different from the first data format and the second data format.

  As described later in Section 2.2, the first data format includes a header (corresponding to the physical layer header PHYHD in FIG. 11) and first data (from the MAC layer header MACHD to the TCP header TCPHD in FIG. 11). ) And second data (communication middleware data APLDT) in addition to the first data.

  When the communication process of the communication information having the above characteristics is executed with the system controller α_1126 interposed therebetween, the following characteristics are provided. That is, the system controller α_1126 converts the communication information obtained from the unit (a kind of composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) into the second data format (A / E / W-format or L / G format in FIG. 10A). ) And transmits it to the cloud (server n_1116-n), and changes the information communicated from the cloud (server n_1116-n) to the first data format (C-format or Z-format). To the unit units (combined modules 1295, 1460, and 1470).

  Here, the unit has a function of transmitting information to be provided to the system controller (the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 4A is responsible) and a function of detecting external environment information “for example, temperature, illuminance, etc.” as the information (FIG. 4B sensor module 1260) or a state changing function (change module 1670 in FIG. 4C) that changes the state of the unit itself, which is the basis of the transmitted information. Therefore, the unit acquires or creates information in the first data format as part of the function of communicating.

  4A to 4C, the communication module 1660, the sensor module 1260, and the driving module 1670 are separately illustrated for convenience of description. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the unit, the function of detecting or the function of changing the state and the function of communicating are also used for the buy.

  When the structure of FIG. 7A is adopted in the communication module 1660, the functions of the communication module 1660 may be realized by a combination of all functional circuits without using the processor 1960 described in FIG. 7A. In this case, the unit does not have a CPU (Central Processing Unit) for processing the information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10B, a description will be given of a feature comparison between communication information used (transmitted) within the same system network line 1782 and the outside system network line 1788 within the same communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06. Communication information based on the A-format or the E-format may be used for communication between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n via the external network circuit 1788. Incidentally, in the system of the present embodiment, the A-format includes any format described as “communication information related to the communication middleware layer APL in a broad text format”. On the other hand, as will be described later in section 2.6, the E-format uses a format in which “set code is stored in a predetermined area defined in advance” in the area of communication middleware data APLDT (see section 2.2). All formats are included. In particular, the A-format and the E-format have a feature that "information including plural items can be communicated (transmitted) at a time". However, the extra-system network circuit 1788 used for the information communication has a risk that the network line is temporarily congested due to the use situation of another user. Therefore, if a method of repeating communication very frequently between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n is adopted, there is a risk that communication between the two companies will stagnate only when the network line is abnormally congested. On the other hand, by adopting a format in which information of a plurality of contents can be communicated at once as shown in the present embodiment, there is an effect that the frequency of communication between the two can be reduced and the risk of communication stagnation can be reduced. However, the present embodiment system is not limited thereto, and communication information conforming to the C-format or the W-format may be used for communication between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n.

  In the A-format or the E-format, a plurality of tables in a template format predetermined according to the type of the exchange information 1810 communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n are defined. And what type of table that is set in advance as a template? Is included in the exchange information 1810 as type identification information 1840 of the exchange information. By sharing the exchange information (table) 1810 thus communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n, the efficiency of information processing between the two companies is improved. That is, by installing the application software including the processing routine of the exchange information (table) 1810 in both the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n, it is possible to provide advanced services to the user.

  On the other hand, information indicating the purpose of use of the exchange information (table) 1810 to be notified to the receiving party is included in the exchange information (table) 1810 as communication access control information 1830. For example, as the communication access control information 1830 in the E-format, “write request”, “read request”, “notification request”, “write / read request”, “write response”, “notification”, “read” Codes corresponding to "response", "notification response", "write / read response", and the like are respectively set. Also, in the communication access control information 1830 in the A-format, "record only (WRITEONLY)" or (current state of the receiving party) “Read only” or “record / reproduce (READWRITE)” can be described in the exchange information (table) 1810 in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10B, the World Wide Web may be used as another method for performing information communication via the external system network line 1788. This method corresponds to the W-format in FIG. 10A, and the server n_1116-n or the system controller α_1126 also has a Web server function. In this case, the transmitting side of communication information (either the server n_1116-n or the system controller α_1126) specifies a receiving party (the server n_1116-n or the opposite side of the system controller α_1126) based on the URL (Uniform Resource Location), The communication information is automatically written in the writing field specified in the form format (Form) on the homepage. When the information communication is completed, the receiving side stores the received information (or a processing result thereof) in the management information 1744 or 1748 in accordance with a program preset by PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) or a Java applet. By providing a plurality of entry fields specified in the form on the same homepage, it is possible to set a situation where "multiple contents of information can be communicated (transmitted) at a time". it can. Therefore, the W-format in the system of the present embodiment includes any format in which the information is communicated by the transmitting side filling in a writing field specified in advance by the receiving side. In addition, the format is not limited thereto, and any format in which “tags unique to HTML or HTML5 are described” may be classified as W-formats.

  As described above, in the information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 via the external system network line 1788, a device for reducing the communication frequency is devised. On the other hand, in the same system network line 1782, since the system controller α_1126 manages and operates the communication line in the network system, there is no risk that the network line is congested and communication is stagnated. In order to adapt to the cost reduction and downsizing of the composite modules 1460 and 1470, communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 for the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is simplified. As a specific example, information communication in any of Case 1 to Case 3 shown in FIG. 10B can be performed. In this case 1, for example, a command (command issuance) 1852 for changing the setting state (state control) for the drive / communication module is issued from the system controller α_1126, and the execution result of the command 1852 is answered from the drive / communication module. On the other hand, in case 2, a response request (request) 1872 is issued from the system controller α_1126 for the purpose of collecting sense information (detection information) by the sensor / communication module 1460, and the sensor / communication module 1460 generates a response (response) 1874. Answer the information (detection information). Further, when the sensor / communication module 1460 notifies the system controller α_1126 of sense information (detection information) at an arbitrary timing (or a preset periodic timing), the periodic / irregular You may make a strategic report 1894.

  In the system of the present embodiment, the information communication method is not limited to the above, and another communication method may be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when a device 1250-1 including a device controller 1240-1 and a memory unit 1242 is installed in a system α_1132, a network line in the same system between the device 1250-1 and the system controller α_1126 For information communication on 1782, as shown in FIG. 16, a communication middleware layer APL06 or an extended application layer EXL06 conforming to the A-format, the E-format, or the W-format may be used. In this case, as an embodiment, application software that can utilize the above-mentioned extended application layer EXL06 may be installed in the server n_1116-n in advance. After obtaining the user's permission via the user I / F unit 1234 (described in FIG. 8A), the system controller α_1126 automatically transmits the application software to both the system controller α_1126 itself and the corresponding device 1250. The installation process may be performed automatically. At this time, the system controller α_1126 accesses the server n_1116-n, and transfers the application software stored in the database 1118-n in advance. In this way, by connecting the external system network circuit 1788 and the same system network circuit 1782 via the system controller α_1126 to enable automatic installation of application software up to the corresponding device 1250, the user can be installed without burden. Since an environment in which the extended application layer EXL06 can be utilized can be automatically constructed, an effect is produced in which the easiness and flexibility of the latest device 1250, whose function is newly extended, can be ensured in the network system. However, the present embodiment system is not limited to the above. For example, communication information conforming to the C-format may be used for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250 shown in FIG.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 9, when the devices 1250-1 and 4 and the server n_1116-n are directly connected via the router (gateway) 1300, a router (gateway) is used instead of the system controller α_1126 in FIG. ) 1300 is arranged between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n. In this case, in the extended application layer EXL06 and the communication middleware layer APL06, the same communication information is used both in the external system network circuit 1788 and in the same system network circuit 1782. Further, in this case, since a unique IP address is set for each of the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n, the sender IP address information SIPADRS and the receiver IP address information DIPADRS set in the Internet Protocol version 6 layer. The information can be directly communicated between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n using details (described later in Section 2.4 with reference to FIG. 13). In this case, communication information conforming to the E-format or the A-format is mainly used for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n. However, the system according to the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and a C-format or a W-format may be used. As described above, since the same communication information is used in both the network system 1788 outside the system and the network circuit 1782 in the same system, the load of the router (gateway) 1300 on the relay processing can be greatly reduced. However, different formats are used for the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 and the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 (in the example of FIG. 16, the Z-format is used for the network line 1782 in the same system, and the L-format is used for the network line 1788 outside the system). Alternatively, a G-format may be used). In this case, format conversion is performed in the router (gateway) 1300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1, when information is communicated between the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2 but belonging to different systems α_1132 and β_1134, the system controller α_1126 shown on the left side of FIG. A communication method similar to that between the servers n_1116-n may be used. In this case, the same communication information as on the external network line 1688 may be used in all layers from the physical layer PHY06 to the extended application layer EXL06. In this case, the application software may be automatically installed in the system controller β_1128, similarly to the above description. Therefore, communication information conforming to the E-format or the A-format is mainly used for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 in this case. However, the system according to the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and a C-format or a W-format may be used. The format used in the physical layer PHY06 and the media access layer MAC06 in this case is
○ If the distance between the system α_1132 and β_1134 is large, use the L-format or G-format,
When the distance between the systems α_1132 and β_1134 is short, the Z-format may be used. Here, in the L-format and the G-format, information communication can be performed all over the world, but on the other hand, the communication time is relatively long. There are short features. Therefore, by switching the format to be used in accordance with the distance between the two formats, an advantage can be brought about in which the advantages between the two formats can be appropriately used.

Further, a case where FIG. 1 and FIG. 8B are mixed as an application example of the system of the present embodiment will be considered. In this case, the combined modules 1460 and 1470 in the system α_1132 may be directly accessed from the system controller β_1128 (FIG. 1) in the different system β_1134. In this case, the communication method is such that the system controller β_1128 shown in FIG. 1 is arranged in place of the server n_1116-n in FIG. 10A and the network line in the same domain is replaced with the network line outside the system in FIG. 10A. . Therefore, in this case, an L-format, a G-format, an A-format, an E-format, or a W format may be used as communication information in the network line 2082 within the same domain. Further, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and for example, a Z-format or a C-format may be used. Similarly, the format may be automatically switched between the Z-format and the L / G-format according to the distance between the composite module (within the system α_1132) and the system controller β_1128. A detailed method using the Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 in this case will be described later in detail in section 2.8.
Section 2.2 Relationship between Hierarchical Structure of Communication-Related Functions and Communication Information on Network Lines Hierarchical structure for each function shown in FIGS. 10A and 16 to 17B, and specific communication communicated in actual network lines FIG. 11 shows the relationship with the information content. Regardless of whether the network communication medium is wired or wireless, communication information is intermittently transmitted in units of one block on these physical communication media. This chunk corresponds to the physical layer frame PPDU in FIG. Here, in the case of a single channel (single correspondent), other communication information cannot be communicated when transmitting the block (physical layer frame PPDU) on the network communication medium. Therefore, if the size of the chunk (physical layer frame PPDU) is too large, the occupation time of the network communication medium becomes long, and there is a risk that other communication is obstructed. In order to solve the above problem, in the system of the present embodiment, the data size of one physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes or less. As a result, there is an effect of reducing an adverse effect of hindering other information communication by one physical layer frame PPDU communication in the network system. As shown in FIG. 11A, the physical layer frame PPDU has the physical layer header PHYHD in the transmission order from the transmission side to the reception side (the order from the front or the timing of transmitting information). , MAC layer header MACHD, IPv6 header IPv6HD, TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, extension data EXDT, and erroneous check CRC. On the other hand, when this data arrangement is viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 11 (f), "a physical layer header PHYHD is arranged at the head in a physical layer frame PPDU, followed by physical layer data or a physical layer payload PSDU, and It can be said that the MAC layer header MACHD, the IPv6 header IPv6HD, the TCP header TCPHD, the communication middleware data APLDT, the extension data EXDT, and the erroneous check CRC are sequentially stored in the layer data / payload PSDU.

  Here, in the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 shown in FIG. 10A and FIGS. 16 to 17B, the entire physical layer frame PPDU is processed. Here, the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 indicate a concept that abstracts a "function to deal with a physical communication medium". On the other hand, actual processing corresponding to each function from the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 to the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is executed inside the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A). You. In this section 2.2, the information transfer procedure for each layer is described in detail in order to facilitate the description of the relationship between the function for each layer and the communication information communicated on the network line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and communication information may be created by partially omitting information transfer for each layer. For example, at the time of transmission, inside the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A), the data is provided from the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (substantially, the processor 1230 or 1738 or the communication module 1660 in FIG. The information (data structure) shown in FIG. 11A is directly created from the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (or only the communication middleware data APLDT) provided from the interface unit (not shown), and transmitted from the network lines 1782 and 1788 ( Transmission). During reception, only the necessary physical layer frame PPDU is selectively extracted from the network lines 1782 and 1788 within the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A), and the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT ( Alternatively, the communication middleware data APLDT alone may be extracted and passed to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (substantially, the processor 1230 or 1738 or the interface unit in the communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A).

  As a detailed receiving-side function that the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 carry, the content of the physical layer header PHYHD arranged at the head position in the received physical layer frame PPDU is identified, and the physical layer data or The entire physical layer payload PSDU is delivered to the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06. Therefore, when viewed from the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, the physical layer data or the entire physical layer payload PSDU corresponds to the MAC layer frame MPDU. On the other hand, the detailed transmission-side functions of the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 include a MAC layer frame MPDU received from the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 in physical layer data or physical layer payload PSDU, and a physical layer header PHYHD. The physical layer frame PPDU added to the head is transmitted over the network lines 1782 and 1788.

  As shown in FIG. 11E, the MAC layer frame MPDU includes a MAC layer header MACHD, a MAC layer data / payload MSDU, and an erroneous check CRC in order from the top. Then, at the time of reception in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, access correspondence control on the communication medium is performed using communication information stored in the MAC layer header MACHD in the MAC layer frame MPDU passed from the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06. Do. Specifically, only the MAC layer data / payload MSDU associated with the corresponding device 1250, composite module 1460, 1470 or system controller α_1126 is extracted and passed to Internet Protocol version 6 layer_IPv6. On the other hand, at the time of transmission, the information passed from the Internet Protocol version 6 layer_IPv6 is stored in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU, and a MAC layer frame MPDU to which the MAC layer header MACHD is added is formed to the MAC layer frame MPDU side. hand over.

  Using the erroneous check CRC (FIG. 11 (e)) added to the last position in the MAC layer frame MPDU, it is possible to check for a data error in the MAC layer frame MPDU (or to extract a data error occurrence location). Becomes Specifically, a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Checksum) code is used as the erroneous check CRC in the present embodiment. This is the residual value in the binary display when the entire MAC layer header MACHD and the entire MAC layer data / payload MSDU in the MAC layer frame MPDU are divided by a predetermined code. (Remainder). At the time of transmission, the erroneous check CRC calculated by the above method is added to the last position in the MAC layer frame MPDU. In addition, the MAC value obtained when the MAC layer header MACHD and the entire MAC layer data / payload MSDU obtained at the time of reception are divided by the above code are compared with the erroneous check CRC obtained at the time of reception. If both companies agree, it is considered "no error". If "error exists", an error operation can be extracted by performing an inverse operation from the erroneous check CRC obtained at the time of reception. Here, the error correction capability (that is, the size of the error correctable area in the entire error correction target data including the erroneous check CRC (here, the entire MAC layer frame MPDU)) is determined by the data size of the erroneous check CRC. Therefore, when the data size of the erroneous check CRC is fixed, the smaller the entire data size of the error correction target data (MAC layer frame MPDU) including the erroneous check CRC, the higher the relative error correction capability. The data reliability of the MAC layer frame MPDU (when taken into account) is improved.

  In consideration of the above situation, the present embodiment is characterized in that an erroneous check CRC is arranged at the rearmost position in the MAC layer frame as shown in FIG. As described in section 2.3 with reference to FIG. 12A, the physical layer header PHYHD includes a lot of information having relatively high robustness. That is, even if some error bits are mixed in the physical layer header PHYHD, it is possible to automatically correct by some means. On the other hand, the data accuracy required for the information in the MAC layer frame MPDU handled by the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 or higher is extremely high. Therefore, by removing the relatively robust physical layer header PHYHD and adding an error correction function to the entire MAC layer frame to improve the relative error correction capability, the reliability of the entire communication information (physical layer frame PPDU) is improved. Is relatively improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11D, an IPv6 header IPv6HD is arranged at the head, and information composed of IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU immediately following the IPv6 header is stored in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU. In the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6, at the time of transmission, a set of a TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, and extension data EXDT is stored in the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU, and an IPv6 header IPv6HD is added to the media access layer MAC02. To MAC06. Also, at the time of reception, after extracting the IPv6 header IPv6HD from the MAC layer data / payload MSDU passed from the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 and performing unique processing, finally, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (or (Only the communication middleware data APLDT) is transferred to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06.

Then, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (or only the communication middleware data APLDT) shown in FIG. 11B are processed in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06. Here, regarding various service providing functions using the network communication carried by the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06, the interfaces in the processors 1230, 1738, and 2030, the device controller 1240, and the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 10A and FIGS. This is realized by various processes performed by the unit.
2.3 Data structure of Z format in physical layer and media access layer Z-format usable in physical layer PHY02 and media access layer MAC02 corresponding to network circuit 1782 in the same system (see FIGS. 10A and 16) FIG. 12A shows a specific example of the data structure in the physical header PHYHD and the MAC layer header MACHD based on ()). The Z-format described below is merely an example used in the system of the present embodiment, and another format corresponding to the network circuit 1782 in the same system may be used. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the above-described hierarchical structure such as the physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02. You may use it.

  First, the data structure of FIG. 12A (c) is transcribed as it is from the content of FIG. 11 (a). Then, as shown in FIG. 12A (b), the physical layer header PHYHD includes a synchronization header SYNC arranged in the first 5 bytes and physical layer data / payload length information LPSDU arranged 1 byte immediately after the synchronization header SYNC. Be composed. Therefore, the data size of the physical layer header PHYHD is 6 bytes (5 + 1). Here, the physical layer data / payload length information LPSDU indicates the data size of the physical layer data / payload PSDU in FIG. 11 (f) and is set in byte units. As already described at the beginning of section 2.2, the maximum data size of the entire physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes. Therefore, a value of 121 bytes (127-6) or less is set in the physical layer data / payload length information LPSDU.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12A (a), the above-mentioned synchronization header SYNC is composed of a 5-byte preamble PRM arranged first and a 1-byte physical layer frame start information SFD next. As this preamble PRM, [00000000h] (here, “h” indicates a hexadecimal value) is set. Here, since a direct sequence spread spectrum method is employed for signal modulation, a synchronization signal can be obtained from the preamble PRM section of all "0". [A7h] is set in the area of the physical layer frame start information SFD. When [A7h] represented by a hexadecimal value is converted into a binary representation, it becomes "10100111".

  A method of using the communication information in the physical layer header PHYHD in the communication control unit 1700 or the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 in the communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A or the communication modules 1202-4 and 2002 in FIGS. explain. The communication information in the physical layer header PHYHD is mainly used for chip synchronization and bit synchronization on the receiving side. That is, the communication module has a built-in oscillator (Phase Lock Loop Circuit) whose frequency and phase can be automatically synchronized. The oscillator (PLL circuit) automatically synchronizes the frequency and the phase in accordance with the preamble PRM (chip synchronization). Next, for example, the position of the physical layer frame start information SFD is detected by a method such as pattern matching. , The start bit position of the MAC layer header MACHD is detected (bit synchronization).

  As shown in FIG. 12A (d), in the MAC layer header MACHD, the control information MCNTTL of the MAC layer frame is transmitted in the transmission order from the transmission side to the reception side (the order from the front or the timing of sending out the information earlier). It comprises an area for storing each of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM and address information MADRS.

  In the area of the control information MCNTL of the first MAC layer frame, information for controlling the entire MAC layer frame MPDU (FIG. 11F) is stored in 2 bytes. Then, as the detailed information in the MAC layer frame control information MCNTL, information indicating the type of the MAC layer frame MPDU is stored in the first three bits. Here, as specific types, identification information such as “beacon”, “data”, “ACK (Acknowledgement)”, and “command frame type” are stored. The next one bit stores security presence / absence information. Further, the next one bit stores the presence / absence information of pending data, and the next one bit stores the presence / absence information of the acknowledgment message request.

  And is the next one bit applicable information communication limited to communication within a PAN (Private Area Network)? Communication across multiple PANs? Is stored. As described above with reference to FIG. 1 or FIG. 8A, in the system of the present embodiment, one PAN may correspond to one system α_1132, or one section 1142. Therefore, the method of setting the above information may be changed depending on which of them is used. However, when the Z-format is used for information communication within the same domain network line 2082, information corresponding to "communication across a plurality of PANs" may be stored in this information area. Because, as shown in FIG. 1, the system of the present embodiment allows a situation where the distance between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 is largely apart (protruding from one PAN) in the same domain 2_1122-2. Therefore, in this case, information corresponding to "communication across a plurality of PANs" is stored in the storage area. On the other hand, when the portable system controller β_1128 is moved closer to the system controller α_1126 (when moved within the same PAN), information corresponding to “communication within the PAN” is stored in the storage area. Store.

  The two bits immediately after that and the last two bits in the MAC layer frame control information MACNTL (2 bytes) store the address mode information of each of the receiving side and the transmitting side. Here, as the Z-format, an IEEE extension address DEXADRS, SEXADRS may be specified, or a shortened address may be specified. As shown in FIG. 12A (e), the system of this embodiment is characterized in that both the receiving side and the transmitting side use IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS as the address / mode information. In the system of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8A, not only network communication via the system controller α_1126 and communication modules 1202-3 to 6-2 built in the devices 1250-1 to 1250-3, but also the sensor / sensor as shown in FIG. Network communication is possible via composite modules such as the communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-5 and the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 2. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the communication modules 1202-3 to 4-4 at the level of the media access layer MAC02 using the IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS in this address mode? Or composite modules 1460-1-5, 1470-1, and 2? (Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 12B (e)), and (1) high-speed switching (C-format or other format) of the communication middleware layer APL02 on the receiving side can be performed. (2) The effect of facilitating the discovery of an error (recognition of the communication module 1202-3 to 4? Or the composite module 1460-1 to 5, 1470-1, 2?) On the transmission side that should occur. Occurs.

  Next, the information storage area of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM having a data size of 1 byte described in FIG. 12D will be described. As described above, in the system of the present embodiment, the data size of the entire physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes or less. Therefore, when the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (see FIG. 11B) increases, only one physical layer frame PPDU is insufficient for communication (transmission) of this information. In particular, when an A-format or an E-format is used as the communication middleware layer APL06, this risk increases. As a countermeasure, in the system of the present embodiment, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT are divided into 256 (2 to the eighth power) physical layer frames PPDU to be transmitted (communicated). Specifically, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT are divided into a plurality of pieces and sequentially transmitted (communicated) over a network line. In this case, the physical layer header PHYHD and the IPv6 header IPv6HD (and the TCP header TCP) shown in FIG. 11A all have the same information content. Then, a value (incremented value) obtained by adding one by one starting from “0” is stored in the area of the sequence number MASQNM of the MAC layer in accordance with the transmission (communication) order on the network line. As a result, the divided transmission order of the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT is determined, so that even if the reception order of the physical layer frame PPDU is changed due to a network trouble, there is an effect that information communication can be stably performed.

  Since the data structure shown in (c) of FIG. 12B is exactly the same as that of FIG. 12A (e), the address information MADRS in the MAC header MACHD will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. In the system of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 1, one system α_1132 may be formed by only one PAN (Private Area Network), or may be formed by a combination of a plurality of PANs. Alternatively, each section 1142-1 to 114m in the same system α_1132 may be formed by one or more PANs. When one system α_1132 is composed of a plurality of PANs as described above, the system controller α_1126 needs to manage the plurality of PANs. Then, information communication across different PANs is performed in the same system α_1132. In order to cope with this situation, the system controller α_1126 assigns PAN-specific identification information to each PAN, and as shown in FIG. An area for storing information DPANID and SPANID is set in the address information MADRS storage area.

  The IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on both the receiving side and the transmitting side are each configured with a storage area for a 1-byte extended IEEE extended address EXEXADRS and an 8-byte IEEE-based 802.15.4 compliant chip setting address ADRSIEE. Here, the chip-based set address ADRSIEE conforming to IEEE 802.15.4 refers to all communication modules 1202-3-6 and sensor / communication modules 1460-1-5 conforming to the IEEE 802.15.4 standard worldwide. And a unique number assigned in advance to each composite module such as the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 2. And this unique number is not duplicated at the world level between different communication modules and composite modules. The unique number is assigned before the communication modules 1202-3 to 6-2 and the composite module are shipped. However, the unique number may be applied directly to the IEEE to obtain a unique number. When the unique number is issued by the IEEE or a predetermined official organization, the issuing organization of the unique number, especially with respect to the composite module, performs individual functions and functions, and the communication information when communicating in the C-format adapted to it. Obtain information such as type (category and template type used for information communication). Therefore, not only the function and performance of each target composite module can be known from the information of the setting address ADRSIEE for each chip compliant with the IEEE 802.15.4, but also the type of communication information using the C-format can be officially predicted. Thus, there is an effect that the preparation for the corresponding processing in the communication middleware layer APL02 can be performed quickly and easily.

  Next, FIG. 12B (e) shows an example of a data structure in an expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS (Expanded IEEE Extension Address) in the system of this embodiment. The first one bit in this is an area where module structure information MST can be stored. When this one bit is [0], it indicates the communication module 1202-3 to 6 built in the system controller α_1126 or the devices 1250-1 to 1250-3. On the other hand, when this bit is [1], it indicates that the corresponding node has a composite module structure. The information stored in the next 1-bit area means the composite module structure information CMST. When this bit is [0], the corresponding node indicates the sensor / communication module, and when this bit is [1], the corresponding node indicates the drive / communication module.

At this point, the sense information transmitted from the sensor / communication module starts from a binary light level (lighting is ON or OFF) or a multi-valued light level (corresponding to illuminance), and covers a wide variety such as human feeling and temperature. . As described in Section 1.5 with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6D, the information for controlling the drive / communication module also covers a wide variety such as ON / OFF binary or multi-valued information or remote control control information of the device. I have. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, an area is provided in which information for identifying the type of the sensor / communication module 1460 or the drive / communication module 1470 corresponding to a node can be recorded as composite module type identification information CMTID in 6 bits. In contrast to the method of setting the information CNTID for identifying the type for each of the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the A-format uses the number attribute in the <table> Element as a method for identifying the type of the device 1250 (see FIG. 15B), and the E-format uses type identification information EPC of the exchange information (see the explanation in section 2.6 using FIG. 15A (f)). Therefore, the composite module type identification information CMTID may be used as the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information shown in FIG. 10B. Thus, similarly to the A-format and the E-format, by using the composite module type identification information CMTID, the multi-level / binary transmission data parts CTMDT and CT2DT conforming to the C-format (see FIG. (Described later in section 2.5). Further, by comparing the module structure information MST, the composite module structure information CMST, and the composite module type identification information CMTID with a target node function expected from an IEEE 802.15.4 compliant chip-based set address ADRSIEE, the address information MADRS is read. This also has the effect of improving accuracy and reliability. That is, if the transmitting side erroneously records another information in the storage area of the module structure information MST, the composite module structure information CMST, and the composite module type identification information CMTID, or erroneously reproduces the reproduction information at the time of reproduction on the reception side. When a bit shift (erroneous reproduction) occurs, an error can be easily detected by the above comparison. (In this case, an alarm is notified from the receiving side to the transmitting side. As an example, [000] is set in the communication access control information 1830 of FIG. 14D, and the multi-level transmission data part CTMDT and the binary transmission are set. [00011] is set together with the data part CT2DT. The details will be described later in section 2.5.)
Section 2.4 Data Structure of Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer In this section 2.4, a data structure in communication information corresponding to Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, there is a great feature in that there is an area for storing the IP address information SIPADRS and DIPADRS of the transmitting side and the receiving side described by each 16 bytes shown in FIG. 13B. This IP address is set separately for all communication modules and composite modules in the world. The IP addresses set for all of the communication modules and composite modules in the world do not overlap with each other. Accordingly, by enabling communication of information including the IPv6 header IPv6HD (FIG. 13 (a)) in the system of the present embodiment, if the same domain 2_1122-2 (FIG. 1) is entered, it can be specified from anywhere in the world. There is an effect that information communication can be performed between the communication module and a specific composite module.

  IP packet related information IPPKT is stored in the first 8-byte area shown in FIG. 13B in the IPv6 header IPv6HD. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13C, the header information SIPHD, the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU, the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header, and the passable node remaining number information HPLMT are stored therein. And are arranged in the order described above. This IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU indicates the data size of the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU shown in FIG. 11D, and the area for storing this information has a size of 2 bytes.

  Next, the identification information NXHD of the header type immediately following the IPv6 header will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, various headers are sequentially stored in one physical layer frame PPDU. Then, the header type immediately following the IPv6 header IPv6HD is designated by the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header. Therefore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 11A, “TCP header TCPHD” is specified as the identification information NXHD of the header type immediately following the IPv6 header. Then, the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header makes it possible to specify a communication path setting method on a communication network (on the Internet). Incidentally, in the system of the present embodiment, the information content stored in the physical layer frame PPDU is not limited to FIG. 11A, and other information may be stored. For example, as another application example, another type of header information may be arranged immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. As a specific example, UDP (User Datagram Protocol) may be used instead of TCP (Trasmission Control Protocol) shown in FIG. 13, and a UDP header may be arranged immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. As a further application example, the communication middleware data APLDT may be arranged / stored directly after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. For example, when the E-format is used as the communication middleware data APLDT, as will be described later in section 2.6 with reference to FIG. 15A (b), the E-format header E-HD Is arranged / stored. Therefore, in this case, the information for identifying the “E-format header E-HD” is specified by the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header.

  Information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 using the network line 1788 outside the system shown in FIG. 10A and information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 using the network line 2082 in the same domain are shown in FIG. As described above, information is not directly communicated between the two, and in many cases, information is communicated via a plurality of relay points (relay nodes) in the middle of the external system network line 1788 or the same domain network line 2082. You. Then, the maximum number of relay points (relay nodes) in the middle of the communication circuit allowed between the transmitting node and the receiving node is determined by a positive value (integer) in which the passable node remaining number information HPLMT of FIG. ). For example, when performing information communication between the two, the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is first set in the transmitting node. Next, every time this communication information passes (relays) through a relay point (relay node) in the middle of a communication circuit, the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is decremented by “1” (ie, decremented). After passing through a relay point (relay node) once, the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is updated as a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT before passing. . Then, when the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT becomes "0", information communication on the network is discontinued (discarded). Since the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is described in one byte, it is possible to pass through a maximum of 256 relay nodes (relay nodes).

  However, as the number of relay points (relay nodes) increases, the time required for a communication station from the transmission side to the reception side (time required until information transmission) increases. On the other hand, for urgent information transmission such as “alarm notification”, it is necessary to shorten the communication time. Considering the information transfer time at the relay point (relay node), the number of relay points (relay nodes) must be set to 100 or less, and preferably 10 or less. Therefore, in the information communication using the network line 1788 outside the system or the network line 2082 within the same domain in the system of the present embodiment, the setting value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT on the transmission side is set to 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. There are features in the place. Naturally, the remaining passable node number information HPLMT that is reset (updated) at a relay point (relay node) that is routed in the middle of the external system network line 1788 or the same domain network line 2082 applied to the system of the present embodiment is used. The value is also 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. As described above, when the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT decreases, a router disposed at a relay point (relay node) in the middle of the network line 1788 outside the system or the network line 2082 within the same domain automatically reaches the receiving node. Search for the shortest route to be performed, and prevent interruption of information communication on the way. As described above, the time required for communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 or between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 can be shortened. Yes.

On the other hand, as an information communication mode using the same system network line 1782 in the present embodiment system, information communication between the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 10A and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and information communication between the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. Information communication becomes possible. Then, as shown in FIG. 1, when a plurality of sections 1142 constitute one system, for example, when a different PAN (Personal Area Network) is used for each section 1142, network communication across a plurality of PANs is necessary. In this case, every time the communication information exceeds a different adjacent PAN, an information transfer process at a relay point (relay node) is required. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, it is necessary to define the upper limit value of the relay point (relay node) for relaying between the transmitting node and the receiving node even in the information communication using the network line 1782 in the same system. Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 5, the composite module used in the present embodiment system receives power supply from a built-in power storage module (battery) 1554. Each time a communication information transfer process is performed as a relay point (relay node), the power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 is consumed. Therefore, in information communication using the network line 1782 in the same system, it is necessary to reduce the number of times of transfer of communication information at a relay point (relay node) as much as possible. Considering the relationship between the amount of power consumed for one transfer of communication information and the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554, the number of intermediate relay points (relay nodes) is 30 or less, preferably 10 or less. It is appropriate to set to. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the network line 1782 in the same system is used.
When performing information communication above, there is a great feature in that the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is set to 30 or less, preferably 10 or less in the transmitting node. As a result, there is an effect that unnecessary waste of the power storage amount in the power storage module 1554 built in the composite module is prevented, and the network communication in the system of the present embodiment can be stably maintained for a long time.

  As shown in FIG. 13D, the area of the head information SIPHD in the IPv6 header IPv6HD is composed of areas where version information IPVRS, communication class information IPCLS, and communication type label information IPLBL are stored. They are arranged in the above order. Here, the area in which the version information IPVRS is stored is composed of 4 bits, and stores a value of "6" ("0110" in binary notation) as the Internet protocol version number.

  The communication type label information IPLBL is set immediately before the area where the above-mentioned IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6 DU is stored, and is stored in an area composed of 2.5 bytes. If the combined data size of the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (FIG. 11B) increases, the data is divided and distributed (stored) in a plurality of physical layer frames PPDU. The communication method was described in section 2.3. At this time, the method of storing sequentially incremented values in the area of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM in the MAC layer header MACHD so that the transmission order between the plurality of physical layer frames PPDU is understood has been described. In parallel with this, in the system of the present embodiment, the same communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) is identified as a whole when distributed and stored in a plurality of different IPv6 data / payload IPv6 DUs (see FIG. 11D). For this purpose, the above-mentioned communication type label information IPLBL is used. Here, the contents of the communication type label information IPLBL are set first (before performing network communication) in the transmitting node. Therefore, when a set (series) of communication information contents of communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) related to the same service provision is distributed (stored) in a plurality of IPv6 data / payload IPv6 DUs and communicated. The same label information is commonly stored in the storage area of all the corresponding communication type label information IPLBL for communication. In the system of this embodiment, information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 using the external network line 1788 shown in FIG. 10A and the system controller α_1126 using the network line 1782 in the same system shown in FIG. 1250, or information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 using the intra-domain network line 2082. Then, by changing the content of the “communication type label information IPLBL” for each communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) related to different service provision, communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) relating to a plurality of different service provisions is obtained. At the same time, an effect of enabling communication between the two is produced. As a result, information communication regarding provision of a plurality of different services can be simultaneously performed between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 (or between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250, or between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128). Service can be provided at the same time. Further, by combining the “communication type label information IPLBL” and the information of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM in the MAC layer header MACHD described above, another effect that the reliability of communication information at the time of reception is further improved can be further improved. to be born. As another application example, the same information commonly stored in the “communication type label information IPLBL” for the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) related to the same service provision is used as the “encryption key”. You may.

The communication class information IPCLS described in FIG. 13D is used to indicate a communication class during network communication. In particular, it is assumed that the communication class information IPCLS is mainly used in an upper layer (that is, the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06) above the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 in FIG. 10A. The expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS has already been described in section 2.3 with reference to FIGS. 12B (d) and 12 (e). And as an application example of the present embodiment system,
The storage area of the IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS in the reception side and the transmission side is abolished. The storage area of the IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS in the reception side and the transmission side is IEEE 802.15. Only the information on the ADRSIEE per chip setting address conforming to the IEEE 802.15.4 is stored (that is, the IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on the receiving side and the transmitting side are respectively made to match the ADRSIEE per chip setting address based on IEEE 802.15.4).
The information of the IEEE 802.15.4 compliant chip-specific setting address ADRSIEE is stored in the storage area of the communication class information IPCLS (that is, the communication class information IPCLS is stored in the IEEE 802.15.4 compliant chip setting address). ADRSIEEEE)
May be performed.

As already described with reference to FIG. 10A in section 2.2, the function of the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is performed by the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1768, 1202-3 or the communication module 1660. The service providing function corresponding to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 is performed by the processor 1738 or 1230 or the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660. Therefore, information before the TCP header TCPHD including the inside of the IPv6 header IPv6HD in FIG. 11 is processed in the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1768, 1202-3 or the communication module 1660. Similarly, the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) are processed in the processor 1738, 1230 or the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660. When the physical layer frame PPDU is received, first, the communication class information IPCLS is processed in the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1768, 1202-3 or the communication module 1660, and then the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) is transferred to the processor 1738, 1230 or the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660. Therefore, by storing the extended IEEE extension address EXEXADRS described in FIGS. 12B (d) and (e) in (the communication class information IPCLS storage area thereof) in the IPv6 header IPv6HD, the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) are received. In this case, it becomes possible to prepare for the composite module in advance in the processor 1738, 1230 or the communication module 1660. As a result, there is an effect that the processing speed of the system controller α_1126 for the communication information transmitted from the composite module is improved.
Section 2.5 Data Structure of C-Format in Communication Middleware Layer The "C-format" used in the system of the present embodiment is transmitted on the network line 1782 in the same system described with reference to FIG. The main purpose is to use within the communication middleware layer APL02 for performing information communication with the composite modules 1460 and 1470. Also, as described at the end of section 2.1, this C-format may be used for information communication between the system controller β_1128 in the different system β_1134 and the communication modules 1460 and 1470 in the system α_1132. good. Further, it may be used for information communication with the device 1250. Here, in the C-format, the extension application layer EXL06 (see FIG. 10A) is not specified, and is used only in the communication middleware layer APL02.

  The feature is that the data structure of the C-format is simplified as much as possible in order to reduce the processing load on the communication modules 1460 and 1470 as much as possible. As a specific method for simplifying the data structure, the data structure is such that information duplication in the area from the physical layer header PHYHD to the TCP header TCPHD in FIG. (Details and effects thereof will be described later.) As a specific example, instead of having the size information of the communication middleware data APLDT in the communication middleware data APLDT, the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD is used. Is also used. Here, the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU indicates the data size of the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU in FIG. 11D. Since the data size of the TCP header TCPHD is determined in advance, the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT is automatically determined from the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU as shown in FIGS. The basic data size of the communication middleware data APLDT in the C-format is defined as 1 byte. However, depending on the content of the communication information between the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the extended transmission data CEDT is added to the last part as shown in FIG. May be extended.

  As described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B, in the A-format or the E-format, exchange access control information 1830 is included in exchange information (table) 1810 used for information communication. The exchange access control information 1830 can be stored in the “3-bit format” also in the C-format. In particular, by describing with three bits (= description of eight types of control information), there is an effect that various exchange access control information 1830 can be identified. As a specific control method, at the time of a command (command issuance) 1852 described in case 1 of FIG. 10B, a reset instruction of [111] is set as the exchange access control information 1830. When replying a result report (status) 1854, a response reply of [010] or a report notification or an acknowledgment notification of [001] is set as the exchange access control information 1830.

  In the system according to the present embodiment, a threshold value (a reference level when converting into a binary signal) for converting information analogly detected by the sensor unit in the sensor / communication module 1460 into binary information for information communication is set from outside. It is possible. When setting this threshold value, a threshold level setting instruction of [110] is set as the exchange access control information 1830 corresponding to the command (command issue) 1852 in Case 1 of FIG. 10B.

  On the other hand, a response (data) request of [011] is set as the exchange access control information 1830 in response to the response request (request) 1872 of case 2 in FIG. In the response (response) 1874, a response reply / report notification of [010] is set as the exchange access control information 1830.

  Also, in response to the periodic / irregular report 1894 voluntarily performed from the composite modules 1460 and 1470 of Case 3 in FIG. 10B, a response reply / report notification of [010] is set as the exchange access control information 1830. . Then, when an abnormality is found in the composite modules 1460 and 1470, [000] is set in the exchange access control information 1830 as the above-mentioned non-periodic report, and an alarm is notified. In the case where the composite modules 1460 and 1470 voluntarily perform periodic reporting, a time interval (interval) for regularly reporting from the system controller α_1126 side can be set. In this case, the exchange access control information 1830 is set to [101], and an instruction regarding the report interval is issued.

  For example, as the smart meter 1124 in FIG. 8A, a case is considered in which, for example, the power consumption (public consumption material) is reported to the system controller α_1126, the server n_1116-n, or the wholesaler A_1102 at the specified time interval (interval). In this case, there are a method of reporting an instantaneous value of the instantaneous power consumption (public consumption material) and a method of reporting a value integrated every predetermined period. In response to this situation, the system of the present embodiment sets [100] in the exchange access control information 1830 and issues an instruction regarding the data accumulation interval. Here, when [00000] is specified in the area for storing the transmission data set immediately after the storage area of the exchange access control information 1830, the instantaneous usage (the consumption of public Volume) is reported from the composite module at specified time intervals (intervals).

  As shown in FIG. 14D, the storage area of the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT composed of 4 bits set immediately after the storage area of the exchange access control information 1830 and the binary transmission composed of 1 bit Binary or multi-level transmission data is transmitted by the storage area of the data part CT2DT. Here, the transmission data does not have a special information storage area indicating either binary or multi-valued data, and is characterized in that binary / multi-valued data is identified by the transmission data. That is, when the transmission data is binary, the values of the 4-bit multi-level transmission data part CTMDT are all set to “0” (ie, [0000]). Here, when indicating the ON state or the OK state, [1] is set in the binary transmission data part CT2DT. Further, when indicating the OFF state or the NG (No) state, [0] is set in the binary transmission data part CT2DT. On the other hand, a description will be given of a transmission data setting method when an abnormal situation occurs in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and an alarm is notified to the system controller α_1126 ([000] is set in the exchange access control information 1830). In this case, [0000] is set in the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT. Then, as an abnormal situation of the composite modules 1460 and 1470, in the case of an abnormal detection of a sensor or an abnormal drive system of the drive unit (control impossible / control difficult), [1] is set to the binary transmission data part CT2DT. However, as shown in FIG. 5, since the power storage module (battery) 1554 is built in the sensor / communication module 1460 or the drive / communication module, there is always a risk of depletion of the charged amount (out of remaining amount). Accordingly, when the remaining amount in the power storage module (battery) 1554 decreases, [0] is set in the binary transmission data portion CT2DT to notify the system controller α_1126 of the decrease in the remaining battery amount.

  On the other hand, when information communication is performed using multi-values as transmission data, multi-values are represented by a 5-bit signal including the multi-value transmission data portion CTMDT and the binary transmission data portion CT2DT. For example, when storing multi-valued information from 0% to 100% as transmission data, a multi-valued value from 0% to 100% is converted into a value obtained by dividing it into 30 and converted from [00010] (corresponding to 0%) to [11111]. ] (Corresponding to 100%). However, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and the multi-value information may be expressed by another method using a combination of the multi-value transmission data portion CTMDT and the binary transmission data portion CT2DT. Further, for example, in the case of communication of high-precision sense information or the setting of high-precision of threshold or control value, which is insufficient in expression by 30 divided values such as detection of temperature and humidity and change of illuminance of lighting equipment, the binary transmission data section CT2DT The area for storing the extended transmission data CEDT can be added immediately after the area for storing .times. At this time, the number of bits used for the multi-value expression is indicated based on the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD as described above.

  In this way, by not having a binary / multi-valued identifier and identifying binary / multi-valued in the content of the transmission data, an effect of reducing the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT is produced. As a result, information communication congestion (congestion) on the same system network line 1782 is reduced, and processing in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 (particularly, the interface unit 1710 shown in FIG. 10A) is simplified and combined. Modules 1460 and 1470 can be reduced in price.

  Also, the information indicating the meaning of the transmission data expressed in multi-value has no area to be stored in the communication middleware data APLDT conforming to the C-format. Instead, the information of the multi-valued transmission data is referred to as the information indicating the meaning of the transmission data represented by the multivalued data, and the information of the setting address ADRSIEEE per chip compliant with IEEE802.15.4 in FIG. There are features. As already described in section 2.3, the issuing organization of the IEEE 802.15.4 compliant chip setting address ADRSIEEE has grasped the functions and performances of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 corresponding to the addresses. By publishing this information on the Internet, the meaning of the transmission data corresponding to the composite module corresponding to the IEEE 802.15.4-based chip setting address ADRSIEEE can be understood. Further, from the description in section 2.3 using FIG. 12B (e) and the description in section 2.4 using FIG. 13 (d), the IEEE extension address DEXADRS on the receiving side and the transmitting side in the MAC layer header MACHD is shown. , SEXADRS, or communication class information IPCLS in the IPv6 header IPv6HD can store the composite module type identification information CMTID. Accordingly, by combining the above-described IEEE 802.15.4 compliant chip-specific setting address ADRSIEE with the composite module type identification information CMTID, transmission (for example, represented by multi-valued) is transmitted between the composite modules 1460 and 1470. The meaning of the data CTMDT, CT2DT, and CEDT and the interpretation method thereof can be understood with high accuracy. As described above, the transmission data CTMDT, CT2DT, and CEDT can be used for the meaning and interpretation thereof, and thus the composite module type identification information CMTID is the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information corresponding to each of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 (see FIG. 10B). Related to That is, the composite module type identification information CMTID can be used for the same purpose as the number attribute (see FIG. 15B (b)) in the <table> Element in the A-format described later in section 2.7. On the other hand, in the E-format, the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information corresponds to the type identification information EPC of the exchange information (see the description in section 2.6 using FIG. 15A (f)). As described above, in both the E-format and the A-format, the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information in FIG. 10B is included in the communication middleware data APLDT.

  Compared to the E-format and the A-format described above, in the C-format, information in the MAC layer header MACHD (the composite module type identification in FIG. 12B (e)) is used as information related to the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information in FIG. 10B. There is a significant feature in that information CMTID) or information in the IPv6 header IPv6HD (information in communication class information shown in FIG. 13D based on the explanation in section 2.4) can be used. As already described in section 2.2, at the time of reception, processing of communication information is performed sequentially from the lower layer located in FIG. 10A. Therefore, is the target node the sensor / communication module 1460 at the function level of the media access layer MAC02 or the function level of the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 which is located relatively lower? Or a drive / communication module 1470? When the type of the composite module is known in advance as well as the identification of the communication module, the communication middleware data APLDT is transferred to the interface unit 1710 from the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1660 (shown in FIG. 10A) in advance. The effect that preparation for C-format correspondence can be performed within 1710 is produced. Thereby, the speed of the communication information processing on the receiving side can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the C-format, information specified in other layers is shared and the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT is minimized. This alleviates information communication congestion (congestion) on the network line 1782 in the same system, simplifies the processing in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 (in particular, the interface 1710 shown in FIG. The price of 1470 can be reduced.

  Next, a specific data example of the communication middleware data APLDT in the C-format according to the method described above will be described. For example, when the system controller α_1126 issues a command (issue command) 1852 (FIG. 10B) of “operation stop” to the drive / communication module 1470, “[111] reset instruction” is set in the communication access control information 1830, and Then, "[0000] binary data specification" is set in the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT, and "[0] OFF specification" is set in the binary transmission data section CT2DT. When the sensor / communication module 1460 notifies the system controller α_1126 of, for example, a situation in which the used amount of public consumables is 50% up to now (report), the communication access control information 1830 includes “[010] report notification. And "[10001] 50%" is set in a 5-bit area in which the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT are combined.

Another specific data example is shown below. Already in section 4.3,
○ For adults with large fingers with thick fingers, stable user input is possible even if the sensitivity of the touchpad and capacitance buttons is low,
○ He explained that children and women with thin fingers will not respond unless the sensitivity of the touchpad or capacitive buttons is increased. Correspondingly, after estimating / determining the user state (thickness of the finger) according to section 4.3, the sensitivity is set from the system controller α_1126 to the sensor / communication module 1460 corresponding to the touch pad or the capacitive button. An example is shown. In this case, "[110] threshold level setting instruction" is set in the communication access control information 1830. Then, consider a case where the sensitivity of the touch pad or the capacitance type button is increased from 25% to 73%. Then, [11000] corresponding to 73% is specified in a 5-bit area in which the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT are combined.

  In the above embodiment, the communication timing of the binary information such as ON / OFF and the communication timing of the multi-valued information such as the state setting are separated, and whether the information set in the multi-valued transmission data part CTMDT is [0000] Is it binary of communication information? Is it multi-valued? Let's identify. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another embodiment, binary data such as ON / OFF and multi-value data such as state setting may be transmitted together at the same time. In this case, one-bit binary may be set in the binary transmission data part CT2DT, and multi-level may be set by four bits in the multi-level transmission data part CTMDT. In this way, for example, "start operation and specify state setting value (for example, set temperature) at the same time", binary data and multi-value data such as state setting are communicated together at the same time, so that the system The frequency of information communication between the controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is reduced, and an effect of reducing communication congestion in the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A) in the same system is produced.

It has already been described that the communication accuracy and the communication stability can be enhanced by combining the chip-based set address ADRSIEEEE conforming to IEEE 802.15.4 with the composite module type identification information CMTID. If an error occurs in the system controller α_1126 and the functions of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 of the communication partner are mistaken, the error can be found by comparing the information between the two. If an error in the system controller α_1126 is found on the composite module 1460, 1470 side, the system of this embodiment supports a function of notifying the error from the composite module 1460, 1470 to the system controller α_1126. In this case, “[000] alarm notification” is set in the communication access control information 1830 of FIG. Then, [00011] is set in the 5-bit area where the next multi-level transmission data section CTMDT and binary transmission data section CT2DT are combined to notify the target erroneous recognition notification. As described above, in the system of the present embodiment, by supporting the function of notifying the error that has occurred in the system controller α_1126 from the composite module 1460, 1470 or the device 1250, the stability and reliability of the information communication on the network line 1782 in the same system are supported. The effect is improved.
Section 2.6 Data Structure of E-Format at Communication Middleware Layer The “E-format” used in the system of the present embodiment mainly includes the device 1250 and the The main purpose is to use the communication middleware layer APL06 for performing information communication with the server n_1116-n. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be used for information communication between different system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, and may be used for information communication with composite modules 1460 and 1470. As described in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B, in the E-format, information communication is basically performed by exchanging exchange information (table) 1810 between the transmitting node and the receiving node. Therefore, this exchange information (table) 1810 (or a part thereof) is stored in the IPv6 data / payload IPv6 DU as a part of the communication middleware data APLDT shown in FIG. As described later in section 2.7, the A-format has a feature described in a broadly-defined text format. On the other hand, the E-format has a feature that the correspondence information is stored in a predetermined area set in advance by a setting code. Therefore, the E-format is defined as a format in which "the setting code is stored in a predetermined area in the area of the communication middleware data APLDT". Therefore, in the system of the present embodiment, any format for sequentially storing the setting code in a predetermined area set in advance is included in the E-format.

  At the head of the communication middleware layer data APLDT based on the E-format, an E-format header E-HD shown in FIG. 15A (b) is stored in a 2-byte area. Then, the value of the E-format header E-HD is set to [1081h] ("h" indicates a hexadecimal value and [0001000010000001] in binary notation). Then, in the next two-byte area, identification information TID for association between request transmission and response reception is stored. Here, the identification information TID for association between the request transmission and the response reception is the association between the response request transmitted in advance when the response request (request) transmission side receives the response (response) and the received response (response). Means the parameters to achieve. (The sequence of the response (response) 1874 to this response request (request) 1872 corresponds to the sequence shown in case 2 of FIG. 10B.) The code stored in this area is the response request (request) transmission side node. Can be specified arbitrarily. Next, when the receiving node of the response request (request) makes a response (response), the same code as the code set by the previous response request (request) transmitting node is stored in this area. Then, it is determined whether or not the received information indicates a response (response) to the previous answer request (request) based on the matching degree determination of the association identification information TID between the request transmission and the response reception.

  The E-format data E-DT stored in the next area shown in FIG. 15A (b) corresponds to the exchange information 1810 described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B. Then, as shown in FIG. 15A (c), the E-format data E-DT includes 3-byte identification information SEOJ of the transmitting device, 3-byte identification information DEOJ of the receiving device, and 1-byte communication access control information ESV. , Control / processing-related information CM1, and are arranged in the order described above. Here, the one-byte communication access control information ESV corresponds to the communication access control information 1830 described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B.

  As shown in FIG. 15A (d), the identification information SEOJ of the transmitting device and the identification information DEOJ of the receiving device are both 1-byte device type group code DTGC, 1-byte device type code DTC, and 1-byte identical type. An internal device identification code DIDC is provided and arranged in the order described above. The device type group code DTGC indicates a device type group, and indicates, for example, which group, such as a sensor-related device group, an air-conditioning-related device group, a housing / equipment-related device group, a cooking / housework-related device group, includes the target device. Show. The next device type code DTC indicates a device type such as a television and an air conditioner. When a plurality of different devices 1250 corresponding to the same device type are installed in the same system α_1132 (for example, when a plurality of air conditioners are installed in one house), identification of each device 1250 is performed. In order to perform this, the device identification code DIDC within the same type is set.

  In the case where an air conditioner is considered as an example of the device 1250, there are setting states related to a plurality of items such as “set temperature”, “set air volume”, “set wind direction”, and “set timer time (automatic ON / automatic OFF)”. The setting change (state change control) can be simultaneously performed for a plurality of items. Therefore, in the exchange information (table) 1810 shown in FIG. 10B, “state concerning a plurality of items” or “simultaneous setting change instruction (state change control information) concerning a plurality of items” is defined even for a single device, Information can be described in the form of a list. Therefore, in the control / processing related information of FIG. 15A (c), as shown in FIG. 15A (e), it is possible to simultaneously collect state information and perform state change control corresponding to a setting change for a plurality of items. The number of items of status information to be collected at the same time or the number of items for which status change control (setting change) is performed at the same time is described in 1 byte as the control / process number NCM. The control / processing information CM-1 to CM-1 to n-th are arranged in the above order for the number of items set by the control / processing number NCM.

  As shown in FIG. 15A (f), each control / processing information CM-1 to CM-n is composed of 1-byte exchange information type identification information EPC, 1-byte data size PDC of individual exchange information, and individual exchange information EDT. And are arranged in the order described above. Then, “state information to be collected”, “state information to be answered”, or “state change (setting change) control information” stored for each item corresponding to each device 1250 is stored as the individual exchange information EDT described above. . The data size information for each individual exchange information EDT is stored as the data size PDC of the individual exchange information.

  Depending on the type of the corresponding device 1250 (that is, based on the content of the above-described device type code DTC), the item content indicating the status and the item content of the status change control (setting change) are different. Therefore, in the E-format, for each type of the corresponding device 1250 (contents of the device type code DTC), information items and information expression formats for which status should be collected, or items for which status change control (setting change) is to be performed and control information expressions are provided. The format is determined in advance, and a template and an item code (template code) according to the expression format for each item are prepared in advance. Then, an item code set for each type of the corresponding device 1250 (contents of the device type code DTC) is stored as the type identification information EPC of the exchange information. Further, the type identification information EPC of the exchange information corresponds to the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information shown in FIG. 10B.

Here, taking the case where the setting of the home air conditioner is changed (state change control) under the control of the system controller α_1126 as an example, the information in the E-format data E-DT corresponding to the exchange information (table) 1810 will be described. . A command (command issuance) for setting change (state change control) in the E-format corresponds to the "write request" described in section 2.1. Therefore, [60h] (= when no response is required) or [61h] (= when a response is required) is set as the communication access control information ESV (1830) in FIG. 15A (c). (For reference, the setting code of the communication access control information ESV (1830) corresponds to [62h] for "read request", [73h] for "notification", and [72h] for "read response". ) And the device type group code DTGC of the home air conditioner corresponds to [01h] meaning an air conditioner related device group. The device type code DTC is [30h]. Here, the same device-specific device identification code DIDC when assigned to the first air conditioner in the system α_1132 is [01h]. Therefore, when the system controller α_1126 issues a command 1852 (corresponding to case 1 in FIG. 10B) for this home air conditioner to the home air conditioner, the identification information of the receiving device in FIG. 15A (c) is [013001h]. . When the corresponding air conditioner is changed to the operating state under the control of the system controller α_1126, the type identification information EPC of the exchange information is [80h], the data size of the individual exchange information is [01h] (= 1 byte), The exchange information EDT is [30h]. Therefore, the first control / processing information CM-1 combining these pieces of information can be represented by [800130h]. Next, when the set temperature is changed to 26 ° C. as the control / processing of n-bit, the type identification information EPC of the exchange information is [B3h], and the data size of the individual exchange information is [01h] (= 1 byte). , The individual exchange information EDT is [1Ah] meaning 26 ° C. Accordingly, the n-th control / processing information CM-n obtained by combining these pieces of information is expressed as [B3011A].
Section 2.7 Data Structure of A-Format at Communication Middleware Layer The “A-format” used in the system of the present embodiment mainly includes the device 1250 and the The main purpose is to use it in the communication middleware layer APL06 that performs information communication with the server n_1116-n. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be used for information communication between different system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, and may be used for information communication with composite modules 1460 and 1470. As described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B, in the A-format, information communication is basically performed by exchanging exchange information (table) 1810 between the transmitting node and the receiving node. Therefore, this exchange information (table) 1810 (or a part thereof) is stored in the IPv6 data / payload IPv6 DU as a part of the communication middleware data APLDT shown in FIG.

  In the A-format, as shown in an example in FIG. 15B, the communication middleware data APLDT may be described in an XML (Extensible Markup Language) format. In this specification, a method of describing the content on a text basis such as the XML or HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) is referred to as a “broadly defined text format”. For example, in HTML, a tag is always described in a description sentence. However, the above-described tag description is not necessarily required in the “broadly defined text format”, and any text format description in a broadly defined sense is included in the “broadly defined text format”. Therefore, for example, a program such as a Java applet, Java Script, or C language is also included in the above-mentioned broad text format. By describing the communication middleware data APLDT in a text format in a broad sense as described above, there is an effect that versatility and expandability of the communication middleware data APLDT can be secured. Therefore, the A-format in the system of the present embodiment is defined as "a format described in a broad text format as communication information related to the communication middleware layer APL". Any format described in the broad text format is included in the A-format. The exchange information (table) 1810 configured in the table format in FIG. 10B corresponds to the “<table> Element area” (range from <table-> to </ table>) in FIG. 15B (b). good.

  In the A-format, a <tdl> Element, which is a Root Element, may be set as a parent element (Parent Element) of the <table> Element. (Here, <tdl> means transfer data language.) As described in FIG. 15B (b), a date attribute (date attribute) is used as attribute information (Attribute) of the <tdl> Element. ) May be used to describe the creation date of the table. Here, in the description of FIG. 15B (b), the creation date of the corresponding table is “December 25, 2014”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 15B (b), the number attribute (number attribute) or the name attribute (name attribute) in the <table> Element corresponds to the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information shown in FIG. 10B. In the communication middleware data APLDT described in the A-format, a place where the information corresponding to the device type group code DTGC or the device type code DTC is displayed and displayed as in the E-format described in section 2.6. There is no. Instead, a template of a table preliminarily defining an item of information to be collected in the device 1250 and an information expression format, or an item of the device 1250 to be subjected to the status change control (setting change) and an expression format of the control information, Detailed settings are made for each corresponding device type. Then, a table number and a table name are specified for each template of a table that is set in detail for each device type. As an example of this, as shown in "number =" 02 "" in FIG. 15B (b), the template number of the corresponding table may be directly specified by the numerical value specified by the number attribute. Therefore, by describing the number attribute or the name attribute in the corresponding <table> Element, it is possible to automatically describe the communication middleware data APLDT according to the table template. The present embodiment system is not limited to this, and another description may be associated with the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information that can be used for selecting a standard template used in the information exchange table. Similarly to the method of associating the template of the table corresponding to the type of the device 1250 by specifying the numerical value by the number attribute described above, the standard template for information exchange according to the type of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is called in FIG. The composite module type identification information CMTID of e) may be used (for details, see section 2.5).

  In FIG. 15B (b), as an example of describing communication information in the communication middleware data APLDT conforming to the A-format, the power consumption periodically integrated in the smart meter 1124 in FIG. "Shows a description example for notifying the service provider B_1112-2 (the server n_1116-n therein) which performs the power supply service. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the smart meter 1124 is connected to the system controller α_1126 and the wholesaler A1102 via a network line, the communication information may be transmitted to the system controller α_1126 and the wholesaler A1102. . On the other hand, since the voltage value to be supplied depends on the place where the smart meter 1124 is installed (that is, corresponding to a general home, a building or a factory), the integrated current value is notified instead of the integrated power amount. . 15B (b), information described in a “broadly defined text format” may be used for information communication with any device 1250 or any of the composite modules 1460 and 1470.

  As an example of the notification of the integrated current value shown in FIG. 15B (b), in the A-format, a standard table (table template) having a table number “2” and a table template name “Device Nameplate Table” is used. You may. In the A-format, Table may be abbreviated and described as “TBL”. Therefore, "number =" 02 "" is described as the number attribute in the <table> Element, and "name =" DEVICE_NAMEPLATE_TBL "is described as the name attribute.

  As already explained in section 1.7, the types of the smart meter 1124 are not limited to “electric power consumption” but various types such as “gas consumption”, “tap water usage”, “sewage discharge”. There is a smart meter 1124 for notifying the usage status of each public consumable item. On the other hand, in the description example of FIG. 15B (b), "type =" E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD "" is described in the type attribute to mean "measure the amount of electricity used". Here, the above “RCD” means Record of packedRecord. As already described in section 2.2, the communication middleware layer data APDLT (part of) described in FIG. 15B (b) is packed in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU for communication. Therefore, the expression “packedRecord” is used to mean “packing (part of) the communication middleware layer data APDLT and recording it in the physical layer frame PPDU for communication”. Therefore, "name =" E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD "" is described in the number attribute in <packedRecord> Element using the same word as above.

  The exchange access control information 1830 must be included in the exchange information (table) 1810 in both the A-format and the E-format described in Section 2.1 already described in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10B. showed that. The communication access control information 1830 is made to correspond to an accessibility attribute in a <table> Element or a <set> Element described later. With this accessibility attribute, one of READWRITE, READONLY, and WRITEONLY can be requested from the receiving node. Here, READ means an instruction to read the state of the receiving node (for example, the device 1250 or the composite module 1460 or 1470) and to make the read information answered (or to notify the sense information), in the E-format. "Read request". WRITE means an information response or a status change setting instruction to the receiving node side, and corresponds to "notification", "read response", or "write request" in the E-format. READWRITE is used when instructing the receiving node to correspond to the sequence of response request (request) 1872 / response (response) 1874 in case 2 of FIG. 10B. The present embodiment is not limited to this, and another description may be associated with the communication access control information 1830. In the example of FIG. 15B (b), the information of the “integrated current value (Ampere)” measured by the smart meter 1124 is notified to the receiving node (for example, the server n_1116-n, the controller α_1126, or the wholesaler A1102). "WRITEONLY" is specified.

  The element in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 15B (b) indicates “an individual item such as sensing target information, detection target status information, or control (setting change) target status information”. I have. Therefore, it is specified in advance in the template of the table selected in accordance with the information content specified by the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information (the information content specified by number attribute or name attribute in <table> Element) in FIG. 10B. The setting is described in each <element> Element for each item.

  In the table template specified by “type =" E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD ”” in the table template set in advance with “table number 2”, the individual specified in <packedRecord> Element The items of “E_KH” (power amount integrated periodically), “E_KT” (test pulse output amount), “E_INPUT_SCALAR” (specify the unit of communication information, and change the value input from the sensor by “ "E_ELEMENT" (smart meter local number), "E_VOLTS" (can monitor instantaneous voltage value / voltage fluctuation of power transmission system in real time) and "E_AMPS" (periodic) Are prepared in advance. In the description example shown in FIG. 15B (b), only “E_KH” and “E_AMPS” in the description example are defined using <element> Element.

  First, the <element> Element that specifies "E_KH" in the name attribute declares that "this communication information is notified of the power amount periodically integrated". According to the standard, only the information of <element name = "E_KH"> can tell what "E_KH" means. However, a <description> Element is set so that the contents of the exchange information (table) 1810 can be understood without referring to the standard document. As described above, even in the A-format which can be described in a broad text format, there is a feature of the A-format even in a place having “a function capable of supplementary explanation by a broad text”. Based on this, the description contents can be understood without reference to the standard document, so that there is an effect that the receiving node can easily understand the exchange information (table) 1810.

  As an example of the A-format, numerical values are set using a <set> Element. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and numerical values may be set by another description method. Prior to using the <set> Element, specify the type of “E_AMPS_RCD” in the <element> Element with “E_KH” specified in the name attribute (<element name = "E_AMPS" type = "E_AMPS_RCD") and specify " The item "current value periodically integrated" is notified by packedRecord in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU. " After that, <set> Element is defined using the same name of "E_AMPS_RCD".

  The “periodic integrated current value” measured by the smart meter 1124 is set by a value attribute in an <enum> Element (enum means an electrical numerator). (Here, the smart meter 1124 automatically substitutes the measured value at the place of $$$$ of value = "$$$$".) Also, the variable name “E_AMPS” meaning the numerical value set here is <enumerator> Specified by name attribute in Element.

Here, the <description> Element has already been described as a “supplementary explanation function” in the A-format. However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and a supplementary explanation may be made using a label attribute or a text attribute.
Section 2.8 Address table used in the system of the present embodiment and examples of its use From the description in Sections 2.3 to 2.7, different addresses are set for the same module for each layer in duplicate. I understand that it will be done. For example, in an address table showing a list of various addresses that can be set for the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 8A or the drive / communication module 1470-2 and the sensor / communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B. FIG. 23 shows an example of the data structure of FIG. As a method of using this address table, the method described in section 4.2 may be used in addition to the description in section 2.8.

  Meanwhile, in FIG. 23, various addresses that are duplicated and set in the drive / communication module 1470-2 and the sensor / communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B are collectively described in the same vertical column. In addition, various addresses that are set to be duplicated in the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 incorporated in the device 1250-1 in FIG. 8A are also collectively described in the same vertical column. Incidentally, the IEEE extension address EXADRS included in one of the address items in the address table of FIG. 23 is given to the communication module chip 1202-4 (see section 2.3). Therefore, in the IEEE extension address EXADRS corresponding to the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 23, an address related to the communication module chip 1202-4 built in the same device 1250-1 is set.

  Among the address items described in the address table of FIG. 23, the IEEE extension address EXADRS is individually set in the media access layer MAC02 as described in section 2.3. Next, in the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6, as described in section 2.4, the IP address IPADRS (sending IP address information SIPADRS / receiving IP address information DIPADRS) is individually set. On the other hand, in the communication middleware layer APL06, the device type code DIDC within the same type is set in accordance with the E-format described in section 2.6.

The system of this embodiment is characterized in that the list of FIG. 23 in which the section information in which each module is currently arranged is added to the list in the memory unit 1232 of the system controller β_1134 or the system controller α_1126. . Thereby,
(1) We can provide services efficiently and accurately,
(2) Format conversion in the system controller β_1134 and the system controller α_1126 can be easily performed.
(3) It is easy to detect an error that occurs in a transmitting node or a node in the middle of a communication path, so that the effect of improving the reliability of information communication is produced.

  As described in Chapter 4, in the system of the present embodiment, a service can be provided for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Therefore, when controlling the state of the plurality of devices 1250 or the plurality of drive / communication modules 1470 in the same section 1142 as a form of the service (changing the setting state), the state control (setting) is performed by utilizing the information in FIG. (Change of state) It becomes very easy to select the target device 1250 and the drive / communication module 1470.

  Also, as described in section 2.1, when performing information communication across different network lines (network line 1782 in the same system / network line 1788 outside the system / network line 2082 in the same domain), the format must be changed on the way. There is. In this case, the format conversion can be performed smoothly and accurately by using the information in FIG.

  Here, a specific description will be given by taking information communication between the device 1250 or the combination modules 1460 and 1470 arranged in the system α_1132 and the system controller β_1128 arranged in a different system β_1134 as an example. A description will be given of a case where format conversion is performed in the relayed system controller α_1126 during this information communication. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information in FIG. 23 may be used in any form of network communication in the system of the present embodiment. As a prerequisite, it is assumed that both the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 store the information of FIG. 23 in the memory unit 1232 in advance. Even if the arrangement position of the system controller β_1128 is far away from the system α_1132, the system controller β_1128 can collect what kind of information from the system α_1132 using the information of FIG. Change) can be performed. Further, in the system of the present embodiment, since Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is used for all information communication, IP address information IPADRS is set in advance in the system controller β_1128, all devices 1250, and the composite modules 1460 and 1470. I have.

  First, a description will be given of a method of performing format conversion from the C-format to the E-format on the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 in the system controller α_1126 during the information communication. As already described in section 2.5, since the C-format itself does not have any address information, information that needs to be set in the E-format cannot be obtained from the C-format information. However, as shown in FIG. 23, information related to the E-format is recorded in advance in FIG. Therefore, in the system controller α_1126 (specifically, in the processor 1230), the E-format is used by using the device type group code DTGC, the device type code DTC, and the device ID code DIDC in the same type described herein. Create information.

  Conversely, the case where the A-format, E-format, or W-format is converted to the C-format will be described. As already described in section 2.5, when the composite modules 1460 and 1470 use the C-format, the extended IEEE extension of FIGS. 12B (d) and (e) specified in layers other than the communication middleware layer APL02 Use the address EXEXADRS. However, by utilizing the IEEE extension address EXADRS for each of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 described in FIG. 23, processing corresponding to the C-format can be smoothly performed. If a format in which the extended IEEE extension address EXEXADRS is not included in the IEEE extension address EXADRS is used, the composite module corresponding via the Internet using the chip-based set address ADRSIIEEE conforming to IEEE 802.15.4. The attribute information of 1460 and 1470 can be obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another method may be used. In other words, the system of the present embodiment takes advantage of the feature that the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is commonly used for all information communication, and as described in section 2.4 (even at the time of information communication using other than the C-format), The information of the extended IEEE extension address EXEXADRS of FIG. 12B (d) may be stored in advance in the communication class information IPCLS of 13 (d).

  Next, a method of changing the format of the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 and the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 in the system controller α_1126 (specifically, in the processor 1230) will be described. In this case, only the physical layer and the media access layer are replaced using the information in FIG. 23 based on the common IP address IPADRS specified by the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6. That is, in the system of the present embodiment, the sender IP address information SIPADRS and the receiver IP address information DIPADRS (see FIG. 13B) are stored in the IPv6 header IPv6HD in common regardless of the communication line route on the way. Therefore, by referring to the reception side IP address information DIPADRS with respect to the information in FIG. 23, the PAN unique information PANID and the IEEE extension address EXEADRS of the reception side used in the Z-format can be extracted.

Finally, a description will be given of how the reliability of information communication using a network line is improved by using the information in FIG. If an error occurs in a node on the information transmission side or a node that relays information in the middle of a communication path (including the system controller α_1126), information that is inappropriate for a part of the communication information described in FIGS. 12A to 15B There is a risk of contamination. When this occurs, information communication in the network system is hindered. In response to this problem, by sequentially verifying the communication information using the information in FIG. 23 in the system controllers α_1126 and β1128, it is possible to very easily specify whether or not an error has occurred in the communication information and specify the error location. As a result, the effect of improving the reliability of information communication is produced.
Chapter 3 Management / Display Method for Each Unit Section 3.1 Overview of Basic Unit Management Method As described in Section 1.1 with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2, in the present embodiment system,
"Domain / System / Section / Unit / Equipment or Composite Module"
It has a hierarchical structure. That is, the domain 2_1122-2 includes one or more systems α_1132, and one system can be divided into sections 1142. A unit 1290 is arranged for each section 1142. In addition, as a specific form of the unit 1290, a single device 1250, a single composite module 1295, or a mixed system thereof is allowed. Further, there is a system controller α_1126 for managing or controlling network communication in the system α_1132 and collecting information, and manages the unit 1290. In order to cope with unexpected events such as power outages and failures, alternative management / control / information collection of another system controller β_1128 is possible as appropriate. And with respect to this alternative system controller β_1128, “movable” or “at least temporarily arranged outside the corresponding system α_1132” is allowed.

  As a method of managing units based on the above hierarchical structure, there is a feature of the system of the present embodiment in "manage units belonging to each system α_1132". As described above, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) manages, controls, and collects network communication for each system. Therefore, as described above, “all units 1290 included in the same system α_1132 are collectively managed in units of the system α_1132”, thereby facilitating management / control / information collection of network communication of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128). This has the effect of improving the performance.

  In addition to this, the “plug-in processing”, “plug-out processing”, or “check-in processing” described later in section 4.2 is used to “manage in the system α_1132 in accordance with the unit 1290 that enters and leaves the system α_1132. The place where the target unit 1290 is switched has the following features. That is, when a specific unit 1290 enters the system α_1132, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) automatically detects it, and the specific unit 1290 is managed by the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128). Automatically register as. Conversely, when another predetermined unit 1290 goes out of the system α_1132, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) automatically detects that, and the other predetermined unit 1290 is detected by the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128). Is automatically deleted from the management target unit 1290.

As a result, even if the plurality of units 1290 frequently enter and exit the specific system α_1132, there is an effect that network communication management in the specific system α_1132 can be performed while ensuring stable and high reliability.
For example, when an external hard disk device, an external optical disk device, a USB memory device, or the like is connected to a conventional computer system, it is automatically recognized as a “new additional drive” (for example, a D drive or an E drive) (plug-in processing). To “drive management”. Here, when the number of units 1290 belonging to the same system α_1132 is small, each unit 1290 may be managed as an individual drive as described above. However, the system of this embodiment allows a large number of units 1290 to belong in the same system α_1132. As described above, if “D drive” and “E drive”} are sequentially added for each unit 1290 added in the same system α_1132, the drive management fails at a stage beyond the “Z drive”. As described above, when the unit 1290 management using the conventional technique is attempted, there is a problem that A) the number of units 1290 in the same system α_1132 cannot be increased. Similarly, considering not only drive management but also port assignment such as network communication control,
B] A further related problem is that the increase in units 1290 also causes the corresponding port assignment to fail. If we try our own innovative measures to avoid the problems of [A] and [B],
C) A further problem arises in that compatibility with the management method on the conventional computer system is broken.

In the present embodiment, as a method for simultaneously solving the above problems [A] to [C],
It has a major feature in that it manages units using a method similar to file management via a computer network. Then, it is regarded as "1 unit 1290 @ 1 pseudo file". Here, the process of “collecting predetermined information (for example, collecting sensor information) from the unit 1290” viewed from the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) that manages the unit 1290 is referred to as “information reproduction (READ) process from the unit 1290”. Is managed as ". Similarly, the process of “changing (controlling) the setting state of the unit 1290” viewed from the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) that manages the unit 1290 is replaced with “setting state information after changing the unit 1290 (contents to be controlled)”. WRITE processing ”.

  In file management via a computer network in a place, "designation of a URL (Uniform Resource Locator)" is often performed to designate a file storage location on the network. However, since the location of the unit 1290 is determined to be within the same system α_1132, the present embodiment is also characterized in that “the system α_1132 to be managed is assigned as one drive or folder or directory instead of specifying a URL”. Yes. If an individual drive is assigned to each unit 1290 as in [A] above, it will be difficult to cope with an increase in the number of units 1290. However, as described above, by allocating only one drive, folder, or directory to one system α_1132, not only can the number of units 1290 be increased flexibly, and port allocation does not fail, This has the effect of ensuring compatibility with management methods in the conventional computer world.

Next, a method of realizing the above basic concept will be described. In order to apply the “unit 1290 management method” on application software using a computer network, there is a method of defining a new “unit management compatible API (Application Interface)”. Alternatively, a new “unit management compatible built-in function or reference / usable subprogram” may be defined. Here, a program called “subroutine” may be used as a subprogram that can be referred to / used by the another program. The above-mentioned built-in function may be a program called a “function” or a program called a predetermined “method” which is embedded and used in specific application software (specific class) by JavaScript (registered trademark).
Section 3.2 Unit management means As means for realizing the basic concept of unit management described in section 3.1, in addition to the above-mentioned application software, the following hardware devices are also devised.

  FIG. 18A shows a hardware configuration and a software hierarchical structure around a conventional computer system. A processor 3010 built in the computer is connected to a communication control unit 3028 and a recording medium control unit 3024 via a bus line 3012. Here, in the information communication between the processor 3010 and the recording medium control unit 3024, command / status information corresponding to a device drive (commonly called a debdora) is mutually communicated via a connection unit 3018 which is directly connected to the bus line 3012. Then, the recording medium control unit 3024 decodes the content and directly drives the recording medium (hardware unit) 3014. A specific example of the recording medium (hardware) 3014 includes a hard disk, an optical disk, and a USB memory.

On the other hand, the information communication execution unit 3016 indicates a part that actually executes network communication, and has communication means according to a wired / wireless communication medium. The information communication execution unit 3016 is also controlled by the processor 3010 in the same manner as described above.
Conventional computer controls viewed from software include a device driver area 3022 involved in control of a recording medium (hardware unit) 3014 and a communication driver area involved in control of an information communication execution unit 3016 in an OS (Operating System) layer 3030. 3026 are included. On the other hand, the application software 3050 issues an API (Application Programming Interface) command 3045 to the OS layer 3030 to execute the application software 3050.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) performs both information communication control using the network line 1788 outside the system and information communication control using the network line 1782 within the same system, as compared with the conventional type described above. There is a big feature in the place where you do. To make this possible, as shown in FIG. 18B, it has both an outside-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3017 and an in-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015. Here, for convenience of description, FIG. 18B shows the two physically separated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a structure may be adopted in which a part between the outside system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3017 and the inside system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 is duplicated / shared, or one is substantially included in the other. May be included.

  An external system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3017 and an intra system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 in FIG. 18B mean a transmission / reception unit of a radio wave (including detection) or a communication information transmission / reception unit of wired communication. Therefore, there are a communication control unit for external connection 3030 and a communication control unit for internal connection 3021 that control them. Also, for convenience of description, it is described that a predetermined program area corresponding to the communication driver area for external connection 3027 and a predetermined program area corresponding to the communication driver area 3025 for internal system connection exist in the OS layer 3030. In practice, however, there is no need to provide independent subprograms. When both of them are partly used, one of the two program steps corresponds to the BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) control area 3020. It may be overlapped / shared with the program area.

  In the embodiment of FIG. 18B, as a means for realizing the operation outline described in the section 3.1, in the embodiment of FIG. (Using terminology), the management / control area 3034 of the unit in the system is formed (physically or virtually). The in-system unit management / control area 3034 includes (at least part of) a processor 3010 having a hardware structure including a control program corresponding to the in-system connection compatible communication driver area 3025, and an in-system connection compatible communication control unit. 3021 and a bus line 3012 (including a connection portion 3018) connecting the two.

  The configuration in the management / control area 3034 of the unit in the system corresponds to the processor / communication module 1465 described with reference to FIG. 4D. That is, as described in section 1.3, the part related to the network communication using the network line 1782 in the same system in the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) is a composite module 1295 called a processor / communication module 1465. Is composed.

  Even if a special line called a network line 1782 in the same system is used, a part involved in network communication should be regarded as a part of the communication control unit 3028 and the communication driver area 3026 in FIG. Conceivable. However, as described in section 3.1, when managing the unit 1290 by regarding “1 unit 1290 ≒ 1 pseudo file”, the management / control area 3034 of the unit in the system described above Functionally similar to the device driver area 3022. Therefore, in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 18B, at least a part of the management / control area 3034 of the unit in the system is included in the device drive area 3022 in the OS layer 3030. As described above with reference to FIG. 18B, “a part of the control program corresponding to the existing device driver area 3022 may be shared for the management of the unit 1290”. Alternatively, a part of the control program corresponding to the existing BIOS control area 3020 may be used for the management of the unit 1290 (that is, a part of the control program corresponding to the BIOS control area 3020 may be used for the unit in the system). May be included in the management / control area 3034).

  In the example of the embodiment of FIG. 18B, the case where a predetermined OS (Operating System) is used in the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the execution process of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) may be performed without using any existing OS.

  In the application example of the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 19A and 19B, a unit for managing the unit 1290 using JavaScript is described. In this JavaScript, a JVM (Java Virtual Machine) is installed for each corresponding processor 3010 instead of using a predetermined OS (Operating System). The program environment executed here is composed of a class group 3160, and, for example, a main method 3148 in the application class 3158 is executed in response to a user request. Here, the class group 3160 includes various programs described in JavaScript (Java language).

In FIG. 19A, a processor 3010 and an intra-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 represent a hardware unit. The operation of the intra-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 is controlled by the intra-system connection correspondence communication control unit 3021.
By the way, in the prior art, a program involved in file management in the class group 3160 is stored in a file class 3154 composed of a plurality of instance method groups 3144 in the file class. On the other hand, in the application example of the embodiment, a management / control class 3150 of a unit in the system for managing the unit 1290 is newly set in the class group 3160. In the unit management / control class 3150 in the system, there is an area where the unit management / control related method group 3140 is stored. Here, there are various methods for executing the subdivided operation processes related to the management / control of the unit 1290 as various methods. A collection of these various methods is called a method group, and constitutes a management / control-related method group 3140 of the unit.

Next, the relationship between the program 3188 described in the main method 3148 in the application class 3158 and the unit management / control related method group 3140 will be described with reference to FIG. 19B.
When the application class 3158 is activated, the process 3174 (3170) for importing the file class 3154 specified in advance and the management / control class 3150 of the unit in the system newly proposed in the application example of this embodiment is performed. Then, an instance method group 3144 in the file class included in the incorporated (imported) file class 3154 and a management / control-related method group 3140 of the unit included in the management / control class 3150 of the unit in the system. Can be used from within the application class 3158.

  Next, a predetermined method in the instance method group 3144 in the file class is referred to 3194 from within the program step 3188 described in the main method 3148, and the execution process concerning the file system can be performed efficiently. Similarly, by referring to a specific method included in the unit management / control related method group 3140 from another program step 3188 described in the main method 3148, management / control / information collection regarding the unit 1290 can be efficiently performed. .

  In the application example of the present embodiment, a predetermined organization different from the user creates a program corresponding to the management / control class 3150 of the unit in the system in advance and appropriately sends the program to the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) via the Internet. Perform additional installation. In addition, since the program step 3188 for referring to a specific method 3190 in the unit management / control related method group 3140 in the main method 4148 is one line (at most several lines), it is very easy to execute the program step 3188 of the unit 1290 in the application class 3158. Management / control / information collection can be handled. By using the above method, there is an effect that the management / control / information collection means of the unit 1290 can be easily incorporated with little burden on the software developer of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128).

  FIG. 20 shows a comparison between the existing file system and the unit management method according to the present embodiment. The storage location of the basic management information is different from the storage location of the existing file system in the storage medium, whereas the storage location of the basic management information is stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 in the unit management method of the present embodiment. Next, a description will be given of a method of accessing content (predetermined file in the file system / predetermined unit in the unit management). In an existing file system, a file name (including a URL where the file is stored) is specified, and a range where predetermined information in the file is recorded is specified by a relative address range in the file. In contrast, in the unit management method according to the present embodiment, the address of the corresponding unit is specified. Here, the specified address means an address (for example, an IP address IPADRS or an IEEE extension address EXADRS) described in the address table of FIG. In the unit management method according to the present embodiment, since the information size of the information (setting state information and sensor information to be changed) owned by the unit 1290 is relatively small, the information is read / written as one unit 1290 as a whole. . Therefore, there is an effect that management / control / information collection is greatly simplified as compared with the existing file system.

  In the existing file system, file management information such as FAT (File Allocation Table) and UDF (Universal Disk Format) corresponds as management information for managing the entire file or the entire unit 1290. In the unit management method according to the present embodiment, FIG. Address tables correspond. The information to be read / changed corresponds to the content (data) in the file in the existing file system, whereas the unit management method in the present embodiment corresponds to the sensor information and various status information / setting status of the (change target). Further, the unit management method according to the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and the exchange information (table) 1810 illustrated in FIG. 10B is also included in the read / change target information.

There is a great difference between the existing file system and the unit management method according to the present embodiment in the presence or absence of the function of listing all the contents in some places. That is, in the existing file system, the "file name list" is known from the file management information described above, but there is no means for easily knowing the entire file contents. Therefore, when it is necessary to grasp the contents of all the files, it is necessary to open all the files one by one and newly collect the contents, which is very troublesome. In contrast, in the unit management method according to the present embodiment, since the time-series information tracking table of FIG. 28 is provided, the contents of the entire unit 1290 can be grasped instantaneously. As described above, since the unit management method according to the present embodiment has means for independently grasping the contents of the entire unit 1290, there is an effect that management / control / information collection of all the units 1290 in the system α_1132 can be performed quickly and easily. .
Section 3.3 Specific Unit Management Examples and Display Examples In many cases, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) automatically collects and controls information from the unit 1290. However, the user may want to manually control the specific unit 1290 or collect information from the specific unit 1290. In this case, a management screen display example of the unit 1290 displayed on the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 2 will be described below. In the following, a description will be given as an example of a display screen, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a similar method may be used as a management method for each unit 1290 by the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128).

  As described in section 3.1, the feature of the present embodiment lies in the point that “only one drive, folder, or directory is assigned to one system α_1132”. The situation is shown in FIG. 21A. By providing various units 1290 in the system α_1132 with various hierarchical structures (a hierarchical structure as a folder or a hierarchical structure as a directory structure), management is facilitated.

  FIG. 21A (a) shows an example in which the contents of the unit 1290 are hierarchized (folder / directory division), and FIG. 21 (b) is hierarchized (folder / directory division) for each section 1142 divided in the same system α_1132. ). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be appropriately hierarchized (folder / directory division) according to the convenience of the user.

  Here, FIGS. 21B to 21D show display / management examples at the time of moving to a lower layer according to the hierarchy (folder / directory division) of FIG. 21A (a). In the display / management example of FIG. 21A (a), the list data folder 2610 and the unit 1290 in which the address table of FIG. 23, the estimation / judgment matching table of FIG. Folders for each of the above modes are arranged in the “T drive” corresponding to the unit management pseudo drive. As already described in Section 1.2 with reference to FIG. 3A, the unit 1290 includes “device 1250 alone”, “combined module 1295 alone”, “mixed form of both”, and “others”. In addition, in FIG. 21A (a), a device corresponding folder 2612 and a composite module corresponding folder 2614 are arranged.

  Next, FIG. 21B shows an example of display contents (internal structure) in the composite module correspondence folder 2614 among them. As already described in section 1.3, the forms of the composite module 1295 include a sensor / communication module 1460, a drive / communication module 1470, a processor / communication module 1465, a memory / communication module 1475, and a display / communication module 1478. Permissible. Accordingly, in FIG. 21B, a folder 2622 corresponding to the sensor / communication module, a folder 2624 corresponding to the drive / communication module, a folder 2626 corresponding to the processor / communication module, a folder 2628 corresponding to the memory / communication module, and a folder 2630 corresponding to the other function / communication module are correspondingly provided. Deployed and managed accordingly.

  FIG. 21C shows an example of display contents (internal structure) in the sensor / communication module correspondence folder 2622 therein. As already described in section 2.5, there are two types of sensor information detected and acquired by the sensor / communication module 1460, that is, binary information and multi-valued information. Accordingly, in FIG. 21C, a binary data corresponding folder 2634 and a multi-value data corresponding folder 2638 are arranged and managed accordingly.

Finally, FIG. 21D (a) shows that all the sensors / communication modules 1460 belonging to the binary data correspondence folder 2634 are arranged as pseudo files. Such display / management has an effect that management / control / information collection can be performed by one unit 1290 in a very simple manner. Then, the sensor information content detected / acquired by the sensor / communication module 2_1460-2 can be displayed to the user as shown in FIG. 21D (b) by, for example, clicking to open a conventional file. When the driver / communication module 1470 is opened at this point, the current setting status is displayed. Then, another numerical value is pasted (inserted) into the display area of FIG. 21D (b) relating to the unit 1290 capable of controlling (changing the setting state) such as the drive / communication module 1470, thereby easily controlling (changing the setting state). ) Can be performed. By adopting such a display method and a management method, there is an effect that the control (setting state change) process for the specific unit 1290 by the user can be performed very easily and quickly.
Chapter 4 Section Overview in System of First Embodiment In this fourth chapter, the basic concept of “section” in the system of the present embodiment will be described first. Then, a method of collecting information and a method of providing a service using the concept of the section will be described. Finally, a description will be given of a method of detecting the position of the transmitting node using radio waves emitted from the transmitting node and services using the method.
Section 4.1 Positioning of Sections in the System of the Embodiment The “section” in the system of the embodiment is “a unit related to integration or management of information collected in the system” and “service provision in the system. Unit). Therefore, the unit corresponding to the above section may be used for both the purpose of integrating / managing the collected information and the purpose of providing the service. When both purposes are used in this way, a service may be provided to the user in cooperation with the integrated / managed result of the collected information (or based on the integrated / managed result of the information).

  In addition, the above-mentioned unit may mean a group related to functions related to information collection and service provision in the same system. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another form of the above-described unit, it may mean a predetermined spatial association within the same system. Then, as specific contents of the group on the spatial relation, a group on a predetermined continuous space in the same system may correspond. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific set of a group of continuous spaces distributed in a discrete manner (stepping stone state) may be made to correspond to specific contents of the group in the spatial relation. In this case, in the same system α_1132, the dispersion distribution states between the different sections 1 — 1122-1 and 2 — 1122-2 may be mixed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 1, the same system α_1132 is composed of one or more sections. Therefore, the entire system α_1132 may be spatially completely overlapped with one section 1 — 1122-1, or may be divided into a plurality of sections 1 — 1122-1 to m — 1122-m. Also, the invention is not limited thereto, and a part between a plurality of different sections 1 — 1122-1 to m — 1122-m may spatially overlap with each other.

  First, the positioning of the section will be described using an example shown in FIG. FIG. 25 shows a situation in which one building is divided into two rooms. Then, spatial units called section 1_1122-1 (left room) and section 2_1122-2 (right room) are allocated to each room. Here, as shown in FIG. 25A, the lighting equipment is turned on in the left room (in section 1_1122-1), and the lighting equipment is turned off in the right room (in section 2_1122-2) (light off state). ) Consider the state. Then, a plurality of optical sensors (a sensor module 1260 having a light detection function may be incorporated in the device 1250 (FIG. 1) or a sensor / communication module 1460 may be configured as shown in FIG. 8B) may be provided in both sections 1_1122. Suppose that it is located within -1,2_1122-2. Then, when the sensor information obtained from the optical sensors arranged in the section 1_1122-1 is integrated / managed (by the system controller α_1126), large light amount detection information can be obtained from all the sensor information. On the other hand, only small light amount detection information can be obtained from all the optical sensors arranged in the section 2_1122-2. Thus, the commonality appears in the sensor information obtained from the sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2. The major feature of the system of the present embodiment lies in that various sensor information obtained for each of the sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2 is integrated or managed to estimate / determine a state in each section 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2. . Then, in estimating / determining the state in the same section 1122, the effect of improving the accuracy of the estimation / determination is obtained by using a result of integrating or managing a plurality of pieces of information collected from this section 1122.

  Next, let us consider a case where only an air conditioner installed in the section 1_1122-1 is operated and air-conditioned as shown in FIG. 25B under a very cold outside air environment. In this case, since the air conditioning does not work in the section 2_1122-2, the “warmth service” is not provided to the user in the room on the right side. However, no matter where in the room on the left, the user is provided with a "warmth providing service". As described above, the same service can be commonly provided in the same section 1122 in many cases. As described above, in the system of the present embodiment, “control of service provision for each section 1122” for the user has an effect of facilitating service management for the user in the same system α_1132. Further, by performing the service in units of sections 1 to m_11142-1 to m in comparison with the service provided by the entire system α_1132, a fine-grained service can be provided to the user, and there is an effect that the satisfaction of the end user can be improved.

Here, an example of “room” is used as an explanation of the section. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and any spatial unit that matches the above definition may correspond to the section.
In the system according to the present embodiment, the system controller α_1126 that controls, manages, and collects information on network communication in the network system α_1132 may classify the inside of the system α_1132 into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Here, as described above, the system controller α_1126 automatically detects the “simultaneously darkened range”, the “simultaneously brightened range”, or the “simultaneously increased or decreased temperature” range and the like, and thereby automatically. Section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m can be classified. In addition to the above, the classification may be performed on the basis of a photographing result by a camera or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sections may be classified into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m by direct designation by the user.
Section 4.2 Method of Managing Placement Locations of Various Modules and Various Devices in Section As described in the examples of sections 4.1 to 4.3, system controller α_1126 collects information in corresponding system α_1132. In order to estimate / determine the state of each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, each unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is arranged in each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. It is necessary to know in advance whether or not. In order to make this possible, section 1_11422-1 to m_1142-m information arranged for each of one or more units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) existing in the same system α_1132 is managed. There is a big feature where you do. And another expression for this feature is as follows. That is, a plurality of units 1290 (FIG. 2) having a function (communication module 1660 of FIG. 4A is responsible) for communicating information obtained by independently acquiring or creating (corresponding to the function of other function module 1440 in FIG. 4A) And a system controller α_1126 (FIG. 1) for acquiring and managing the information from the plurality of units 1290. The system controller α_1126 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_11142-m for each unit 1290 and managed. The system controller α_1126 holds information on the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs.

  On the other hand, when the above features are viewed from the viewpoint of the system α_1132 (client system), the features of the client system can be expressed as follows. That is, this client system (system α_1132) is connectable to an external cloud (server n_1116-n), and has a system controller α_1126 for managing information and a function of acquiring or creating and transmitting information to be provided to the system controller α_1126. And the system controller α_1126 manages the unit 1290 by dividing the unit 1290 into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and holds information on the section to which each unit 1290 belongs.

Here, an address table in FIG. 23 described later corresponds to the information on the section belonging to each unit 1290 described above.
Therefore, in this section 4.2, a description will be given mainly of a management method for realizing the above-mentioned features. In the following description, a system model in which the system controller α_1126 installed in the system α_1132 shown in FIGS. 2 and 8A / B performs management and operation or control in the network communication system α_1132 will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the system controller β_1128 or the server n_1116-n installed outside the system α_1132 in FIG. Alternatively, it may be adapted to a system model for controlling. In this case, the part of the system controller α_1126 in the following description may be replaced with the system controller β_1128 or the server n_1116-n.

  In order to manage the units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, an address table in FIG. Recorded in advance in the unit 1232 (and in the system controller β_1128 in FIG. 1). Here, the example described in the address table of FIG. 23 is that the sensors / communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-1 and drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-1 of FIG. 8B and the devices 1250-1 to 1250-3 of FIG. This shows an example of a mixed arrangement. However, in the system of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of sensor modules 1260-1 and 260 can be incorporated in one device 1250-1. Then, different types of sensor information are obtained from the respective sensor modules 1260-1 and 1260-2. Therefore, in order to collect various kinds of information and estimate / determine the state of each section 1142, instead of managing the installation locations of the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1 to 3 by the address table, they are built in the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1. It is desirable to manage the information of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m where the individual sensor modules 1260-1 to 1260-5 and the individual drive modules 1270-1 are installed.

  In the example described in the address table of FIG. 23, the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1, the drive / communication module 1470-2, and the sensor / communication module 1460-5 are arranged in a horizontal row related to “section information”. Section locations are listed together. From this, it can be seen that the sensor module 1260-1 is located in section 2_1142-2. In the system of the present embodiment, through the creation and maintenance of the address table, the management of the various composite modules 1460 and 1470, the sensor modules 1260, and the drive modules 1270 arranged for each section 1142 is performed in real time. However, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to the above method, and a management method of any arrangement location that can be managed by the system controller α_1126 may be performed.

  However, the system of this embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of different systems (client systems) can coexist simultaneously. The following content can be specified as a newly generated feature by combining the result in consideration of the feature and the content described in FIG. 2 with the above-described address table (FIG. 23). That is, the client system (system α_1132) is connectable to an external cloud (server n_1116-n), and has a unit 1290 having a function of communicating information obtained or created independently (taken by the communication module 1660 of FIG. 4A); A composite client system (corresponding to domain 2_1122-2 in FIG. 1) including a plurality of client systems α_1132 (a plurality of client systems α_1126 and β_1134) including a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290. The information independently acquired or created can be transmitted to the system controller α_1126, and the client included in the composite client system (domain 2_1122-2) can be transmitted. The system controller α_1126 that manages the ant system α_1132 manages the plurality of units 1295-1 to -7-7 by dividing them into sections (section 1_1142-1, section 2_1142-1, and section m_1142-m in FIG. 2). 23 has the feature of retaining information (address table in FIG. 23) relating to the section to which.

  Next, a method for creating the address table and a maintenance method are shown in FIG. First, as the first Step 101, the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in the same system_1132 are defined. Here, the system of the present embodiment is characterized in that a section definition (Step 101) is first performed, and arrangement information setting or management of arrangement information for each section 1142 (Step 102 or Step 103) is performed based on the section definition (Step 101). By managing the locations of various modules and various devices in accordance with the section division state defined first as described above, there is an effect that the state estimation and determination for each section in real time become easy. In addition to this, another effect that it is easy to manage the arrangement locations of various modules and various devices is produced.

  In particular, as described later in Section 5.2.3, in the social infrastructure field, there can be a plurality of different section definition methods within the same area. That is, in the example of FIG. 35, instead of setting each section 1142 for each address of the address on the map, a method of dividing the section 1142 along the pipe of the water pipe or the section 1142 along the wiring route of the distribution power line. There can be multiple definition methods, such as a division method. Therefore, in the social infrastructure field, it is desirable to uniquely define the method of dividing the section 1142 for each purpose of use based on some reference information such as map information.

  On the other hand, in the consumer field, the section definition may be automatically performed according to the user's definition such as “room allocation within one house (one house)” as a definition method of the section 1142. For example, as shown in FIG. 24, a user takes a picture of a house with a video camera having a GPS (Global Positioning System) function (or a smartphone, a tablet, or a mobile phone with a built-in camera) and automatically analyzes the photographed image. Such a definition of the section 1142 can be automatically performed. In the above example, the method of defining the section 1142 is specified by the user. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, “the section 1142 division is defined by room allocation” may be defined in advance by default. By setting the defaults in this manner, there is an effect that the burden on the user at the stage of Step 101 can be reduced. Alternatively, after the section is automatically divided according to the default section division method, the user may partially modify the section division method using the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A. As another method, the center position information of each room may be input by the above-mentioned GPS function, the input result may be analyzed, and the section definition may be automatically performed. In the present embodiment, the physical spatial position information of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be obtained by any method other than the above method. For example, the above-described method requires some user's manpower for this section definition. However, the physical spatial position information of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be obtained without any human intervention. As an example of the specific method, the room allocation and the position information of each room may be measured while cleaning the room (section 1142) in a predetermined house with a camera and a robot cleaner having a built-in GPS function. By using this method, there is an effect that the physical spatial position information of the sections 1_1142-1 to 1_1142-m can be obtained very easily without imposing any burden on the user.

  As another application example of the present embodiment, the section is automatically defined using information obtained from various units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) without first defining a section (Step 101). You may define it. That is, at least a part of the various composite modules 1460 and 1470 and the various devices 1250 arranged in the system α_1132 are activated first, and after the activation, the section 1142 is divided. As a result, the section definition (Step 101) in the same system is not conscious of the user, so that there is an effect that the psychological burden on the user can be reduced. The specific contents of the above method will be described below. As will be described later, the system controller α_1126 can grasp the arrangement information of the various composite modules 1460 and 1470 and the various devices 1250 in real time by the initial setting (Step 102) and the automatic tracking of the movement position (Step 103). Also, as described in section 4.1 with reference to FIG. 25A, when the user acts to change the state in the section 2_1142-2, synchronization is performed from the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and the device 1250 arranged therein. As a result, state change related information is obtained. Therefore, by observing the synchronism with respect to changes in information (such as sense information and state setting control information) obtained from the units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and devices 1250) arranged in the system α_1132, various composite modules can be obtained. The relevance of the locations 1460, 1470 and the various devices 1250 can be expected. By repeating this synchronization detection a plurality of times with the passage of time, the positional relationship of the units 1290 (combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and devices 1250) arranged in the same section 1142 can be accurately estimated / determined. Then, the system controller α_1126 writes the estimation / judgment result in the section information column in the address table of FIG.

  Next, an initial setting method (Check-in method) of various units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) corresponding to Step 102 in FIG. 22 will be described. In the internal structure of the sensor / communication module 1460 shown in FIG. 5, for example, a near-field communication module 1560 that supports near-field wireless communication such as TransferJet of short-range wireless transfer technology and FeliCa (a coined word combining Felicity and Card) of noncontact IC card standard May be built in. Although not shown, a similar near-field communication module 1560 may be incorporated in the drive / communication module 1670 or the device 1250. Then, at the time of initial setting in the system α_1132 when the composite module 1460 or 1470 or the device 1250 in one example of the system of the present embodiment is newly installed, a portable external device (GPS) with a built-in GPS (Global Positioning System) function is set. (Not shown) to communicate with the near-field communication module 1560. Here, this portable external device, together with the near-field communication module 1560 for near-field wireless communication, communicates with the system controller α_1126 via a network line 1782 in the same system (see the description of section 2.1 using FIG. 10A). A communication module 1202 capable of performing information communication between them is also provided. At the time of this initial setting, the system controller α_1126 receives the new (initial setting target) composite module 1460, 1470 or the IP address information IPADRS of the device 1250 (for details, see the description in section 2.4 using FIG. 13). Register automatically. In this near-field communication, the system controller α_1126 sends (1) the newly registered IP address information IPADRS to the new combined module 1460, 1470 or the device 1250, (2) the IP address information IPADRS of the system controller α_1126 side, 3) PAN-specific identification information PANID of the place where the current portable external device exists (see the explanation in section 2.3 using FIG. 12A); and (4) PAN corresponding to the place where the system controller α_1126 is installed. The unique identification information PANID and (5) each information of the IEEE extension address EXADRS owned by the system controller α_1126 are transmitted. Further, using this near-field communication, the information of the IEEE extended address EXADRS owned by itself is transmitted from the new (initial setting target) combined module 1460, 1470 or device 1250 to the system controller α_1126 (6). . By exchanging information between the two using means such as near-field communication at the stage of initial setting (Step 102), preparation for information communication using the network line 1782 in the same system is completed. Here, as an example of the information exchange method at the time of the initial setting, the method using the near-field communication has been described. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and information exchange at the time of initial setting may be performed by other means. Alternatively, as will be described later as an initial setting method by another method, temporary address exchange may be performed by first performing temporary communication on the network line 1782 in the same system using the temporary address. Therefore, instead of performing such near-field communication, the portable external device with the GPS function described above may be simply approached. At this time, the system controller α_1126 automatically recognizes the GPS position information obtained from the portable external device as the location information of the corresponding unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250). On the other hand, the system controller α_1126 compares the above-described GPS information with the GPS range information for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m obtained in advance in the section definition of Step 101. Then, based on the comparison result, it is automatically estimated / determined in which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m the newly arranged unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is arranged. The result is registered in a corresponding portion in the address table of FIG. The result is displayed on the user I / F section 1234 of FIG. 8A and notified to the user, and the correctness is checked by the user and the user is corrected and registered as necessary.

  In the above embodiment, a user operation is required for the initial setting (Step 102) of the unit 1290 (the device 1250 or the composite module 1295). However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the initial setting (Step 102) may be automatically performed. An example of the specific implementation will be described. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the user moves the location of the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) on the way, and the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) as shown in Step 103. Automatic tracking is possible. Here, a method described later in section 4.4 is used for this automatic tracking. Therefore, at the time of initialization, the system controller α_1126 monitors the position of the unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be initialized using the automatic tracking technique. Then, the obtained arrangement location information is compared with the above-described GPS range information for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and the unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be newly set corresponds. The section 1142 to be executed is automatically estimated / determined and registered in a corresponding location in the address table of FIG.

  When the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be initialized initially performs provisional communication on the same system network line 1782 for the first time, the unit shown in FIG. 13) PAN-specific identification information SPANID on the transmitting side, β) PAN-specific identification information DPANID on the receiving side, γ) IEEE extended address DEXADRS on the receiving side, and (2) in FIG. .4) δ) Sender IP address information SIPADRS, ε) Blank each information storage area of receiver IP address information DIPADRS, or set a default determined in the Z-format (see section 2.1). A value may be stored. When the initial provisional communication is received from the unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be initialized as described above, the system control α_1126 uses the default value (or blank state) to transmit the initial value. Information communication with the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be set can be started. Then, among the communication information transmitted from the system control α_1126, the above-mentioned α) identification information SPANID unique to the PAN on the initialization target side and δ) IP address information SIPADRS on the initialization target side are described in the communication middleware data. It may be stored in the APLDT storage area (see the explanation in section 2.2 using FIG. 11) and transmitted. Even in this case, since it is known that the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be initialized is located in the system α_1132, there is a risk that the unit 1290 is mistakenly initialized in another domain 1122. There is no sex. In the above method, since the user is not involved in the initial setting, there is an effect that the initial setting operation can be automatically performed without imposing a burden on the user.

  As described above, there is a great feature of the present embodiment in the point of “detecting the position of the initial setting object at the time of initial setting”. This makes it possible to confirm that the object to be initialized is located in the corresponding system α_1132 in the system controller α_1126 and in the domain 2 — 1122-2 associated therewith. There is an effect that there is no risk of initial setting (registering). Further, since the initial setting method requires no user's labor, not only can the user's mental burden be reduced, but also there is an effect that the reliability of the initial setting process is improved because human errors can be prevented. Further, in the present embodiment, the following feature is provided in that "the section belonging state of the initial setting object is also defined at the time of initial setting". As a result, even immediately after the initial setting, there is an effect that the service can be provided in section units utilizing the initial setting object.

  Here, the process of making the newly purchased unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) usable in the domain 2_1122-2 is defined as “initial setting”, and especially “Check-in”. You may call it. On the other hand, after the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) after the initial setting once goes out of the domain 2_1142-2, it reenters the same domain 2_1142-2 again, and in the system α_1132 or the system β_1134. The process of restoring to a state in which network communication is possible may be defined as “plug-in”.

  The unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be plugged in belongs to the same domain 2_1122-2 as “δ) the plug-in side IP address information SIPADRS” set in advance. Knows the information of “ε) IP address information DIPADRS set in the other system controller regarding any one of the system controllers α_1126 or β_1128 to be executed. Therefore, as described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10A, as long as the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is used for network communication, this plugged-in unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) ) Can be used in principle anywhere in the world.

  Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be plugged in is located in the physical area defined by any of the systems α_1132 and β_1134 belonging to the same domain 2_11122-2. Automatic plug-in processing may be performed depending on whether or not the plug-in processing has been performed. Specifically, the systems α_1132 and β_1134 check the location of the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be plugged in in the same manner as the above-described initial setting. That is, the system controllers α_1132 and β_1134 always monitor the information communication status on the network line 1782 (refer to the description of FIG. 10A and FIG. 16, section 2.1) in the same system, and are registered in the address table of FIG. The information communication from any unit other than the unit 1290 (the device 1250 (the sensor module 1260 and the drive module 1270 therein) and the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) does not always occur. When information communication from a unit other than the unit 1290 (the device 1250 (the sensor module 1260 or the driving module 1270 therein) or the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) registered in the address table of FIG. Check the contents of the address information SIPADRS. Then, if the contents of the IP address information SIPADRS on the transmitting side are information used in the systems α_1132 and β_1134 in the past, plug-in processing is started. If it is other information, the initialization process is started. That is, the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 always manage the arrangement locations of the units 1290 (the devices 1250 (the sensor module 1260 and the drive module 1270 therein) and the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) in the systems α_1132 and β_1134. Then, it is automatically detected that the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be plugged in enters the physical area defined by any of the systems α_1132 and β_1134 belonging to the same domain 2_11122-2, Perform plug-in processing automatically. During the plug-in processing, the user may confirm whether the plug-in is available or not using the user I / F unit 1234. Then, in the final stage of the plug-in processing, information related to the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) that has performed the plug-in is additionally written in the address table of FIG. As described above, since the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 automatically start the plug-in process according to the position of the plug-in target, no manual operation by the user is required. As a result, there is an effect that the “plug-in” processing can be executed very easily without imposing a burden on the user.

  When the plug-in process described above is viewed from the viewpoint of the system α_1126 (client system) described in Chapter 1, the following features can be exhibited. That is, the client system (system α_1126) in the system of the present embodiment includes a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating and communicating information and a system controller α_1126 for acquiring and managing the information from the unit, and the system controller α_1126. Manages each of the plurality of units 1290 by dividing them into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and holds information (address table in FIG. 23) on the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs. It holds information about the unit (FIG. 21D), and information about the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs (address table in FIG. 23). When registering a new unit different from the already registered unit 1290, (1) the new unit requiring new registration is already registered in the above-mentioned information (the address table in FIG. 23). (2) It is confirmed that the new unit is not registered in the above information (address table in FIG. 23), and (3) In the above information (address table in FIG. 23). The new unit is registered in (4) which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m the new unit belongs to, and (5) the new unit is registered in the above-mentioned information (the address table in FIG. 23). It is characterized in that information about the section to which the unit belongs is given.

  In particular, as the address table, information on the first section regarding the plurality of units 1290 (ie, information on the unit 1290 belonging to the first section) and information on the second section (ie, the unit 1290 belonging to the second section) Information).

Further, the following feature is also provided in a place where the information is recorded as time-series information with respect to the address table.
As described above, the feature of the present embodiment is that the present embodiment is particularly capable of performing “plug-in by detecting the position of an object”. Further, there is the following feature in the place where “the section belonging state of the object is defined at the time of plug-in”. And the effect by those characteristics coincides with the effect at the time of the above-mentioned initial setting.

  Also, whether or not plug-in processing corresponding to the present embodiment has been performed is managed by the above-mentioned system controller α_1126 (stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 2) (FIG. 23). The determination can be easily made by deciphering the description change in the parentheses.

  As another confirmation method, when a unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be newly registered is moved from outside the system α_1132 to the inside, transmission from this unit 1290 to be newly registered is performed. A change in the content of the communication information to be performed may be checked. That is, for example, first, the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is arranged in another domain 1_1122-1. Then, the receiving side IP address information DIPADRS (FIG. 13 (b) /2.4) in the communication information transmitted from the new registration target unit 1290 arranged in the domain 1_1122-1 is received by the reception corresponding to the system α_1132. An address different from the side IP address information DIPADRS is stored. Similarly, information different from that of the system α_1132 is also stored in the receiving address (sections of FIG. 10A & FIG. 16 & FIG. 11 / 2.2) set in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06. Thereafter, the newly registered unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is moved into the system α_1132, and the corresponding address after the plug-in processing is completed is confirmed. After the plug-in process is completed, the receiving side IP address information DIPADRS in the communication information transmitted from the new registration target unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is the system α_1132 (or the system in FIG. 9). System controller β_1128). Also, the receiving side address set in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 (for example, the identification information DPANID unique to the receiving side and the IEEE extension address DEXADRS on the receiving side in FIG. , The system α_1132 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system of FIG. 9).

  For reference, a change in address information in the communication information during the plug-in process will be described below. First, the description starts immediately after the location of the new registration target unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) that has been network-connected in another domain 1_1122-1 has been moved. If the new registration target unit 1290 is the device 1250-1, since the GPS function is mounted in the new registration target unit 1290, the device 1250 itself can recognize the movement of the location. If there is any experience (before the current plug-in processing) that the device is arranged in the system α_1132, the IP address information IPADRS of the system controller α and the media access are stored in the memory unit 1242 inside the corresponding device 1250-1. The addresses set in the layers MAC02 and MAC06 are stored. Accordingly, the corresponding device 1250-1 uses this information to perform information communication with the system controller α. In the following, when the transmitting-side IP address information SIPADRS and the receiving-side IP address information DIPADRS described in FIG. 13B are collectively referred to, they are simply expressed as IP address information IPADRS. Similarly, when the IEEE extension address DEXADRS on the reception side and the IEEE extension address SEXADRS on the transmission side shown in FIG. 12A (e) are collectively referred to, they are described as the IEEE extension address EXADRS.

  On the other hand, if the corresponding device 1250-1 has no experience of having been previously arranged in the system α_1132, the corresponding device 1250-1 may be in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 such as the sender-side IP address information SIPADRS and the IEEE extension address SEXADRS on the sender side. The address area to be set is blanked, or predetermined dummy information is stored and information is communicated in the system α_1132 to prompt the system controller α_ to perform an initial setting process (Step 102 in FIG. 22).

  When the new registration target unit 1290 is a combination module 1295, 1460, 1470, the unit does not basically have a GPS function. Therefore, the new registration target unit 1290 (combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470) in this case does not know that the location has been moved. Therefore, the new registration target unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) transmits the same communication information in the system α_1132 even after the placement place is moved, as in the case where the unit is placed in another domain 1_1122-1.

  The system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) constantly monitors communication information in the system α_1132. Therefore, in the physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11 (f)) communicated on the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A, FIG. 16) in the same system, a media access layer such as unexpected IP address information IPADRS and IEEE extended address EXADRS is included. When it is found that the address information set in the MAC02 and the MAC06 is stored, the location of the transmission source of the corresponding physical layer frame PPDU is determined by a method described later in Section 4.4 (and FIGS. 31 to 34). Confirm. If the location of the target transmission source is within the area of step α_1126 (based on the section definition result of Step 101 in FIG. 22), the initialization processing (Step 102) or the plug-in processing is started.

  Both the initialization and the plug-in process use the address of the transmission side (such as the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmission side) set in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 and stored in the physical layer frame PPDU. Then, information communication (transmission) is performed from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the new registration target unit 1290 (combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470). By receiving this information, the new registration target unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470) on the receiving side sends the IP address IPADRS of the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) and the addresses (, At the time of initial setting, the IP address (IPADRS) set on the receiving side is known.

  Then, as the next step, the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) to be newly registered (initial setting / plug-in target) uses the above-mentioned received information to make the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128). As a result, the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) to be initialized / plugged in can confirm that correct address information has been obtained. Then, the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) checks the contents described in the communication information transmitted from the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) to be newly registered (initial setting / plug-in target). After confirming that the initial setting or plug-in processing has been correctly performed, normal registration processing in the address table of FIG. 23 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described in Section 1.8 with reference to FIG. 8B, the composite module 1295 such as the sensor / communication module 1460-5 can exist alone. Alternatively, it may exist in a form inserted or mixed in a specific product or component. Therefore, the user can carry the composite module 1295 while carrying it. Therefore, the specific composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 (or device 1250) carried by the user can also move between different sections 1142 after the initial setting. That is, the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 (or device 1250) that can be moved together with the user in a form that exists alone or that is inserted or mixed in a product or component is moved to a moving position as shown in Step 103 in FIG. Are automatically tracked, and the section to which the existing location after the movement belongs can be repeatedly determined as shown in Step 104 of FIG. Then, by collecting sense information and status information from the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and the device 1250 for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m based on the latest arrangement information and providing the service to the user (Step 105), the section is obtained. The effect of improving the state grasping accuracy for each of 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m is improved, and the user satisfaction is improved.

  Next, a detailed description will be given of a method of automatically tracking the movement position of the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) described in Step 103 of FIG. In this step 103, as will be described later in section 4.4, a technology of detecting the position of the transmission source of the radio wave transmitted from the target unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) may be used. . That is, when wireless is used as a physical medium (communication medium) of the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A or FIG. 16) in the system α_1132, the unit 1290 (the device 1250 or the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is used. ) To transmit information to the system controller α_1126. Then, the communication information is analyzed in the system controller α_1126 (for example, as described later, the sender IP address information in FIG. 13B and the IEEE extension address SEXADRS in the sender are extracted and refer to the address table in FIG. 23). Thus, it is possible to determine in real time which unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) in the system α_1132 is transmitting a radio wave for each physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11). At the same time, if the technology of detecting the position of the transmission source of the radio wave described later in section 4.4 is used, the physical position information of the transmission source of the radio wave can be obtained in real time for each physical layer frame PPDU. When the information of both is compared for each physical layer frame PPDU in this way, physical position information for each unit 1290 (for each device 1250 or for each of the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is found.

  In this way, each time the system controller α_1126 receives the physical layer frame PPDU, the individual unit 1290 (the device 1250 or the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) belongs (in the same manner as the initial setting described above). Section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m). Then, the result of the determination is sequentially compared with the contents described in the address table of FIG. If there is no difference in the comparison result, it is considered that “the corresponding device 1250 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 have not moved beyond the section 1142”, and the address table is not rewritten. On the other hand, if a difference is found in the comparison result, the address table may be rewritten assuming that the specific device 1250 or the specific composite modules 1460 and 1470 have moved beyond the section 1142, and the process may proceed to the next Step 104. As described above, the present embodiment has a great feature in that “own information (such as an address table) related to the section 1142”. Then, in the movement position automatic tracking step (Step 103) of the unit 1290 (device or composite module), the presence or absence of movement beyond the section 1142 is determined using the information related to the section 1142. In Step 103, the arrangement location management for each unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is performed for each section 1142, so that, for example, the unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is in the same section 1142. Even if it moves slightly, it is regarded that "they have not moved beyond the section 1142" and the predetermined processing such as rewriting of the address table is not performed. This has the effect of enabling efficient information collection and service provision to the user. In order to explain this effect, a comparison is made with a method of sequentially feeding back a slight movement of the unit 1290 (equipment or composite module). For example, when a user wears a specific portable composite module, the user frequently has an opportunity to move within the same section 1142. If the feedback processing is performed every time the user moves a little (such as updating the address table or moving to the next Step 104), the processing in the system controller α_1126 becomes very complicated. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 25A in section 4.1, even if the unit 1290 (device or composite module) slightly moves in the same section 1142, the obtained sensor information content changes. Often not. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 25B, a service is often provided to a user in units of sections 1142. Therefore, even if feedback is performed every time the user moves slightly, the efficiency of improving the quality of service provided to the user does not increase much.

  As a result of the automatic tracking of the movement position of the unit 1290 (device or composite module) by Step 103 in FIG. 22, if a unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) has moved beyond the section 1142, Proceed to the next Step 104. Therefore, when there is no movement beyond the section 1142, the process may skip this Step 104 and proceed to Step 105. Here, the specific “process for determining the section to which the existing position of the unit 1290 (device or composite module) to which the placement location has moved” in Step 104 belongs is a process of correcting the address table and a section performed in the system controller α_1126. 1_11142-1 to m_1142-m means a process of rearranging units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged.

  Here, when modifying the address table, only the change within the predetermined frame (within the cell) is performed, and the rearrangement is not performed in units of vertical columns. The address table is copied to a temporary storage area in the processor 1230 of the system controller α_1126 to increase the efficiency of state management and sensor information collection in units of section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Units 1290 (devices 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged for each m are rearranged (rearranged in units of vertical columns).

  In Step 105 in FIG. 22, “collection of sensor / state information from target unit 1290 (device or composite module) or provision of service to user” is performed for each of sections 1 — 1142-1 to m — 1142-m. As the specific contents, the method described in section 4.2 using FIGS. 26A to 30 is used.

Thereafter, the movement position of the unit 1290 (device or composite module) is automatically tracked as appropriate (Step 103), and the above series of processing is repeated.
In the system of the present embodiment, “plug-out” processing may be automatically performed on a specific unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or combined modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) by using automatic tracking of the movement position. That is, if a unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) that is out of the physical area range of each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m defined in Step 101 is found, the corresponding network communication The relevant item (entire corresponding vertical column) is provisionally deleted from the address table, assuming that it has become “out of management target of the system α_1132”. However, the information of the IP address IPADRS and the IEEE extension address EXADRS of the temporarily deleted unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is stored in the memory unit 1232 so as to flexibly cope with future “re-plug-in” processing. (In the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A). Here, immediately before performing the “plug-out” process, a display may be made on the user I / F unit 1234 (in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A) to inquire the user whether plug-out is possible.

  The features of the above plug-out processing will be described below from the viewpoint of the system α_1132 (client system). That is, the client system according to the present embodiment includes a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating and communicating information and a system controller α_1126 for acquiring and managing the information from the unit 1290. Of the section 1_11142-1 to m_1142-m, and holds information (address table in FIG. 23) on the section to which each unit belongs, and holds information on the unit (D in FIG. 21D). I do. If the information cannot be reacquired from the unit, the system controller α_1126 temporarily removes the information (address table in FIG. 23) regarding the section to which each unit belongs from being managed.

  On the other hand, in the above-described re-plug-in process, if the information can be re-acquired from the unit in addition to the above as a further feature of the client system, the system controller α_1126 can determine the information regarding the section to which each unit belongs. (Address table in FIG. 23).

  Regarding the plug-out processing, as for the plurality of units 1290, information relating to the first section (that is, information about the unit 1290 belonging to the first section) and information relating to the second section (that is, the second section) are used as an address table. This is characterized in that it includes information on the unit 1290 belonging to the section).

Further, the following feature is also provided in a place where the information is recorded as time-series information in the address table in connection with the plug-out processing.
Checking the communication history from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) after the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) previously arranged in the system α_1132 is moved out of the system α_1132 Thus, whether or not the “plug-out” process can be executed can be determined. That is, when the “plug-out” process is performed, after a predetermined period of time when the unit 1290 (the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or the device 1250) is moved out of the system α_1132, the unit 1290 (the composite module 1295, 1460, The communication history does not include any information communication from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the device 1470 or the device 1250).

  That is, the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) that performs management, operation, and control in the network communication system α_1132 transmits communication information on the network line 1782 in the same system in units of physical layer frames PPDU in FIG. Is being monitored. Then, when the physical layer frame PPDU is transmitted from outside the system α_1132, the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is deleted from the address table of FIG. 23 immediately after confirming with the user. And the plug-out process is completed. Once the plug-out process is completed, there is no information communication from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the corresponding unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) until the plug-in process is performed again.

  On the other hand, there is a case where the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) does not temporarily recognize that a specific unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) has moved out of the system α_1126 due to timing. . In this case, information communication is performed from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the corresponding unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250). However, in this case, no answer is sent to the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128). If no answer is received, information communication is performed again. If no answer is received twice consecutively, the corresponding portion in the address table of FIG. 23 is deleted, and the plug-out process is completed. Meanwhile, during the plug-out process, an inquiry to the user may be made via the user I / F unit 1234 (FIGS. 8A and 8B) in the system controller α_1126.

  If it takes too long to move the specific unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) out of the system α_1126 and complete the plug-out, it will be described later in section 4.3. Estimation / judgment accuracy of the system α_1132 and the action / request of the user is reduced. Here, as a delay time until service provision corresponding to the state change, a general user allows a delay of about 5 minutes or about 10 minutes. If the user is a generous user, a delay of about 15 minutes is allowed. However, if the delay exceeds one hour, most users feel dissatisfied. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the time required for moving the specific unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) out of the system α_1126 to completing the plug-out is 15 minutes or less, preferably 5 minutes or less. For the above reasons, the worst case is one hour or less.

  As described above, there is a great feature in that “the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) that is out of the physical range of the system α_1132 is plugged out”. By using the location of the unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) for plug-out determination in this way, the plug-in operation can be easily performed while maintaining high reliability without burdening the user. It has an effect. In other words, when wireless is used as a physical communication medium of the network line 1782 (FIG. 16) in the same system, the personal information protection function is erroneously mixed with the adjacent network communication line in another domain 1122. Was likely to decrease. In order to avoid the above-mentioned danger, complicated initial setting processing and plug-in / plug-out processing by the user are required. On the other hand, if the initial setting process and plug-in / plug-out process can be performed without burdening the user by using the automatically detected arrangement position information as described above, crosstalk with another adjacent network communication line can be prevented. Another advantage is that security and personal information protection functions can be guaranteed.

Heretofore, it has been described that the system controller α_1126 arranged in the system α_1132 performs a series of processes shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a system in which FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B described in Section 1.8 coexist is used. May be performed.
Section 4.3 Processing Method from Information Collection for Each Section to Service Provision In this section 4.3, specific processing contents from “Sensor / status information collection to service provision to user” related to Step 105 in FIG. Will be described. In particular, the features described in section 4.3 from the viewpoint of the system α_1132 (client system) are as follows. That is, the client system according to the present embodiment includes a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating and communicating information and a system controller α_1126 for acquiring and managing the information from the unit. The system controller α_1126 includes a plurality of units. Each section 1290 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and managed, and information about the section to which each unit belongs (address table in FIG. 23) is held. The state change information from one unit 1290 is communicated to the system controller α_1126, and control is performed on the other plurality of units 1290 in the same section 1142 based on the state change information. Further, the system controller α_1126 has another feature in that another unit in the same section is controlled by using a state change from one unit 1290 at a predetermined time.

  In addition, when the above features are viewed from the relationship with the server n_1116-n (cloud) shown in FIG. 1, the system controller α_1126 is connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-n) as a server client system. The system controller α_1126 communicates the state change from one unit 1290 to the system controller α_1126 and transmits it to the cloud (server n_1116-n). The other unit 1290 in the same section is controlled based on information from the cloud (server n_1116-n).

  In other words, the content described in section 4.3 has a great feature in that "the service is provided based on a plurality of collected information". For example, with only the collected single information, the accuracy of estimating / determining the current state or the behavior or request of the user is reduced, so that there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a service that satisfies the user. However, as described here, the accuracy of estimation / judgment is improved by using “multiple pieces of information”, so that there is an effect of improving user satisfaction with the provided service.

  On the other hand, there is also a great feature in the point that "when a service is provided, a plurality of state change controls (setting state changes) are performed in cooperation". When a plurality of state change controls (change of setting conditions) in the same system α_1132 are performed as a service providing form corresponding to a user's action or request, the user can be provided with a detailed change state, so that user satisfaction is reduced. The effect of improving is born.

  FIG. 26A shows a processing process in the system controller α_1126 from collecting various information from the system α_1132 to providing a service. Here, the process of FIG. 26A is based on the embodiment system shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 8A / B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a system controller β_1128 arranged outside the system α_1132 as shown in FIG. 9 may perform information collection / service provision. In this case, it is necessary to change the system controller α_1126 in the following description to the system controller β_1128.

  First, upon receiving a service execution request (Step 110) from the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128, the system controller α_1126 starts collecting information from the system α_1132 (Step111). Here, the information to be collected is not limited to the sensor information from the sensor / communication module 1460, but also the sensor information from the various sensor modules 1260 in the device 1250, the current setting state information in the drive / communication module 1470, the device The current setting status information for 1250 (of which mainly the driving module 1270) is included. Furthermore, as shown in Step 112, the system controller α_1126 may collect information from the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128. When a series of information collection is completed in this way, all collected information is integrated and arranged in the system controller α_1126, and necessary information is stored in the internal memory unit 1232 (Step 113).

  Then, as the next step, the state in the same system α_1132 is estimated and determined (Step 114). Further, based on the estimated / determined state, the current behavior of the user is estimated and determined (Step 115). Here, the estimation / judgment of the state of Step 114 or the estimation / judgment of the current action of the user in Step 115 is performed by estimating / determining the state of each user such as the height of the user and the color of clothes and accessories worn on the user. Judgments are also made. As an example in which the estimation / judgment of the user state affects the service provision to the user (Step 119), the sensitivity setting of the touch pad or the capacitance type button is raised. For example, a large-sized adult with a thick finger can perform stable user input even if the sensitivity of the touch pad or the capacitance type button is low. On the other hand, children and women with thin fingers may not be able to cope without increasing the sensitivity of the touch pad or the capacitance type button. Therefore, the estimation / judgment result of the user state affects the service provision to the user. In order to change the sensitivity setting of the touch pad or the capacitance type button after estimating / determining the thickness of the user's finger, the communication information described in section 2.5 is changed.

Then, based on the result of the state / judgment (Step 114) in the system α_1132 and the result of the current action estimation / judgment (Step 115) of the user, the user's future action prediction (Step 116) and the user's request estimation / prediction (Step 117) I do.
Thereafter, the series of estimation / prediction results are displayed on the user I / F unit 1234 (FIGS. 8A and 8B), and an inquiry to the user and confirmation (Step 118) are performed. If the series of estimation / prediction results are incorrect, the process is repeated from the estimation / prediction of the state in the system α_1132 in Step 114. If the content of confirmation to the user is correct, a service to the user in Step 119 is provided. Then, a series of processes up to the provision of the service to the user is repeated as appropriate. At the necessary timing, the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128 is notified of the provision of the service (Step 109).

  However, the various estimation / judgment processes executed in Steps 114 to 117 in FIG. 26A have a feature of the present embodiment in that a plurality of pieces of information collected in Step 111 or Step 112 are used. The use of multiple information has the effect of improving the accuracy of estimation / judgment, rather than the estimation / judgment using only single information. The situation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 26B.

When the state changes in the system α_1132 or when the user acts,
○ The situation in which any of the units 1290 (devices 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) move across the section 1142 and the status of various information obtained from the units 1290 (device 1250, In many cases, the content changes. Therefore, when only the section 1142 corresponding to the above is selected in the system α_1132 and the above-described series of estimation / determination processing is performed only in the section 1142, the processing efficiency in the system controller α_1126 increases. The process of finding the section 1142 in which one of the above two situations occurs corresponds to Step 120 in FIG. 26B. The operation of extracting the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged in the corresponding section 1142 corresponds to Step 121. Here, in this Step 121, the address table of FIG. 23 is used.

  Then, information is collected for a plurality of modules arranged in the same section 1142 from among the sensor module 1260, the driving module 1270, the sensor / communication module 1460, and the driving / communication module 1470 described in the address table. As a specific example, as shown in case 2 of FIG. 10B, an answer request (request) 1872 is transmitted from the system controller α_1126 to each of a plurality of target modules, and a response (response) 1874 is obtained.

  In particular, as a method of providing a service to the user shown in FIG. 26B, a state that does not conform to the estimation / determination result performed for each corresponding section 1142 is automatically extracted, and state change control or setting state change is performed on the nonconforming part. Perform instructions and perform conformance processing. An example of this service providing method is shown below. For example, when "the user turns off the lights and TV in the room where he was and tries to leave the room and goes out", the state of "the air conditioner in the room where the lights are off and the air conditioner remains operating" is automatically regarded as a non-conforming state. As an extraction and adaptation process, there is a method of “automatically controlling the operating state of the air conditioner”. What is particularly important here is that in the single information that "the user has turned off the television in the room where he has been," it is difficult to predict what the user will do in the future. However, in addition to that, by collecting a plurality of pieces of information in the same section 1142 of “turn off the room lighting”, the accuracy of the estimation / determination is improved. Further, in the present embodiment, by extracting “a state that does not conform to the result of estimation / determination” as described above, there is an effect that an efficient service can be provided to the user.

  The above-mentioned examples of “turn off the television in the room where the user has been” and “turn off the lighting of the room” by the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) and the collection of current state information (Step 122). After collecting a plurality of pieces of information in the same section 1142 (Step 122), state estimation / determination (Step 123), estimation / determination of user action (Step 125), and estimation / determination of user request (Step 127) in the corresponding section are performed. . Then, information that does not conform to each estimation / judgment result is extracted (Steps 124, 126, 128), and a state change control method (method of changing the setting state) for adapting the extracted nonconformity information to the estimation / judgment result is provided to the user. An inquiry is made (Step 129). This inquiry to the user may use the display on the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126. If the result is negative by the user, the estimation / judgment using the plurality of pieces of collected information (Steps 123, 125, and 127) is repeated.

  At the stage where the permission from the user is obtained as a result of the inquiry to the user, a command 1852 (case 1 in FIG. 10B) is given to the drive module 1270 incorporated in the device or the drive module 1270 in the drive / communication module 1470 to respond. The state change in the section 1142 is controlled (change of state setting) to provide a service to the user (Step 130).

In relation to Step 120 of FIG. 26B,
○ Information about the unit 1290 (device 1250 or compound module 1295, 1460, 1470) that moves across the section 1142, or information obtained from the unit 1290 (device 1250 or compound module 1295, 1460, 1470) and the contents of which have changed. To extract
The left side of the time-series information tracking table of FIG. 27 / FIG. 28 (b) may be used. The time-series information tracking table records the history of various information collected by the system controller α_1126 and the history of various estimations / judgments performed based on the history in the form of a list in chronological order along the elapsed time 2310. The information is added in a timely manner and stored in the memory unit 1232 of the system controller α_1126. In the description example of FIG. 27 / FIG. 28B, various sensor information obtained from various sensor modules 1260-1 and 2 in the device 1250-1 of FIG. 8A or a state set in the drive module 1270-1 (setting) Values) are all described in the form of state A or the like. The section number where the device 1250-1 is arranged is also described. On the other hand, sense information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 which is obtained as binary information of presence / absence as sense information is also described on the left side of the time-series information tracking table. The section number in which the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is arranged, which is obtained as a result of position detection by a method described later in section 4.4, is also described.

  For example, the sensor / communication module 1460-5 has a built-in light detection sensor module, and a user wearing the sensor / communication module 1460-5 has a section 5_1142-5 in which the illumination is turned off from the section 2_1142-2 with the illumination. An example will be described in the case of moving to. In this case, when the elapsed time 2310 is "t3", the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is arranged in the section 2_1142-2. The optical information detected by the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is "present". Then, when the user moves during the elapsed time 2310 from “t3” to “t4”, the moved sensor / communication module 1460-5 is arranged in the section 5_1142-5. The optical information detected at this time changes to "absence". By using the time-series information tracking table in this way, it is possible to easily move the device 1250 and the sections 1142 of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and change the collected information.

  The estimation / judgment process performed in Steps 114 to 117 of FIG. 26A and Steps 123, 125, and 127 of FIG. 26B uses the estimation / judgment collation table of FIG. 27 / FIG. 28A. First, for example, candidates of estimation / judgment results regarding the state item 2320 for each section 1142 such as “use state in a predetermined section” are set in advance as state α, state β... In the row direction. On the other hand, states that are collected as information from the device 1250-1 such as, for example, "air conditioner is operating" and "air conditioner timer setting time" are referred to as state A, state B, and so on. Are sequentially described in the column direction. Further, for example, sensor information such as sensor information detected from the sensor / communication module 1460-5 for detecting “presence / absence of light”, and a state set value indicating a current state in the drive / communication module 1470-2 are also estimated / It is described sequentially in the vertical column direction of the judgment collation table. Then, the correlation coefficient value between the two is described in the corresponding cell in the estimation / judgment collation table. As the correlation coefficient value, for example, when there is a positive correlation between the state A of “air conditioner operation is active” and the state α in the state item 2320 such as “use state in a predetermined section”, “80” is described in the corresponding cell as the correlation coefficient value. Further, a positive correlation is found between the “lights up” information in the same section 1142 obtained from the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the state α in the state item 2320 such as “use state in a predetermined section”. If there is, "57" is described in the corresponding cell as the correlation coefficient value. On the other hand, when there is a negative correlation (inverse correlation), a negative value may be described in the corresponding cell as a correlation coefficient.

  When the state is estimated / determined in the section 1142, the sum of the correlation coefficients in the same column is calculated for each of the states α, β,. The state α, β,... Having the highest total value is estimated / determined to indicate the state in the corresponding section 1142. By calculating the total value of the correlation coefficients in the same column in this way, a plurality of pieces of collected information in the same section 1142 can be used instead of only one piece of collected information. By using a plurality of pieces of collected information in this way, not only can various estimations / judgments be made, but also the effect of increasing the accuracy of the estimation / judgment is obtained.

  Similarly, the candidates of the estimation / judgment result regarding the user's action item 2440 are set in advance as the action α, the action β,... Further, the candidates of the estimation / judgment result regarding the user's request item 2360 are set in advance as a request α, a request β,. Further, each correlation coefficient value is written in the corresponding cell as described above.

Further, as the elapsed time 2310, the total value of the correlation coefficient is calculated for each column of the actions α and β and each column of the requests α and β for each of t1, t2, t3,. 27 / FIG. 28 (b).
Then, by using the above time-series information tracking table, it is possible to estimate / determine the state in the section 1142, the action and the request of the user in real time. For example, an example shown in FIG. 27 / FIG. 28B will be used to describe an example of a service providing method using this time-series information tracking table. For example, consider a case in which the user moves from the lit section 2_1142-2 to the unlit section 5_1142-5 while carrying the sensor / communication module 1460-5. In this case, since the illumination in the section 2_1142-2 is still on, the value of the state probability 2330 of the state α representing “the use state in the section” in the section 2_1142-2 is hardly changed. By comparison, the action probability 2350 of the action α corresponding to “user movement” has risen sharply from 4% to 87% between t3 and t4. As a result, it can be estimated / determined that "the user has moved between t3 and t4". Further, the request probability of the request α corresponding to the request “I want to turn on the illumination of the section 5 — 1142-5” also rises sharply from 4% to 98% between t3 and t4.

  By utilizing this time-series information tracking table, for example, a result of estimating / determining the user request shown in Step 127 of FIG. Here, as information incompatible with the user request, information that "there is no light in section 5_1114-5" is obtained from the sensor / communication module 1460-5. As a response, a service is provided to the user of Step 130. Specifically, the system controller α_1126 instructs the drive / communication module 1470-2 that performs the function of “turn on the illumination in the section 5_1114-5” from the system controller α_1126 to issue a setting state change (command issuance) 1852 (see FIG. 10B). Is issued.

  In the above, description has been given mainly of the internal state estimation / judgment for each section 1142, the user behavior estimation / judgment based on the information collected for each section 1142, and the user request estimation / judgment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, estimation and determination may be performed on the state of the entire system α_1132, or estimation / determination of user behavior and estimation / determination of user request based on information collected from the entire system α_1132. You may make a decision.

  Next, a method of providing a service to a user described in Step 119 of FIG. 26A or Step 130 of FIG. 26B will be described with reference to FIG. First, based on the extraction result of the nonconformity information performed in Steps 124, 126, and 128 in FIG. 26B, extraction of a state change control candidate in the unit 1290 (the device 1250 or the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) in the corresponding section 1142 (Step 141) is performed. Thereafter, after inquiring the user (Step 129), the setting state is sequentially changed (state change control) as shown in Step 142 to Step 143.

  Here, as an example described above, when the lighting is turned off in the section 5_1142-5 of the user destination, the air conditioner and the television may be stopped. Therefore, when the nonconformity information is extracted in Steps 124, 126, and 128 in FIG. 26B, it is necessary to change the setting state (state change control) for a plurality of items in the same section 5_1142-5. In this case, as shown in Step 142 to Step 143 in FIG. 29, the setting state is changed sequentially (state change control) for the plurality of items, or the setting state is changed (state) for some of the items at the same time. (Change control) is a significant feature. As a result, there is an effect that the time required for setting the optimum environment in the same section 5_1114-5 can be reduced.

  When the setting state is changed (state change control) sequentially or simultaneously for a plurality of items as described above, as shown in Case 1 of FIG. 10B, a plurality of units 1290 (driving / communication module) are transmitted from the same system controller α_1126. 1470 or the device 1250) is sequentially or simultaneously communicated with a plurality of commands (command issuance) 1852. Here, in each physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11F) indicating communication information corresponding to a plurality of commands (command issuance) 1852, all of the contents of the sender IP address information SIPADRS (FIG. 13B) The transmission-side address information in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (for example, the identification information SPANID unique to the transmission side on the transmission side and the contents of the IEEE extension address SEXADRS on the transmission side in FIG. Further, there may be a case where the information on the receiving side, such as the identification information DPANID unique to the PAN on the receiving side in FIG.

  Therefore, when the setting state is changed (state change control) sequentially or simultaneously with respect to a plurality of items, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9) does not perform another process in the middle and collectively. It is desirable to perform information communication corresponding to the command (command issue) 1852 corresponding to the above. By performing the information communication collectively in this way, a plurality of different pieces of communication information can be created by the above-described common information copy processing. Therefore, using the above method has an effect of improving the processing efficiency of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9).

  As already described in section 4.2, "A general user is allowed to delay up to about 5 minutes or 10 minutes as a delay time until the provision of a service corresponding to a state change, and a delay of about 15 minutes for a long-awaited user. However, if the delay exceeds one hour, most users feel dissatisfied. "Therefore, in the system of the present embodiment, when services related to a plurality of items are sequentially performed, services to be continuously provided are provided. The time difference between them is 15 minutes or less, preferably 5 minutes or less, and at most 1 hour or less. This has the effect of minimizing the stress on the user.

In the above description, the description has been given mainly on the provision of the service for each section 1142. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another embodiment, for example, the entire system α_1132 may be provided as a service.
Already in the above, the service providing method will be described with an example in which "the user has carried the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and moved from the lit section 2_1142-2 to the lit section 5_1142-5 while carrying the sensor / communication module 1460-5". Explained. In this regard, a supplementary explanation will be given on a processing method when a specific unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) moves across different sections 1142.

  In this case, as shown in Step of FIG. 30, it is necessary to extract section information before and after the movement of the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). The time-series information tracking table shown in FIG. 27 / FIG. 28B is useful for this extraction. Here, in the section row of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 27 / FIG. 28 (b), it changes from “2” to “5” between the elapsed times 2310t3 and t3. By searching for the place of change, section information before and after movement can be easily extracted. In this case, the service is often provided particularly for the sections before and after the movement. Therefore, the system according to the present embodiment is provided at a place where a specific unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) simultaneously or sequentially provides service to both of the sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1122-5 before and after the movement. There are features. As described above, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the case of the system shown in FIG. 9) centrally provides services to the sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1112-5 before and after the movement, thereby efficiently providing services to the user. I can do it. Here, a series of processing processes from Step 155 to Step 158 in FIG. 30 coincide with the processing processes in FIG. 26B. Further, as shown in Step 151 in FIG. 30, the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged in the pre-movement section 2_1122-2 is extracted. Then, through a similar processing process, a service is provided to the user in Step 2_1122-2 before movement (Step 130). As described above, the setting state may be changed (state change control) sequentially or simultaneously for a plurality of items in the pre-movement section 2_1122-2.

Also, as described above, when services are simultaneously or sequentially provided to both the preceding and following sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1122-5, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9) intervenes. It is desirable to perform information communication corresponding to the command (command issuance) 1852 corresponding to the above collectively without inserting another process. By performing the information communication collectively in this way, a plurality of different pieces of communication information can be created by the above-described common information copy processing. Therefore, using the above method has an effect of improving the processing efficiency of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9).
Section 4.4 Method for Tracking Movement Between Sections of Various Modules and Various Devices In this section 4.4, a method for detecting the position where communication module 1202 built in device 1250 or communication module 1660 built in the composite module is arranged Will be described.

  In the case where wireless is used as a physical communication medium used on the same system network line 1782 of FIG. 10A, there is a time when radio waves are emitted from the communication modules 1202 and 1660. I do. The feature of the present embodiment lies in that the timing is used to detect the position of the communication module 1202, 1660 or a device or a composite module in which the communication module 1202 or 1660 is built from the emission position of the radio wave. GPS technology is known as a conventional method for detecting the position of a device. However, as long as this technology is adopted, only GPS-related components mounted on the device become expensive. On the other hand, the above method does not require any additional components required for position detection, so that the communication modules 1202 and 1660 (or a device or a composite module in which they are built) can be reduced in cost and size. Yes.

  In addition to the above-described GPS technology for finding position information, a technology called a beacon is known. In the GPS technology, radio waves emitted from artificial satellites are used. In contrast, the above-described beacon technology uses a terrestrial radio wave used in a short-range wireless standard called Bluetooth, for example. That is, a plurality of devices for transmitting the short-range radio waves are installed at a plurality of locations on the ground, and the short-range radio waves transmitted from each device are received to calculate a relative reception location. However, even in this method, a circuit for determining the position on the receiving side is required, so that the circuit scale of the receiver increases, and the size of the receiver increases and the price increases. On the other hand, in the system of the present embodiment, since the position detection in the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) which requires the position detection is unnecessary, the price of the target composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) is reduced. And miniaturization becomes possible.

  FIG. 31 shows the principle of position detection in this embodiment. Here, the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4 each of which receives the radio wave and detects the position of the transmission source have a built-in GPS function. Therefore, the installation locations of the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4 are known in advance. Then, the emission position of the radio wave is measured using the radio wave characteristics when the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4 receive the radio wave.

  Then, the following feature exists in the point that “the reception timing (reception timing) of a radio wave is used for position detection” on the receiving side (the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4) involved in the position detection. Then, "in a network communication system in which a plurality of radio wave transmission sources exist, the transmission source is identified using the reception time (reception timing) of the radio wave". Alternatively, it may be said that "in a network communication system in which a plurality of radio wave transmission sources exist, the transmission source is identified using the communication information contents". For example, in the description example of FIG. 31, the timing at which the radio wave is emitted differs between the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the drive / communication module 1470-3. Therefore, based on the reception timing, it is possible to identify which of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the drive / communication module 1470-3 is the radio wave emitted. By using the reception timing of the radio wave for the position detection in this manner, a plurality of different positions can be detected at the same time, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the position detection is improved. On the other hand, the position detection method in the present embodiment is not limited to the above, and a signal from a beacon (based on the Bluetooth Smart standard) may be used as another method.

  A specific method of identifying a transmission source of a radio wave will be described. On the same system network line 1782, information is communicated in units of physical layer frame PPDU shown in FIG. Here, the system controller α_1126 controls or manages the system network line 1782 so that physical layer frames PPDU transmitted from a plurality of different transmission sources do not overlap at the same time.

  Also, address information indicating a transmission source is stored in the one physical layer frame PPDU. As a specific example, the sender IP address information SIPADRS of FIG. 13B described in section 2.4 can be used for sender identification. The information stored in the MAC layer header MACHD (FIG. 11 (a)) is not limited to the above. For example, the IEEE extension address SEXADRS on the transmission side in FIG. 12A (e) described in section 2.3 is used as the source identification. You may use it. Therefore, the radio wave receiving side measures the radio wave characteristics at the time of reception, and decodes the source address information described in the corresponding physical layer frame PPDU. As a result, the radio wave characteristics of each radio wave transmission source can be obtained.

  Further, there is a further feature in that "comparison of the radio wave characteristics at a plurality of locations received simultaneously to calculate the location information of the transmission source". The use of the radio wave characteristics at a plurality of locations as described above has an effect of improving the position detection accuracy. Here, as a radio wave characteristic used for detecting the position of the transmission source, there is a method of using “radio wave intensity”. That is, in the ideal state, the radio field intensity at the receiving location is inversely proportional to the square of the distance to the transmission source. Therefore, by comparing the received signal strengths of the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 1250, the relative position information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the drive / communication module 1470-3 can be estimated.

  As another radio wave characteristic used for detecting the position of the transmission source, “wave phase” may be used. That is, since the phase of the radio wave at the time of reception differs depending on the distance between the transmission source and the reception partner, this phenomenon is used for position detection. The relative position information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the drive / communication module 1470-3 can be estimated by comparing the phases of the radio waves when the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4 simultaneously receive.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and the "radiation direction of radio waves" may be used as another radio wave characteristic used for detecting the position of the transmission source. As a method of detecting the direction of travel of the radio wave, this method was implemented in a place where "the direction of travel of the radio wave is measured by comparing each detection signal obtained from multiple receivers with different detection sensitivity to the direction of travel of the radio wave". There are features of the form. Further, there is the following feature in that “position detection using trigonometry” is performed from the traveling direction of the radio wave emitted from the transmission source obtained here. The use of this embodiment has an effect that the position of the transmission source can be accurately detected with very inexpensive equipment. In addition, the radio wave characteristics used for position detection in the present embodiment are not limited to the “direction of propagation of radio waves”, and may be combined with reception intensity, reception phase, or other radio wave characteristics.

  For example, if the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250-1 in FIG. 31 can individually detect the traveling direction of the radio wave transmitted from the sensor / communication module 1460-5, the transmission source can be easily and accurately determined using “trigonometry”. Can be detected. Here, as long as the trigonometry is used, the position can be detected if there are at least two reception points of the radio wave. (1) The system controller α_1126 manages / operates / controls information communication on the system network line 1782, (2) The system controller α_1126 always analyzes information in the physical layer frame PPDU, and (3) radio wave The system controller α_1126 desirably serves as one of the above-mentioned radio wave reception points because it is more efficient that the location where the characteristic is detected and the location where the transmission source position is calculated are physically closer. Then, a general device 1250 having a built-in GPS function may be used as another radio wave receiving point, or a dedicated device for detecting a source position may be installed.

  Next, a principle method of measuring the traveling direction of a radio wave will be described with reference to FIG. As an example, the detection sensitivity of a polar antenna 2760 used for receiving terrestrial waves or the like has direction dependency of the received radio waves. For example, the Polara antenna 2760 from which the detection signal α is obtained has the highest detection sensitivity when the received radio wave comes from the direction A, and has low detection sensitivity for the received radio wave coming from the directions B and C. As described above, the polar antenna 2760 has a characteristic that “the detection sensitivity differs in the traveling direction of the radio wave”. On the other hand, the Polora antenna 2760 that can obtain the detection signal β has the highest detection sensitivity when the received radio wave comes from the direction B, and the Polora antenna 2760 that can obtain the detection signal γ detects the most when the received radio wave comes from the direction C. High sensitivity. Therefore, by receiving received radio waves arriving from an arbitrary direction at the same time by the three polar antennas 2760 and comparing the intensities of the detection signals α, β, and γ, the traveling direction of the received radio waves can be predicted in principle. . The process of estimating the traveling direction of the received radio wave corresponds to the method of “measuring the traveling direction of the radio wave by comparing each detection signal obtained from a plurality of receiving units”.

  FIG. 32A shows a direction detecting antenna structure having higher direction accuracy. This basic structure is composed of a stealth plate 2730 formed in a substantially triangular pyramid or a substantially quadrangular pyramid shape. An antenna 2710-1 is arranged in a cross shape on a side surface of the substantially triangular pyramid or the substantially quadrangular pyramid. This antenna 2710-1 is composed of a set of antennas orthogonal to each other. Here, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 32 (a), only one set of cross-shaped orthogonal antennas 2710-1 may be arranged on one side surface of stealth plate 2730. Alternatively, a plurality of sets of cross-shaped orthogonal antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3 may be arranged on one side surface of stealth plate 2730 as shown by a broken line in FIG. Here, the antennas 2710-2 and 2710 shown by the broken lines in FIG. 32B are attached to the antenna 2710-1 orthogonal to the cross shape by rotating by 30 degrees. Using the antenna 2710-1 arranged in a cross shape, both A) reception of communication information on the in-system network line 1782 and B) position detection of a transmission source are performed. Here, an amplifier and a signal processing circuit 2720 are arranged between the antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3 arranged in a cross shape. From each amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720, detection signals α, β, γ, and δ are individually obtained. It is not necessary that the shape be a triangular pyramid or a quadrangular pyramid, and the side surfaces of the stealth plates 2730 may be oriented in different directions.

  Incidentally, the detection sensitivity of the cross-shaped antenna 2710 arranged on the side surface of the stealth plate 2730 in FIG. Therefore, a pair of cross-shaped antennas 2710 corresponds to the above-described “receiving unit having different detection sensitivity with respect to the traveling direction of the radio wave”. The comparison between the individual detection signals α, β, γ, and δ obtained from each amplifier and the signal processing circuit 2720 corresponds to the above “comparison of each detection signal”.

  FIG. 33 (a) is an enlarged view of one side surface of FIG. 32 (a). The stealth plate 2730 disposed on the back side of the cruciform antenna 2710 serves to (1) prevent radio waves from entering the cruciform antenna 2710 from behind and (2) absorb radio waves passing through the cruciform antenna 2710. Fulfill. By arranging the stealth plate 2730 on the back side of the “antenna 2710 for detecting the traveling direction of radio waves” in this way, the effect of suppressing unnecessary reflection of radio waves which lowers the detection accuracy and improving the position detection accuracy of the transmission source can be obtained. Yes. In order to exhibit this effect, the stealth plate 2730 has a two-layer structure as shown in FIG. The layer on the back side is formed of a metal plate layer 2734 having a fine uneven structure on the surface. By arranging the metal plate layer on the back side in this way, the transmission of radio waves is strongly prevented, and the penetration of radio waves into the cross-shaped antenna 2710 from the back side is prevented.

  However, radio waves are reflected on the surface of the metal plate layer 2734. Therefore, various measures have been taken to prevent the reflected radio wave from entering the cross-shaped antenna 2710. One such device is to make the substantially triangular pyramid or substantially quadrangular pyramid side surface a curved surface as shown in FIG. By making the surface curved as described above, the traveling direction of the incident radio wave 2800 which is incident substantially in parallel is changed at the incident position. Further, the surface of the metal plate layer 2734 is provided with a fine uneven structure so as to diffusely reflect the incident radio wave 2800 which is substantially parallel incident.

  However, the original purpose (2) of the stealth plate 2730 is to absorb radio waves instead of reflecting them. In order to realize this function (2), a weakly conductive organic layer 2738 having a fine uneven structure on both the front and back surfaces is disposed above a metal plate layer 2734 having a fine uneven structure on the surface inside the stealth plate 2730. . As a detailed structure of the weakly conductive organic layer 2738 having a fine uneven structure on both the front and back surfaces, a structure in which metal powder is solidified by an organic layer may be used, or the whole may be formed of a weakly conductive organic material. Then, the incident radio wave 2800 is absorbed in the weakly conductive organic layer 2738. However, since the incident radio wave 2800 cannot be completely absorbed only in the weakly conductive organic layer 2738, the incident radio wave 2800 is irregularly reflected on the uneven surface. Further, the irregular reflection efficiency is increased between the weakly conductive organic layer 2738 having a fine uneven structure on both the front and back surfaces and the metal plate layer 2734 having the fine uneven structure on the surface, and the radio wave reflected here is reduced by the weakly conductive organic layer. It is absorbed in 2738 to prevent it from reaching the cross antenna 2710.

  The detailed structure of the cross-shaped antenna 2710-1 shown in FIG. 32A and the principle regarding the detection signal characteristics will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 34A, the internal structure of the cruciform antenna 2710 includes a structure in which two antennas 2710 arranged in a horizontal direction (X direction) are connected by a resistor 2920, and a structure in a vertical direction (Y direction). Are connected by a resistor 2920 between the two antennas 2710 arranged at the same position. Here, the connection between the two antennas 2710 is not limited to the resistor 2920, and a capacitor or an inductance may be appropriately disposed in order to improve the frequency characteristics of signal detection. The amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720 includes voltage differentiators 2940-1 and 2940 for detecting a voltage difference generated between the resistors 2920, and an adder 2960 for adding signals obtained from the respective resistors. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when a radio wave having a polarization plane inclined by θ with respect to the horizontal axis (X axis) and having an electric field amplitude A passes in a direction perpendicular to the cross antenna 2710, From the voltage differentiator 2940-1
A ² e ^i2ωt cos ² θ (1)
Is obtained from the voltage differentiator 2940-2.
A ² e ^i2ωt sin ² θ (2)
Is obtained. In Equations (1) and (2), the phase term of the detection signal is represented by a complex number. Therefore, the output signal from the adder 2960 obtained by adding the above signals is
A ² e ^i2ωt (3)
Becomes There is a great feature in that the inclination angle θ of the polarization plane does not appear in the equation (3). That is, as long as the radio wave passes through the cross-shaped antenna 2710 in the vertical direction, it can be seen that the obtained detection signal has a constant characteristic without depending on the inclination angle θ of the polarization plane.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34C, the output signal from the adder 2960 when the radio wave passes at an angle inclined by ξ from the vertical direction of the cruciform antenna 2710 is
A ² e ^i2ωt sin ² ξ (4)
Given by The above equation (4) indicates that the output signal of the adder 2960 changes depending on the traveling direction of the radio wave with respect to the cross antenna 2710 (the inclination angle of the cross antenna 2710 from the vertical direction). I have. Therefore, the output signals α, β, γ, and δ (of the adder 2960) obtained from the respective cross-shaped antennas 2710 arranged on the stealth plates 2710 facing different directions as shown in FIG. By applying the above equation (4), the traveling direction of the radio wave can be calculated.

  By the way, when the inclination angle ξ is particularly small in FIG. 34 (c), the output signal amount tends to greatly depend on the vibration surface of the radio wave. In order to reduce the adverse effect, a plurality of pairs of cross-shaped antennas 2710-2 and 310 each having a rotation angle indicated by a broken line in FIG. Then, among the output signals obtained by the individual cross-shaped antennas 2710-1 to 2710-1, only the output signal that is significantly different from the other output signals is discarded, and the average of the remaining two output signals is obtained, so that the inclination angle 小 さ い is small. In this case, the detection signal error can be reduced.

  As shown in the above equation (3), when the antennas 2710 are arranged at right angles, the traveling direction of the radio wave can be measured efficiently (without being affected by the polarization plane). However, the present invention is not limited to this (if any correction is made when calculating the traveling direction of the radio wave), the antennas 2710 may be arranged at an arbitrary angle. Further, the shape of the antenna 2710 is not limited to the linear shape described above, and may take other shapes such as a “leaf shape” as shown in FIG.

  Note that in the method of detecting the position of the transmission source from the traveling direction of the radio wave, the detection accuracy may be reduced due to reflection in the middle of the traveling path of the radio wave such as a wall or a ceiling. As a countermeasure, radio waves in a plurality of different frequency bands may be used for position detection. For example, as reference frequencies used for short-range wireless communication, frequency bands of 2.4 GHz, 915 MHz, 950 MHz, and 868 MHz can be used in some regions. Therefore, for example, the wireless communication at the different reference frequencies may be performed in parallel. In some places, the reflection characteristics of a radio wave such as a wall or ceiling in the middle of a traveling path change depending on the reference frequency used. Therefore, comparing the respective position detection results using wireless communication at different reference frequencies improves the position detection accuracy of the transmission source.

Also, as described above, when the triangulation is used for position detection, the position of the transmission source can be detected simply by measuring the traveling direction of the radio wave at two points. However, the traveling direction of the radio wave may be measured at three or more reception points in consideration of preventing the position detection accuracy from being reduced due to reflection in the course of the radio wave traveling. As described above, the measurement results at three or more reception points are compared to increase the accuracy and reliability of the position detection of the transmission source. Further, in addition to one of the above, a method of increasing the number of reception points for position detection and a method of increasing the reference frequency to be used may be combined. As described above, the above-described device has an effect of improving the accuracy of detecting the position of the transmission source.
Section 4.5 Compatibility between systems having different units (composite modules and devices) The system α_1132 in the system of the present embodiment is a system applied to the social infrastructure field from a system applied to the consumer field and a system applied to the healthcare field. There is a feature that can be applied to a network communication system in a wide range up to. Further, in the system of this embodiment, as described in Section 4.2, the initial setting (Check-in), plug-in, and plug-out of the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) in the system α_1132 are performed. There is a feature that can be done very easily. When the above features are combined, a new feature is created in the system of the present embodiment such that “the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) can be easily incorporated and used in a plurality of different types of systems”. . Further, the same unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) can be diverted (diverted) across a plurality of different systems.

  Therefore, the use of the system according to the present embodiment produces an effect that the versatility of the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) can be ensured for a very wide range of application fields. In particular, if the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 have versatility in a very wide range of application fields, it is easy to reduce the prices of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 due to mass production effects. Further, since the inexpensive composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be used across a plurality of different systems, the effect of greatly improving the usability of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is also produced.

  The relationship between a plurality of systems α_1132 and β_1134 in which the same unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is used is included in the same domain 2_1122-2 as shown in FIG. Is also good. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the plurality of systems α_1132 and β_1134 may belong to different domains 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2, respectively.

In this section 4.5, the initial setting (Check-in) and plug-in / plug-out method of the unit 1290 (device 1250 and compound modules 1295, 1460, 1470) between a plurality of different systems α_1132 and β_1134 are described. explain.
First, the case where the functions differ between the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 will be described. In this case, the system controller α_1126 in the system α_1132 and the system controller β_1128 in the system β_1134 individually perform system suitability / nonconformity discrimination processing for the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). When the identification target of the system conformance / non-conformity is the device 1250, the exchange information 1810 (see FIG. 10B) is communicated by the communication middleware layer APL06 as described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 16 or FIG. 17B. Swap and identify. On the other hand, when the identification target of the system conformance / non-conformity is the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470, the communication information in the media access layer MAC02 is used as described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10A. Identify. For example, as described in section 2.3 with reference to FIG. 12A (e), the IEEE extension address SEXADRS on the transmission side included in the communication information transmitted from the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 may be used. In this case, the server n_1116-n is accessed via the Internet from the obtained information of the IEEE extension address SEXADRS to obtain the feature information of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470, and performs system suitability / nonconformity discrimination. Is also good.

  As a result of the above processing, if the corresponding unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is determined to be compatible with the system, the user I / F unit 1234 (FIG. 2, FIG. 9, or FIG. 8A / B) Check with the end user via the system to see if it can be incorporated into the corresponding system.

  First, when the functions of the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 match, as described in section 4.2, the location information where the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is arranged is used. System conformance / non-conformity.

  Next, a situation that occurs when the same unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is used across a plurality of systems α_1132, system β_1134, and the like, and a countermeasure method will be described. As an example of the unit 1290, a C-format as shown in FIG. 17A may be used as the communication middleware layer APL02 used when the composite module 1295 performs information communication with the system controller β_1128. Alternatively, another format may be used as the communication middleware layer APL02 for information communication with the composite module 1295. On the other hand, as another example of the unit 1290, the communication middleware layer APL06 used when the device 1250 performs information communication with the system controller β_1128 has an A-format, an E-format, and a W-format as shown in FIG. 17B. May be used, or the extended application layer EXL06 may be used. Thus, different formats are allowed for the format used in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 depending on the unit 1290 (the device 1250 and the composite modules 1295 and 3583) used.

  FIG. 36A shows a configuration example of a system controller 3581 capable of communicating with various units 1290 (combined module 3585). In FIG. 36A, for the sake of simplicity, various processing execution units are shown in a hardware form. As described above, the structure in the system controller 3581 may be configured by a connection in a hardware form. In addition, when the system controller α_1126 includes the processor 1230 and the memory unit 1232 as shown in FIG. 2 as shown in FIG. It corresponds to the processing flow to be executed.

  As the unit or the composite module 3583 which is an example thereof, there are a plurality of composite modules 3583 developed by different manufacturers. Further, use of a different format (standard) on the communication middleware layer APL02 for each composite module 3583 is permitted. Therefore, it is necessary to support a plurality of different formats (first communication standard to n-th communication standard) on the communication middleware layer APL02 so that the same system controller 3581 can communicate with various composite modules. There are features that are possible. In order to make this possible, a different communication standard is identified in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c in the system controller 3581, and appropriate processing according to the communication standard is performed according to the identification result. As a result, the versatility of the system controller 3581 can be improved, and an effect of enabling information communication with a plurality of different composite modules 3583 developed by different manufacturers can be obtained.

Various formats used in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 described in section 2.1 include:
○ The A-format is described in “text format in a broad sense”.
○ C-format is “command / request / response / status” format ○ E-format is “storage of setting code in a prescribed area specified in advance” ○ W-format is “filled in the designated field by the sender” Alternatively, there is a feature that “HTML / HTML5 specific“ tag ”is described”. Therefore, the information described in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (the information described in the communication middleware data APLDT of FIG. 11) is analyzed, and the corresponding communication standard is identified by judging which of the above-mentioned features corresponds. it can.

  As the embodiment of FIG. 17A shows, the combined module 3584 is connected to the Internet 3585 via an access point 3584a and / or a base station 3584b. Here, the Internet 3585 in FIG. 36A corresponds to the external system network line 1788 in FIG. 17A. Although not shown in FIG. 37A, a router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery shown in FIG.

  In some cases, the composite module 3583 has a sensor module 1260 as shown in, for example, FIG. 4B (a) or (b), and transmits a detection signal from the sensor module 1260. Alternatively, the identification data is stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the communication module 1660 in the composite module 3583, and this information (or the address of the composite module 3584 itself (for example, the IP addresses SIPADRS, DIPADRS in FIG. 13)) ) May be accessed from the outside via the Internet 3584 and the base station 3584b.

  As described in section 1.6, the communication module 1660 having the structure of FIG. 7A or 7B is also used as a part of the communication module 1202-3 (FIG. 2) in the system controller 3581 and α_1126. Therefore, the Internet connection unit 3581a in FIG. 36A corresponds to the information communication execution unit 3016 in FIG. 7A. Similarly, the protocol recognition unit 3581b in FIG. 36A corresponds to the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918 in FIG. 7A, and the data detection unit 3581d in FIG. 36A corresponds to the content extraction unit 1938 in FIG. 7A. Further, the Internet matching data output unit 3581g in FIG. 36A corresponds to the physical layer frame generation unit 1914 in FIG. 7A. The communication standard recognition unit 3581c and the communication standard matching format setting unit 3581f in FIG. 36A both correspond to the combination unit of the signal processing unit 1780 and the processor 1736 in FIG. 7B. The processing performed in the data processing unit 3581e in FIG. 36A is executed in the processor 1230 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the composite modules 3583 and 1295 can be connected to a system controller 3581 (system controller β_1128) via the Internet 3585. The communication information used at this time has the structure shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, transmission side IP address information SIPADRS and reception side IP address information DIPADRS are stored therein.

The received signal received by the internet connection unit 3581a is analyzed by the protocol recognition unit 3581b. In the protocol recognition unit 3581b, the IPv6 header IPv6HD and the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) in FIG. 11 are individually extracted. Thereafter, the extracted communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) are analyzed in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c.
The communication standard recognition unit 3581c includes a data processing routine for analyzing formats of various communication standards in advance. Therefore, the communication standard recognition unit 3581c easily determines whether the composite module employs the A / E / W-format (FIG. 17B) or the C-format (FIG. 17A). can do. After the corresponding communication standard is recognized, the content (for example, sensor detection data) extracted by the data detection unit 3581d is input to the data processing unit 3581e.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after automatically determining the communication standard to which the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) in the received communication information conforms, the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EX) in a format conforming to the communication standard. EXDT) has the following characteristics in that it generates the contents and transmits a response to the unit 1290 of the transmission partner. Specifically, based on the information of the communication standard (format of the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06) identified in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c described above, the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data) is set in the communication standard matching format setting unit 3581f. EXDT). As a result, the effect that the system controller 3581 can perform stable information communication with a plurality of different units 1290 (or the composite module 1295) developed by different manufacturers is obtained.

That is, as described above, the communication standards on the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (and the extended application layer EXL06) used by the corresponding unit 1290 (or the composite module 3585) are already recognized in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c. . Therefore, based on the information, the communication standard matching format setting unit 3581f converts the transmission data from the data processing unit 3581e into communication middleware data APLDT (FIG. 11) and, if necessary, extended data EXDT. As a result, the unit 1290 (or the composite module 3585) of the transmission (reply) partner can recognize the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT). Then, the transmission data in the predetermined data format is input to the Internet matching data output unit 3581g.
FIG. 36B shows an example in which the above-described composite module 3583 (or unit 1290) moves to various different areas. Here, different network systems α_1132 and β_1134 are configured for each area. Therefore, system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-1 for controlling / managing / collecting network communication in the network system are provided for each area. Here, the system controller 3581-1, the system controller 3581-2, and the system controller 3581-3 arranged in each area have the same configuration as the system controller 3581 in FIG. 36A, respectively.
As described above, all the system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, 3581-3 flexibly support different formats (communication standards) on the communication middleware layers APL02, APL06 (and the extended application layer EXL06). Therefore, the composite module 3583 (or the unit 1290) can communicate with the system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-2 even if the user moves to any area.
Chapter 5 Application Examples for Each Application Section 5.1 Examples of Application to the Consumer Field 5.1.1 Examples of Application of the Wide Area Network System to the Consumer Field Consumer Electronics Technology of the wide area network system shown in FIG. Considering an example of application to ()), “specific information” may be made to correspond as a commodity circulating among the wholesaler B1_1104-1, the service provider B_1112-2, and the system α_1132. For example, the service provider B_1112-2 collects wide-area weather information and accident information or road congestion information as materials from wholesalers B1_1104-1 such as the Meteorological Agency, the police station, and the Road Traffic Authority, and processes the collected information for each region. Publish useful information on the Internet. Then, a general end user may operate the personal computer (system controller α_1126) on hand to receive the information browsing service.

  Also, as an example of application to the consumer field, one domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 shown in FIG. It may be made to correspond to a predetermined activity area on a network of members (including a single individual) constituting the specified group. Further, as the specific group, specific members on SNS (Social Network Service) may form one specific domain 1 to 3_11122-1 to 3_1.

As another specific example, when the system α_1132 in FIG. 1 is made to correspond to a PAN configured in the home of an individual user, the system β_1134 is used in a network environment (specific PAN environment or LAN environment) where the same user goes out. Can be made to correspond. In this case, a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a tablet owned by the user on the go corresponds to the system controller β_1128. However, not only the system β_1134 is made to correspond to only one portable terminal, but also the entire network space (constructed in a specific area physically or geographically close) to which the system controller β_1128 is connected is connected to the system β_1134. You may make it correspond to the whole. As an example showing the relationship between the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 in the domain 2_1122-2, the user operates the above-mentioned portable terminal (system controller β_1128) from the system β_1134 on the go and the domain-specific identification information ID (Identification). Information) and a unique password to enter the domain 2_1122-2 and control based on a method of controlling a specific device in the system α_1132 built in the home or information from a predetermined sensor module in the home (system α_1132). There is a method of receiving an original service (for example, obtaining a suggestion for a dinner recipe on the go from food information stored in a refrigerator at home).
Section 5.1.2 Examples of application of composite module to consumer field As an example of application to the consumer field, the sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 are attached to an existing small household appliance such as an alarm clock, a flashlight, a toothbrush, and a hair dryer. As a result, there is an effect that the function of the small household appliance can be dramatically improved at a low cost. Here, the sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 do not necessarily have to be fixed by screws or the like as a method of attaching them to existing small home appliances. For example, temporary attachment using a double-sided tape or an adhesive may be used. good. For example, by simply attaching (attaching) various sensor / communication modules 1460 to these small home appliances, various sensor functions can be added to these small home appliances very easily. Various types of information detected by these sensor / communication modules 1460 are collected in the system controller α_1126. Further, by simply attaching (attaching) a drive / communication module 1470 that generates, for example, sound or light to these small home appliances, a new additional function can be easily added to these small home appliances. Here, these additional functions are integrally controlled by the system controller α_1126. Then, the small home appliance to which the new additional function is added can provide the optimum service according to the user's action and state. For example, if the user wakes up poorly in the morning, an alarm clock can provide a service in which a human voice strongly warns. Alternatively, when the user misplaces or loses a specific small home appliance in a house, the small home appliance itself can provide a service for notifying the user of the location.

  Other application examples will be described below. For example, a sensor / communication module 1460 having a function such as a temperature sensor, a wind sensor, a sound sensor, an optical sensor, or a short-range human sensor is installed everywhere in the section 2_1142-2 (room). Within the system α_1132. At the same time, a drive / communication module 1470 is built in a remote controller for controlling devices such as an air conditioner, a television, and a lighting device, and the device such as an air conditioner, a TV, and a lighting device can be controlled from the system controller α_1126 via the remote controller. I do. As a result, the system controller α_1126 can grasp in detail the distribution characteristics of temperature, wind power, sound, light luminance (illuminance), and human motion in the details in the section 2_1142-2. Then, based on the grasped result, the device is controlled under optimum conditions for the user. Particularly in a large room, since the air-conditioning effect is largely biased, there is a tendency for the temperature and wind level to vary sharply depending on the location. On the other hand, by applying the service method, the satisfaction of the user who lives in a large room is significantly improved. By using this method, there is no need to replace existing installed main units (such as air conditioners, televisions, and lighting fixtures), and it is only necessary to replace the existing remote control with the drive / communication module 1470 built-in remote control. This produces an effect that the satisfaction of many users can be improved.

  When the remote controller with built-in drive / communication module 1470 is used as the device 1450-4 with built-in drive / communication module 1470-2 in FIG. 8B, the communication is very simple as described in Chapter 2 with reference to FIG. It is also possible to use a C-format capable of communicating the converted communication information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remote control structure may be improved to the level of a device 1250-1 having a drive module 1270-1, a communication module 1202-4, and a device controller 1240-1 built therein as shown in FIG. 8A. In this case, an A-format or an E-format described later may be used for communication within the system α_1132 with the system controller α_1126.

  Next, still another application example will be described. FIG. 37B shows a state where milk 3506 purchased by the purchaser is stored in refrigerator 3521. A composite module 3523 is mounted on the container of milk 3506. The composite module 3523 is covered with a seal and fixed to the outside of the milk container. On the other hand, a system controller 3522 is installed inside the refrigerator 3521, and the system controller 3522 can communicate with the combined module 3523.

  The communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna exists in the composite module 3523 (FIG. 4A (b)), and the self-attribute data 1793 can be stored in the communication module 1666. Then, the system controller 3522 can request the composite module 3523 to return the contents of the self-attribute data 1793. As a result, the system controller 3522 can check the “best-before period data” included in the self-attribute data. Since the current date data is stored in the system controller 3522, the acquired expiration date data is compared with the date data, and the degree to which the end of the expiration date of milk is approaching can be measured. That is, for example, the system controller 3522 can detect a case where the expiration date is within 1 week, within 4 days, within 2 days, within 1 day, or when the expiration date has passed.

  Further, the invention is not limited thereto, and the system controller 3522 can receive the respective self-attribute data 1793 from the composite module 3523 provided for the product, food, and the like in the refrigerator 3521. Thus, the system controller 3522 can display list data of foodstuffs, commodities, and the like stored in the refrigerator on a display 3525 provided in the refrigerator 3521 using a communication line in the network. Then, the user of the refrigerator 3521 seeing the display 3525 can check the status of the expiration date of the milk 3506. Then, based on the control from the system controller 3522, the status of the expiration date of the milk 3506 can be displayed on the display 3525 by changing the color. For example, when the expiration date of the milk 3506 is within 1 week, it is "green", when it is within 4 days, "blue", when it is within 2 days, "yellow", when it is within 1 day, it is "pink". When the deadline has passed, “red” may be displayed. Instead of changing the color, various display methods such as a bar display and a warning character display may be used. If the self-attribute data 1793 includes purchase date data and identification data of the shop where the purchase was made, these data may be displayed on the display 3525.

FIG. 37C shows an example in which the composite module 3531 is embedded in the heel of the shoe 3505. The composite module 3531 contains a pressure sensor, a humidity sensor, and the like. Then, when the user returns home, the combined module 3531 and the system controller 3532 at home communicate with each other, and the system controller 3532 can read step count data and humidity data recorded in the combined module 3531 in advance. Thus, the system controller 3532 can calculate the number of steps for the user for one day. Further, the present invention is not limited thereto, and information on the current humidity in the shoe 3505 can also be obtained. Using the result, for example, the number of steps per day of the user and the humidity of shoes can be displayed on the smartphone 3533.
Section 5.1.3 Example of application of section division method to consumer field This section 5.1.3 describes an example of application of the section division method to the consumer field. The example of FIG. 24 illustrates a division example of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m when the entire residential land of one house is made to correspond to the system α_1132. In FIG. 25, the sections 1_11422-1 to m_1142-m are described for each room. On the other hand, in FIG. 24, this is made to correspond to a slightly broader concept, and the garden in the residential land is also made to correspond to one section 10_1142-10. Also in FIG. 24 as in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the in-vehicle space corresponds to one section 1_1142-1. 24A and FIG. 8B, the arrangement place of the smart meter 1124 is excluded from the section in FIG. 24, but the arrangement place of the smart meter 1124 may be specified as a specific independent section. Sections 3_1142-3 to 8_1142-8 are assigned to each room including a toilet and a bathroom. However, in the system according to the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to divide the section into rooms, and for example, “entire whole” in which the interior is divided into a plurality of rooms may be assigned to one section 2_1142-2. A space area such as a storeroom where a user is less frequent may be made to correspond to the section 9_1114-9.

  Further, as an example of utilizing the result of integration and management of the information collected for each section 1142, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 therein) determines whether or not there is an end user and the behavior / state (whether the end user is awake or sleeping or not). , Is the end user an adult or a child?) May be estimated or determined in units of sections 1 to m — 1142-1 to m. Also, the unit of integration and management of the collected information is not limited to the sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m as described above, but may be, for example, a system α to β_1132 to 1134 units (for example, how many users are in a single residential land. , Etc.).

As an example of a method of providing a service to a user, air conditioner temperature setting and lighting on / off control in units of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m, or lighting brightness control and output volume of a TV / radio / audio deck or the like. Adjustment may be performed. By providing a detailed service in units of the section 1142, there is also an effect that power consumption can be saved (energy saving) in the systems α to β_1132 to 1134.
Section 5.2 Example of application to the social infrastructure field Section 5.2.1 Example of application of the wide area network system to the social infrastructure field When the wide area network system shown in FIG. 1 is applied to the social infrastructure field (Social Infrastructure Technology) , Public institutions such as the state and local governments, public corporations and public interest corporations also correspond to wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2. As the information (commodity) handled by the wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2, personal information such as citizens, prefectural citizens, metropolitan citizens, prefectural citizens, and citizens, such as permanent books / resident cards and tax payment histories, may be associated. Alternatively, road congestion information, accident occurrence information, land costs (land prices), housing information, and the like for each area may be made to correspond to information (products) handled by the road corporation or the housing corporation. In particular, when applied to the social infrastructure field, wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 own or manage / operate their own proprietary infrastructure (for example, transmission lines, water and sewage piping, city gas piping, etc.) and products. There is a feature that a delivery system (a delivery means using a train or a truck) can be used.

  First, examples of services provided by railways and transportation infrastructure are provided as examples of service provision based on consignment from public organizations such as the national and local governments, public corporations and public interest corporations. The system controller α_1126 periodically notifies the server n_1116-n of deterioration information for each area such as a road, an iron bridge, a tunnel, and a railway. Then, in the service provider B_1112-2, the information of all the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n_1 is integrated and a future repair plan is drafted or an abnormal warning is issued, and the outsourced state, local government, public organization (wholesale) (Corresponding to the trader A / B_1102 / 1104). As another example, an integrated management example of systems such as railway, transportation, postal service, transportation, and air traffic control will be described. The system controller α_1126 integrally manages various operation statuses and accident occurrence information periodically notified to the server n_1116-n, and issues an operation change instruction as needed from the service provider B_1112-2 to the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128. Notify to The service provider B_1112-2 that provides these services is specifically supported by a specific social infrastructure management organization or social system management organization (profit corporation or public interest corporation). The invention is not limited to the above. For example, an NPO corporation or an NPO organization may be associated with the service provider B_1112-2.

  In the above service providing example, a service method provided by only a single service provider 1112 has been described. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this example, and a plurality of service providers A / B_1112 / 1114 may provide services in cooperation with each other. That is, in the description of section 1.7 using FIG. 1, information sharing or resource coordination between service provider A_1112-1 and service provider B_1112-2 or between service provider B_1112-2 and service provider C_1112-3 is mutually performed. 1114, and showed that services could be made more efficient and more sophisticated. By combining this mechanism with the information obtained by the smart meter 1124, the effect of achieving a new effective use and effective diversion of the public consumption material is produced. As an example, the electric power is supplied to the service provider A_1112-1 of the electric power retailer by using the infrastructure and the distribution system of the wholesaler A_1102, and the electric energy is paid to the service provider A_1112-1 of the wholesaler B1_1104-1. Suppose that water supply is supplied, the sewage treatment is performed using the infrastructure and distribution system of the wholesaler B2_1104-2, and the water and sewage usage is paid to the service provider B_1112-2 of the water and sewage retailer. In the database 1118-n corresponding to the server n_1116-n in the service provider B, the information obtained from the smart meter 1124 includes the real-time stored water amount in the system α1132 (the water amount supplied through the water supply system and the sewerage system). (Difference with the amount of water discharged via the system) and water pressure information. Then, when "instantaneous power usage fee spike information" or "request for power consumption restriction" in a specific time zone is received from the service provider A_1112-1, which is a power retailer, the service provider B_1112-2, which is a water and sewage retailer, receives the information. The server n_1116-n reads the stored information in the database 1118-n, and determines whether or not hydroelectric power generation is possible based on the current storage water amount and the water pressure in the target system α_1132. As a result of the determination, when hydropower generation is possible in the target system α_1132, the server n_1116-n proposes “switch to hydropower generation” in the system α_1132 to the system controller α_1126. As a result, it is possible not only to reduce the power rate in the system α_1132, but also to avoid the danger of exceeding the power consumption in the area.

  Next, another service providing form different from the above-described contents will be described. In the system of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of merchandise supply routes from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124 serving as a window for supplying predetermined merchandise in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 (from the wholesaler A_1102 in FIG. 1). The existence of the “broken line” direct route to the smart meter 1124 and the route via the service provider A_1112-1) are described in Section 1.7. A specific example of a service providing method performed by the service provider A_1112-1 in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 utilizing this feature, and a unique effect generated thereby will be described below. Here, public consumption materials such as electric power, gas, water, gasoline, etc., whose rates vary depending on the area of use and the date and time of use, are taken as examples of products related to the service. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be adapted to other services and products (for example, sales and distribution of specific information using a network of general consumer goods, liquid assets, fixed assets, and the like). For example, when public consumption is used in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 when the usage fee is high, such as in summer / winter or in the daytime, a predetermined amount of storage equivalent to the usage amount from the wholesaler A_1102 measured by the smart meter 1124 is stored. Return to wholesaler A_1102 from section 1154 (eg, storage battery or water / gas tank). Conversely, when the usage fee is low, such as when it is not necessary to use the cooling and heating equipment or at night, public consumption materials are purchased from the wholesaler A1102 and stored in the predetermined product storage unit 1154. As a result, the usage fee paid by the end user (user in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132) for substantial public consumption can be reduced. At the same time, the service provider A_1112-1 can receive, as a reward, a part of the reduced price (profit margin) of the public consumption fee. Further, by the above-mentioned method, smoothing of public consumption (amount of goods (public consumption) supplied by the wholesaler A_1102) in a wide area (temporary consumption of public consumption depending on the season and time). A new effect that can be achieved.

  Then, as described above, when returning the same amount as the consumption of the public consumables measured by the smart meter 1124 from the predetermined commodity storage unit 1154 to the wholesaler A_1102, the charge / discharge amount control unit or the storage / release amount control unit. High control accuracy is required. In order to achieve the high control accuracy, in the system of the present embodiment, the charge / discharge amount monitor unit or the storage / discharge amount monitor unit (not shown in FIG. 1, but exists in the predetermined product storage unit 1154, FIG. 8A A charge / discharge amount control unit or a storage / release amount control unit (a portion corresponding to an inflow amount monitor unit 1218 and a discharge amount monitor unit 1216 described later with reference to FIG. 9) based on detection information (detection signal). Similarly, real-time feedback of the charge / discharge amount or the storage / release amount in the inflow amount control unit 1214 and the release amount control unit 1212 is performed. In addition to the above, if necessary, the accumulated accumulation amount of the charge / discharge amount or the storage / discharge amount for each predetermined period is appropriately calculated and compared with a predetermined target value, and a difference value between the target value and the difference is calculated. May be fed back to the charge / discharge amount or the storage / release amount in the next predetermined period. By performing the control method described above, the control accuracy of the accumulated amount for each predetermined period is improved, and there is an effect that a loss (a shift in trading profit due to a shortage of the control amount) in the purchase and sale of public consumption materials can be minimized.

  In the case where the wide area network system is applied to the social infrastructure field, one domain 1 to 3_11122-1 to 3 shown in FIG. 1 may correspond to the entire specific social infrastructure or the entire specific social system. . For example, operation of railway, transportation, postal service, air traffic control, transportation business, production of public consumer goods, etc., and state observation unit, or any other social infrastructure or social system for each specified group (specified corporation or specified corporation group) Also, the unit for observing the state may be associated with each of the domains 1 to 3 — 1122 to 3. Furthermore, a large group of operations and state observations relating to activities of a specific community, a predetermined organization, or a predetermined corporation in which distributed activities for each region are integrated by a network may be associated with each of the domains 1-3_11122-1-3.

  On the other hand, one system α / β_1132 / 1134 shown in FIG. 1 may correspond to one building or area. In other words, as a target of the power saving system (Energy Management System), it is called a HEMS (Home Energy Management System), a BEMS (Building Energy Management System) or a CEMS (Community Energy Management System) for each scale size. May be associated with one management unit of the above-described HEMS, BEMS, or CEMS.

  Further, an example of a relationship between the domain 1122 and the system α / β_1132 / 1134 as a specific corresponding method other than the above will be described. For example, when the domain 1122 corresponds to the operation and status observation of a specific railway company, an automatic ticket gate system, a ticketing system, a commuter pass issuing system, an operation status management system for each train, an automatic management system for track damage status, Damage status management system, platform deterioration management system, electric power supply status management system for each train, abnormality warning system on the train / platform, molesting arrest system in the car, work management / salary payment system for crew / station staff, salary A payment / accounting system may correspond to each of the systems 1132-4. When the domain 1122 is adapted to the operation and state management of the transportation and transportation business, the deterioration management system for roads, railway bridges and tunnels, the information management system for road accidents, the congestion management system, and the damage to transportation means (truck, etc.) A situation management system, a gate management system (such as an expressway) (including an ETC management system), an employee attendance / exit management system, a payroll accounting system, and the like may be associated with each of the systems 1132 to 4.

On the other hand, in Section 1.7, when one system α_1132 is made to correspond to a specific region physically or geographically close, one domain 2_1122-2 is a region on the network that transcends the physical or geographical space. It was explained that it was made to correspond to. When the entire degradation management system for roads, railway bridges, and tunnels is made to correspond to one domain 2_1122-2, the degradation management units for roads, railway bridges, and tunnels set for each region are set to individual systems α / β_1132 / 1134. May be used.
5.2.2 Example of application of composite module to social infrastructure field When the present embodiment system is applied to a social system or a social infrastructure, the sensor / communication module 1460 is connected to an entrance / exit gate of a traffic light, a road, an expressway, or a public. The system controller α_1126 may be arranged at or near a part of an appropriate bulletin board (including an electronic bulletin board) or around it so that the system controller α_1126 grasps the traffic situation and traffic congestion situation of the person or vehicle, and notifies only the necessary information to the server n_1116-n. . In this case, the device 1450 may correspond to a traffic light, an electronic gate, an electronic bulletin board, or the like. In this case, the sections described later in Chapter 4 may correspond to the traffic lights, the electronic gates, and the roads in a predetermined area around the electronic bulletin board or in a specific range.

  In particular, the above-described sensor / communication module 1460 has a feature that can easily cope with light weight / small size / power saving (no external power supply is required). Therefore, taking advantage of this advantage, many sensors / communications modules 1460 are installed on roads, bridge girders, tunnels or pipes (such as water and sewage), and long-term monitoring of deterioration points in roads, bridge girders, tunnels or pipes. Becomes easier. From the various types of sense information obtained here, it is possible to extract only necessary information such as detection of only a change component in the system controller α_1126, so that analysis and data processing on the server n_1116-n side are facilitated. .

  As another example of applying the sensor / communication module 1460 to the social infrastructure field, the sensor / communication module 1460 is attached to a cart in a store such as a supermarket, a convenience store, or a department store, and the behavior history information of the customer in the store is collected. May be. For example, "stores where customers stay for a long time" and "orders in which customers turn" are extracted from the collected customer behavior history and reflected in marketing (market research) of merchandise displays in stores to improve store sales. The effect that can contribute is born.

  On the other hand, for example, in a large room such as an office, a hospital, and a large store, the cooling and heating effect is largely biased, so that the temperature and the wind force tend to be severe depending on the location. Therefore, as in section 5.1.2, a sensor / communication module 1460 having functions such as a temperature sensor, a wind sensor, a sound sensor, an optical sensor, or a short-range human sensor is ubiquitous in offices, hospitals, large stores, and the like. By installing the, the bias of the cooling and heating effect in a large room is greatly reduced, and there is an effect that the satisfaction of many customers is improved.

  Another application embodiment in which the composite module 1295 is specifically used will be described. As shown in FIG. 4A (a) or (b), every composite module 1295 includes a communication module 1660. As described with reference to FIG. 7B in section 1.6, the self-attribute data storage area 1793 exists in the communication module 1660. The content of the self-attribute data 1793 is changed and / or switched according to the use aspect of a product, a product, a part, or the like equipped with the composite module 1295. The usage phase referred to here is a change in the existence area of the product, the product, the part, or the like (that is, a change in the system in which the composite module 1295 is arranged as shown in FIG. 37B), a change in elapsed time, or a change in conditions. Including. When the combined module 1295 is used as a sensor / communication module 1460, it is possible to monitor ambient conditions in various use environments based on a combination with a sensor.

  FIG. 37A schematically shows, for example, an in-store area 3501 of a supermarket, a cash register area 3502, and an exit area 3503 of a supermarket. Here, the inside of the supermarket corresponds to one independent system α_1132 (see FIG. 1). Then, the cache registers 3511a and 2511b in FIG. 37A operate as the system controller α_1126. It is assumed that shoes 3505, milk 3506, and bags 3507 are sold as commodities in the system α_1132.

  Here, a sensor / communication module 1460 is mounted as a composite module 1295 on each of the shoe 3505, the milk 3506, and the bag 3507. As a specific mounting method, a sheet-shaped sensor / communication module 1460 (composite module 1295) is individually attached with an adhesive. The invention is not limited to this, and may be inserted (or mixed) into shoes 3505, milk 3506, and bag 3507. A part of the self-attribute data 1793 has an anti-theft flag (for example, “1”). Then, when the purchaser has completed the settlement, the information of the anti-theft flag is deleted based on the control from the cash register 3511a or 2511b in the cash register area 3502. Specifically, for example, when the cash register 3511a reads a barcode indicating the price of a product, a read completion signal is transmitted to the composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) in the product. Then, the corresponding combined module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) determines that the settlement has been completed when the read completion signal is received, and deletes the anti-theft flag to “0”. Further, the cash registers 3511a and 2511b can add the identification data of the supermarket and the date data when the settlement is performed in the self-attribute data storage area 1793.

  Here, if the goods pass through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket without clearing the anti-theft flag (without performing settlement), an alarm is automatically output. That is, a monitoring device 3512 capable of outputting an alarm is installed in the exit area 3503 of the supermarket. As described in section 4.4, in the system of this embodiment, the positions of all the composite modules 1295 (or the sensor / communication modules 1460) can be detected in real time. Therefore, when the composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460) passes through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket, information communication is automatically performed with the system controller α_1126 (cash registers 3511a and 2511b). When the anti-theft flag is “1”, an alarm is output from the monitoring device. Conversely, when the anti-theft flag is “0”, no alarm is output from the monitoring device 3512.

  In the system example of the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which clerks are arranged in the cash registers 3511a and 3511b, and the anti-theft flag is stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sales price of the target product may be recorded in advance in the self-attribute data storage area 1793. Then, when the composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) in which the selling price is recorded in advance passes through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket, the total value of the payment amount paid by the buyer is automatically displayed. On the other hand, the composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) is also mounted in the wearing item (tie pin, necklace, etc.) worn by the purchaser, and the purchaser can use the cash register 3511a. , 3511b, the total amount of the payment is automatically deducted from the buyer's bank account. To enable this, the buyer's bank account number and password are stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 in the composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) mounted in the accessory of the buyer. It is recorded in advance.

  The composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) in which the billing information to the purchaser is recorded is not mounted in the mounting article as described above, but as described later in Section 5.3.2. It may be present in the body of the buyer by swallowing or the like.

  As described above, the use of the composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460) not only prevents theft, but also enables automatic billing without the need of a clerk. As a result, labor costs can be greatly reduced, which has the effect of increasing the profit of the supermarket.

  For example, FIG. 37D shows an example in which the composite module is used in a system for inspecting the corrosion state of a steel frame supporting a wall of a building, a wall of a tunnel, a bridge, and the like. For example, steel frames 3541a, 3541b, 3541c,... Support the back side of the inspection target wall 3540 such as a tunnel. Composite modules 3542, 3543 are attached to the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, 3541c, respectively. In FIG. 30D, communication modules 3542 and 3543 attached to steel frame 3541a are shown in the drawing. In the case where the wall 3540 to be inspected has a shielding effect against radio waves, an antenna 1480 is installed externally to the communication module 1660 in the composite module 1295 (FIG. 4A (a)). This external antenna 1480 is arranged at a position where wireless radio waves can be transmitted and received. That is, in the example of FIG. 37D, the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the composite modules 3542 and 3543 are led out to the outer surface of the inspection target wall 3540 through the lead wires penetrating the inspection target wall 3540.

  The sensor modules 1260 (FIG. 4B (a)) in the composite modules (sensor / communication modules) 3542 and 3543 are in close contact with the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b and 3541c via an insulating film. When the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, 3541c rust and swell, the adhesive film is broken, and the sensor module 1260 comes into direct contact with the rust. Then, when the sensor module 1260 comes into contact with rust, the resistance value in the sensor module 1260 decreases. Therefore, by knowing the resistance value in the sensor module 1260, the rust state of the surface of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, 3541c can be known.

  In the system examples of the embodiment described so far, in many cases, the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are installed in a fixed system, and the movable units are mostly on the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) side. On the other hand, in the system example of the embodiment shown in FIG. 37D (and FIG. 37E to be described later), the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) is fixed, and the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are movable. For example, there are cases where it is desired to obtain sensor information of a very wide area at once, or where it is difficult to install the system controller α_1126 due to system circumstances. In this case, as described above, the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) is installed in a fixed system, and the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are moved to collect the sensor information of each unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295). This has the effect of making it easy to obtain sensor information in a very wide area.

  In the system of this embodiment, as described in section 4.5, the same unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) can be adapted to a plurality of different systems. Therefore, even in this case, each time a plurality of different system controllers 1126 and 3546 used in different applications move, the fixed unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) can perform an appropriate operation for each application.

  In the example system of the embodiment in FIG. 37D, a system controller 3546 is installed on a part of the inspection vehicle 3545 (the roof of the inspection vehicle 3545 in the diagram of FIG. 37D), and passes near the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the composite module. Each time the antenna passes through the vicinity of the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the combined module, the system controller 3546 transmits a command request for “response value in the sensor module 1260” to each combined module (unit) 3542 and 3543. Then, in response to the request command, “the resistance value in the sensor module 1260” is appropriately answered from each of the composite modules (units) 3542 and 3543 to the system controller 3546. Accordingly, the system controller 3546 can check the rust state of all the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, 3541c. In this way, periodic rust inspection can be easily and accurately performed. Note that the above rust detection method is merely an example, and rust may be detected using other detection means.

  When a decrease in the resistance value in the sensor module 1260 outside the allowable range is detected as a result of the rust inspection, the rust deterioration of the server n_1116-n of FIG. Information on a predetermined steel frame 3541 is notified. In this case, the wholesaler B1_1104-1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the government or the Highway Public Corporation. Then, the wall maintenance contractor entrusted by the government or the Road Authority corresponds to the service provider B_1112-2. Then, the wall maintenance company formulates a repair plan based on the information of the rust-deteriorated steel frame 3541 stored in the server n_1116-n, and repairs a budget to the Highway Public Corporation (wholesaler B1_1104-1). Apply for.

  FIG. 37E shows an application example of the embodiment system in which the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 is used for leak detection of, for example, a gas pipe, a water pipe, and a fire hydrant pipe. Gas pipes, water pipes, fire hydrant pipes and the like are often arranged underground along roads. Therefore, a composite module (unit) 3549 is mounted on the surface of a pipe 3548 such as a gas pipe, a water pipe, and a fire hydrant pipe. Here, a sensor module 1260 built in the composite module (unit) 3549 and used for leak detection of a gas pipe, a water pipe, a fire hydrant pipe, and the like includes a gas sensor, a moisture (water) sensor, a sound sensor, a vibration sensor, and the like. The combined sensor provided may be incorporated.

  Similar to FIG. 37D, in FIG. 37E, the system controller 3546 is mounted in the inspection vehicle 3545 (in FIG. 37E, the system controller 3546 is mounted on the bottom surface of the inspection vehicle 3545), and a leak check is performed periodically. As in the case of FIG. 37D, in response to a request command from the system controller 3546, detection data from the sensor module 1260 is returned to the system controller 3546. The system controller 3546 can determine a location such as a gas leak or a water leak by collecting and analyzing sensor information from each composite module (unit) 3549. Also in the system of the embodiment of FIG. 37E, similarly to FIG. 37D, there is an effect that a wide range of abnormal portions can be found by a very easy method. The system controller 3546 may be fixedly installed along the installation line of the pipe instead of being mounted on the inspection car 3545.

  FIG. 37F shows an example in which a composite module (unit) is applied to a greenhouse cultivation apparatus. The greenhouse cultivation apparatus may be referred to as, for example, a greenhouse or a greenhouse. In the greenhouse 3550, for example, a system controller 3551 and a monitoring camera 3552 are installed. Then, the monitoring camera 3552 captures an image of the state of the plant in the greenhouse 3550, and can transmit the captured video signal to a monitor owned by the grower (owner).

  It is assumed that vegetables such as ginseng, radish or burdock are cultivated in the greenhouse 2550. In the case of such vegetables, the condition of underground growth cannot be judged only from the outside. Therefore, in the embodiment system shown in FIG. 37F, bar-shaped monitoring devices 3553a, 3553b, 3553c,... Incorporating a plurality of composite modules (units) are arranged in the ground.

  On the right side of FIG. 37F, an enlarged view of a bar-shaped monitoring device 3553c is shown as a representative. Here, a pentagonal portion in the bar-shaped monitoring device 3553c is a mounting plate of the monitoring device 3553c, and has a pointed tip that is easily inserted into the ground. A plurality of composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are provided in the longitudinal direction of the mounting plate. In each of the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5, for example, a sensor module 1260 capable of measuring the size of a nearby substance based on transmission and reception of ultrasonic waves is mounted. In addition, the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5 include, for example, a sensor module 1260 including a humidity sensor capable of measuring humidity. Then, based on the measurement results obtained from the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5, information on the growth (length) of the adjacent vegetables (carrots or radishes) is collected. The method of collecting the growth (length) information of vegetables (carrots or radishes) that are close to each other is not limited to ultrasonic waves. good. The humidity measurement data obtained from the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5 is effective for monitoring the state of moisture in the ground. Then, measurement data obtained based on the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 is transmitted to the system controller 3551 via the antenna ANT.

  The output data of the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are totaled by the system controller 3551. Then, since the totaling result is appropriately displayed on the monitor, the monitoring person can easily determine the harvest time. In addition, the monitoring person can monitor and monitor the summation result of the humidity measurement data obtained from the combined modules (units) FD1 to FD5, so that the monitoring person can know an appropriate watering time. In this way, good growth of the vegetables can be monitored.

  Further, inside the greenhouse 3550, a composite module (unit) 3554 including, for example, an infrared sensor and / or a high-frequency high-sensitivity microphone is arranged. By operating this composite module (unit) 3554 periodically, for example, it is possible to monitor the presence of pests and insects attached to vegetables.

  As an application example showing a system according to another embodiment, FIGS. 37G and 37H show an example of monitoring by combining a plurality of different types of composite modules (units). In particular, FIG. 37G is characterized in that “a combination that cannot be normally detected” is detected. Based on this, an effect that the abnormality can be detected accurately and efficiently can be obtained. FIG. 37H has a feature in that “detection of association between a plurality of different pieces of identification data” is performed. Based on this, the effect of improving the state detection accuracy is produced. By simultaneously obtaining sensor information from a plurality of different types of composite modules (units) as described above, there is an effect of improving the detection accuracy of a state change.

  First, a method of “detecting a combination that cannot be normally performed” will be described with reference to FIG. 37G. For example, if there is a weapon in a hospital or school (elementary school, junior high school, high school, university), police station, Imperial Palace, etc. (specifically, detection of metal reaction using metal detector) Can be detected as a combination. As a specific example, FIG. 37G shows one room in a hospital. In this room, for example, a bed 3560 for patients and a box 3561 for medical instruments are provided. Here, a composite module (unit) 3560a is mounted in the patient bed 3560. Similarly, a composite module (unit) 3561a is attached to the box 3561 of the medical instrument. The identification data of the bed 3560 is stored as the self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the composite module (unit) 3560a. In response to a request from a system controller 3562 installed outside, the identification data of the bed 3560 can be appropriately transmitted as a response. On the other hand, the identification data of the box 3561 of the medical device is stored as self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the composite module (unit) 3561a. In response to a request from a system controller 3562 installed outside, identification data of the box 3561 of the medical device can be transmitted as a reply. Based on this, the system controller 3562 can always grasp the combination of products existing in the hospital room. As described above, the system controller 3562 has a database of various products that are allowed to exist in the hospital room.

  Assume that a weapon 3565 such as a knife is brought into the hospital room. A composite module (unit) 3565a is also built in the weapon 3565 such as a knife. When the composite module (unit) 3565a transmits the self-attribute data 1793 (product identification data) stored in advance, the system controller 3562 recognizes that a product whose presence in the hospital room is not permitted appears. As a result, the system controller 3562 can promptly report the abnormal state to the security room, the monitoring quality, or the security company.

The above example shows an example of a hospital room, but it is not limited to this. The same idea can be applied to various areas such as the Imperial Palace, the Presidential Palace, the security area around the Prime Minister's Office, schools (elementary schools, junior high schools, high schools, universities, etc.), police stations, etc. And can be applied in the facility.
FIG. 37H shows another example in which a plurality of types of sense information obtained from a plurality of different composite modules 1295 (or units 1290) are combined and monitored. Here, an example is shown in which passenger 3570 travels from airport 3567 to airport 3568 by airplane 3569. Here, for example, a composite module (unit) 3570a is built in the belongings of the passenger such as a passport, a bag, a hat, and shoes, and a self-attribute data storage area 1793 in the composite module (unit) 3570a (see FIG. 7B). Is stored in advance. Similarly, a composite module (unit) 3573a is bonded to the carry bag 3573 owned by the passenger. The carry bag identification data is also recorded in advance in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 in the composite module (unit) 3573a.

  Then, when passenger 3570 boards airplane 3569, system controller 3571 collects identification data of passenger's belongings (baggage) 3572 and carry bag 3573. The plurality of pieces of identification data (the identification data of the belongings 3572 of the passenger and the identification data of the carry bag 3573) are associated with each other and recognized as essential combination identification data of the passenger 3570 by the system controller 3571.

  On the other hand, another system controller 3572 is installed in advance at the airport 3568 to which the passenger 3570 moves. When the passenger 3570 arrives at the destination airport 3568, a plurality of identification data (identification data of the belongings 3572 of the passenger and identification data of the carry bag 3573) associated with the passenger 3570 are transmitted via the Internet to the source system. The data is automatically transferred from the controller 3571 to the system controller 3572 installed at the destination. Then, the system controller 3572 independently accesses the composite module (unit) 3570a incorporated in the passenger's belongings such as passports, bags, hats, shoes, and the composite module (unit) 3573a incorporated in the carry bag 3573, The respective identification data (the identification data of the belongings 3572 of the passenger and the identification data of the carry bag 3573) are acquired.

Next, the plurality of identification data obtained from the composite modules (units) 3570a and 3573a are compared with the plurality of identification data obtained from the source system controller 3571 (the identification data of the personal belongings 3572 and the identification data of the carry bag 3573). I do. Accordingly, the destination system controller 3572 can determine whether or not the belongings of the passenger 3570 have been normally carried from the airport 3567 to the airport 3568.
Section 5.2.3 Example of application of section division method to social infrastructure field In this section 5.2.3, an example of section division in a case where section division in the social infrastructure field is applied will be described. The section division unit in the social infrastructure field tends to be larger than the scale described in section 5.1.3.

For example, when each section 1142 is made to correspond to each partition (room) in the building or each floor, the average size of the partition area in the building is larger than the average size of the room in the private house. Further, each section 1142 may be assigned to each door in the apartment house.
When section division is adapted to the social infrastructure field, the section structure to be divided may have a hierarchy. For example, in the case of the above-described collective housing, an upper section division may be made to correspond to each door as a first upper hierarchy, and a lower section division may be made to correspond according to the room arrangement in each house. Similarly, sections that are hierarchized for each divisional scale according to a predetermined area may be associated. For example, in Japan, Japan is divided by the unit of a city, prefecture, or prefecture (upper sections are made to correspond to the above units), and Tokyo is divided into a plurality of wards and cities. Some prefectures divide them into multiple cities and counties. Then, the middle section may be made to correspond to this division, and the lower section may be made to correspond to each address.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram schematically showing a map of a specific area. As described above, each section 1142 may correspond to each address. Alternatively, the section 1142 may be divided according to a predetermined function. An example will be described. In Japan, water pipes and wired communication lines (such as telephone lines and optical fibers) are sometimes installed underground directly under major arterial roads. In some cases, a power supply line is installed above the main arterial road. In this way, the division 1900 of the sections 1_1142-1 to 4_1142-4 may be performed for each area or at predetermined intervals along a main arterial road, water and sewage piping, a distribution power line, or a wired communication line. In the system of the present embodiment, a plurality of sensor modules 1260 or sensor / communication modules 1460 are arranged in the section 1142, and sensor information obtained therefrom is integrated or managed for each section 1142, so that roads in units of sections 1142 are provided. It is possible to extract the above deteriorated places, search for water leaks in the water supply and sewage systems, or search for disconnection points in the distribution power lines and wired communication lines. As a result, it becomes easier to more specifically extract a deteriorated place on a road, search for a water leakage point in water and sewage, and search for a broken point in a distribution power line or a wired communication line.

  As for the grasp of traffic congestion on a main arterial road such as an expressway, the division 1900 of the sections 1_1142-1 to 4_1142-4 may be performed along the main arterial road for each region or at predetermined intervals in the same manner as described above. Displaying the traffic congestion status for each section 1142 facilitates accurate grasp of the traffic congestion status. As a content relatively similar to that, the division method of the section 1142 may be used for grasping the congestion state in a predetermined area. In other words, when an event such as a soccer or baseball game or a concert is held, the area around the event venue is divided into a plurality of sections 1142, and by grasping the congestion state of each section, it is possible to more efficiently guide passers-by and police officers. Can be done.

As described above, in the system of the present embodiment, by integrating and managing the information collection results in units of sections 1142, not only is it easy to grasp the situation of a wide area, but also the convenience of maintenance processing of the social infrastructure system is increased. to be born.
As an application example in the social infrastructure field, which is somewhat similar to the above-described grasping of traffic congestion on major arterial roads, there is a logistics management correspondence. For example, there is an air transportation method that shortens the transportation time in order to transport seafood to a remote place while maintaining the freshness. However, from the viewpoint of reducing transportation costs, a method of securing freshness for a long time by remote transportation by vehicle is also being studied. As a result of the study, it has been found that temperature control during transportation is important for ensuring the freshness of seafood, vegetables and fruits.

  That is, since the oxidation reaction rate and corrosion rate inside the seafood, vegetables and fruits depend on the ambient temperature, from this viewpoint, it is desirable to set the storage temperature of the seafood, vegetables and fruits low. On the other hand, when a fish is placed in a sub-zero environment, blood inside the body freezes and expands, causing a clear decrease in freshness. Similarly, in the case of vegetables and fruits, the volume expansion due to freezing of the moisture attached to the surface or the moisture contained therein causes a clear decrease in freshness. Therefore, in remote transportation by vehicle, it is necessary to keep the temperature of fish, shellfish, vegetables and fruits in the refrigerated vehicle within the range of “0 ± 1 ° C.”.

  For this reason, a temperature sensor is installed in a container for seafood, vegetables and fruits, and the air conditioning in the refrigerator car can be controlled based on temperature information obtained from each container. The temperature sensor in this case corresponds to the sensor / communication module 1460. Then, the section 1142 is made to correspond to “the environment in each refrigerator car”.

  However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to the above, and another section dividing method may be adopted. In the system according to the present embodiment, as described in section 4.4, the position of the emission source of the radio wave transmitted from each sensor / communication module 1460 can be detected. Therefore, using the position detection technology for the sensor / communication module 1460 that detects the temperature, it is possible to track the transport location of each of the seafood, vegetables, and fruit packaging containers in real time. Further, based on the description in Section 2.3, it is possible to identify each packaging container by using the IEEE extended address SEXADRS (or the transmitting-side IP address information SIPADRS described in Section 2.4) on the transmitting side in FIG. 12A (e). Become. Therefore, by combining the above technologies, it is possible not only to manage the transport route and required transport time of each seafood, vegetable and fruit packaging container, but also to delay transportation due to traffic congestion along the transportation route of the refrigerated vehicle containing this packaging container. Can be managed in real time. As a result, the refrigerated vehicle may be instructed on whether or not to avoid traffic congestion, taking into account the pre-storing time of the packing container before transporting the vehicle.

  When the system according to the present embodiment is applied to the above-described physical distribution management, a method of selecting a physical communication medium (communication media) used for the in-system network line 1782 in FIG. For example, in the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.11n standard corresponding to medium-range wireless communication, the effective cell radius is said to be several hundred meters. Therefore, when the medium-range wireless communication is adopted as this physical communication medium, it is necessary to set the physical size of each of the systems α_1132 and β_1134 to 1 km or less. On the other hand, the cell radius of IEEE 802.16e-2005 corresponding to long-distance wireless communication is 1 to 3 km. Therefore, when medium-range wireless communication is adopted as this physical communication medium, it is desirable to set the physical size of each of the systems α_1132 and β_1134 to about 3 km.

  Then, in each of the systems α_1132 and β_1134 of the above size, the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be spatially divided into multiple sections along the transportation route (for example, the main arterial road in FIG. 35). In this way, managing the transport locations of the seafood, vegetables and fruits for each packaging container for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m has the effect of allowing the location of the cause of the delivery delay due to traffic congestion along the transport route, for example, to be grasped in detail. . Then, by notifying the result to another delivery vehicle and instructing avoidance of a traffic congestion point, smooth transportation of the other delivery vehicle becomes possible.

  Another application example of the method of applying the system of the present embodiment to the physical distribution management will be described below. In this application example, the “simple plug-in / plug-out method using the position detection of the composite module” described in section 4.2 is used. In this case, short-range wireless communication is adopted as a physical communication medium of the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A) in the same system.

  Here, the inside of the large refrigerator that stores the seafood, vegetables, and fruit packaging containers having the built-in sensor / communication module 1460 for detecting the temperature before shipment is made to correspond to the system α_1132. In addition, since the inside of this space is finely divided and sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are defined, the storage location of the packing container in the large refrigerator is automatically managed. Then, when this packing container is shipped, it is taken out of the large refrigerator. As a result, automatic plug-out processing from the system α_1132 is performed, and the shipping date and time are managed in the system controller α_1126.

  Next, the inside of the cargo space in the refrigerator car for transporting the packing container is made to correspond to the system β_1134. In addition, a section 1142 is also finely defined in the space therein. The system controller β_1128 installed therein collects temperature information from the sensor / communication module 1460 and controls the air conditioner in the refrigerator car.

  In the method described in section 4.4, only the location of the communication module 1202 corresponding to wireless communication is detected, and the position of the sensor module 1260 in the sensor / communication module 1460 and the driving in the drive / communication module 1470 are detected. The position of module 1270 has not been detected. Therefore, when the temperature control accuracy in the refrigerator car is high and the temperature control for each package is not necessarily required, the communication module 1202 corresponding to short-range wireless communication may be used instead of the sensor / communication module 1460. good.

  Then, the interior of the warehouse (large refrigerator) to which the refrigerator car is delivered is made to correspond to the system γ. Since the system controller γ implemented in this system γ shares information with the above-mentioned system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, the information such as the delivery delay information, the time required for pre-storage in the warehouse before shipping, the internal temperature during transportation, etc. From the information, the freshness of seafood, vegetables and fruits in the packaging can be predicted. Since the freshness after delivery can be predicted in this manner, the effect of improving the easiness of pricing the corresponding seafood, vegetables and fruits, and the easiness of selecting the delivery destination thereafter can be improved.

  Further, as another application example using the “simple plug-in / plug-out method using position detection of a composite module”, the present invention may be applied to “automatic payment at the time of passing through a gate or purchasing a product”. Further, as a composite module used in this application example, a sensor / communication module 1460 compatible with voice input may be used. At present, in Japan, near-field wireless communication such as FeliCa (a coined word combining Felicity and Card), which is a non-contact IC card standard, is used to control entrances and exits at the entrances and exits of designated rooms and to pass through railway-related ticket gates. Used for ticket processing or automatic payment when purchasing products. However, since near-field wireless communication is used for communication of the non-contact type IC card, it takes time and effort to remove the non-contact type IC card from a storage location when the user uses it.

  On the other hand, by changing from near-field wireless communication to near-field wireless communication (or medium-range wireless communication), there is an advantage that the user can save the trouble of taking out from a portable (storage) place such as a bag, a bag, or a pocket at the time of use. The physical shape of the package on which the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is mounted does not necessarily need to be a card, and any shape that is easy to carry such as a necklace or tie pin is allowed. Then, the system α_1132 area is set only in the vicinity of the entrance door of the predetermined room, in the vicinity of the entrance of a railway-related ticket gate (gate), or in the vicinity of a vending machine or a purchase window of a store. In the method described in section 4.4, only the location of the communication module 1202 corresponding to wireless communication is detected, and the position of the sensor module 1260 in the sensor / communication module 1460 and the driving in the drive / communication module 1470 are detected. The position of module 1270 has not been detected. Accordingly, with respect to the entrance control of a predetermined room entrance and the passage control of a railway-related ticket gate (gate), a single communication module 1202 corresponding to wireless communication may be used instead of the sensor / communication module 1460-5.

  The "plug-in processing" is automatically performed when the user comes in front of a predetermined entrance door, immediately before a ticket gate (gate), or when approaching a vending machine or a purchase window of a store (section 4.2). ) Is performed. Thereafter, when the user leaves the place, the “plug-out process” is automatically performed. The system controller α_1126 manages the passage history and the purchase settlement history of the user's gate (gateway and ticket gate). Further, by utilizing the position detection of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 (see section 4.2), it is possible to automatically recognize an emergency such as an abnormal fall from a user's platform onto a track.

  In particular, in front of a predetermined entrance door or at a pass of a ticket gate (gate), a passing user may place his hand over a predetermined place for personal verification, or place his finger. In this case, the personal authentication method is not limited to palm verification or fingerprint verification, and personal verification may be performed by imaging a vein pattern using near-infrared light reflected near the palm or finger surface. Further, personal identification may be performed by face recognition without using a hand or finger. Here, prior to the user's personal verification, the above-described plug-in processing is performed when the user comes in front of a predetermined entrance door or immediately before a pass of a ticket gate (gate). Immediately after this plug-in, the unique identification information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 or the communication module 1202 (for example, the IEEE extension address EXADRS in FIG. 12A (e)) is used, and the system controller α_1126 (see FIG. 8A or 8B). ) Accesses the server n_1116-n and obtains information for personal verification (authentication) (palm / fingerprint / vein pattern / face pattern, etc.) in advance and stores it. The personal verification (authentication) information obtained in advance is compared with the information obtained in front of a predetermined entrance door or at a pass of a ticket gate (gate). Here, only the user who matches the collation information is passed through the entrance door or the ticket gate (gate), and the collation information is discarded. As described above, since the system controller α_1126 acquires the information for personal verification (authentication) in advance immediately after the plug-in, there is an effect that quick personal verification (authentication) can be performed.

  If the user needs to be confirmed at the time of electronic payment, the user is required to emit a voice (permission word, etc.) indicating permission. When the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8B receives the voice (or generated word) information from the sensor / communication module 1460-5, “user voiceprint collation” is performed using the information from the server n_1116-n. Then, personal authentication is performed by collation confirmation between the above-mentioned voice print and IP address information (FIG. 13B) owned by the sensor / communication module 1460-5 or information corresponding to the IEEE extension address EXADRS. Next, the system controller α_1126 may estimate / determine whether or not the word uttered by the user indicates “willingness to agree to the electronic payment” by the voice recognition technology. When all the above confirmations are completed, communication between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n related to the user's bank account management is performed, and the electronic payment is completed.

  If the portable system according to the present embodiment is applied to any of the above-described "distribution management" / "gate passage management" / "electronic payment at the time of product purchase", the corresponding sensor / communication module 1460-5 can be manufactured at very low cost. The effect is that it can be distributed in large quantities. Conventionally, GPS (Global Positioning System) -related components used for position detection are very expensive, and it has been difficult to distribute them in large quantities. In contrast, in the present embodiment, since the position is detected using the radio wave normally emitted by the sensor / communication module 1460-5, no additional cost is required for detecting the position of the sensor / communication module 1460-5. Therefore, this sensor / communication module 1460-5 can be manufactured at very low cost.

  As an application example in the social infrastructure field up to now, mainly the utilization of the sensor / communication module 1460 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the drive / communication module 1470 may be used for remote control of a mobile robot having a built-in movement control unit. For example, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are defined for each room in a hotel or apartment complex. The system controller α_1126 controls the position of the drive / communication module 1470 using the position detection technique, and moves the mobile robot to the entrance of a predetermined room. The mobile robot may be made to clean the inside of a predetermined room, or may be transported a predetermined load.

In addition to the above application examples, the present invention can be applied to agriculture. That is, in a plant factory, for example, the system is divided into different systems α_1132 and β_1134 for each type of growing plant, and grows under different growth conditions. Furthermore, the same type of plant may be divided into sections 1142 for each growing place, and the amount of light illumination, the amount of supply / supply of water, the temperature and the humidity may be controlled for each section, and the growing state of the plant may be controlled.
5.3 Examples of application to the healthcare field Section 5.3.1 Examples of application of the wide area network system to the healthcare field Examples of the application of the wide area network system shown in FIG. Under the consignment of the corresponding wholesaler B1_1104-1, a service provider B_1112-2 corresponding to a specific public institution obtains a patient's disease name and symptoms and individual gene information from a system α_1132 corresponding to a hospital or a local medical institution. We can imagine a way to collect and collect and organize information about diseases throughout the country. In this case, the public organization (service provider B_1112-2) accesses the system controller α_1126 that manages a database in a hospital or a local medical institution (system α_1132) via a network, and automatically collects necessary information. . The analysis result obtained is reported to the state (wholesaler B1_1104-1) and made public to the public via the Internet or by means of news such as newspapers / magazines.
Section 5.3.2 Example of application of composite module to healthcare field Many sensors / communication modules 1460 having the structure shown in FIG. 5 are lightweight, compact, power-saving (no external power supply is required), and inexpensive. It has the merit of. Therefore, taking advantage of these advantages, the sensor / communication module 1460 can be directly mounted on the human body of the moving user. As a specific mounting method, the sensor / communication module 1460 may be directly mounted on a human body using a mounting member such as a wristwatch, glasses, a tie pin, or the like, or may be fixed to clothes. . In addition, the sensor / communication module 1460 combined with a temperature sensor, a pulse sensor, a respiration sensor (acceleration sensor), an oxygen concentration sensor in the bloodstream, and the like is attached to a patient or a healthy person, and the effect of tracing a health condition in real time can be obtained. Yes. Furthermore, by analyzing the detection result in real time by the system controller α_1126 installed in each hospital room or individual living room, and notifying the doctor or nurse only when abnormal, there is an effect that efficient care for patients and healthy persons can be realized. . Furthermore, since only necessary information can be selected and communicated to the server n_1116-n (FIG. 1) installed in each hospital, the efficiency of data management and data processing in the server n_1116-n can be increased.

  The method described above describes a method of mounting the composite module directly on a human body. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and a composite module (for example, the composite module 7_1295-7 in FIG. 2) may be directly inserted / penetrated or embedded in a human body. In this case, instead of installing the composite module 7_1295-7 alone in the network system α_1132, the composite module 7_1295-7 is incorporated in a human body (specific user) and moves together with the human body (specific user). However, in the method of mounting the composite module on a human body, a mental burden is imposed on the user when the composite module is attached or detached (the user feels troublesome). On the other hand, by inserting / invading / embedding (incorporating) the composite module in the human body in advance as described later, the user-related information can be appropriately obtained on the system controller α_1126 side without burdening the user with the burden of attaching and detaching the composite module. There is.

  First, a method of embedding the composite module into the human body will be described. There is a method of implanting the composite module 1295 shown in FIG. 4A (b) in the vicinity of the suture location immediately after the incision operation on the patient. Here, there is a risk that the incision site or the extirpated (excised) site of the affected part may be purulent or may undergo internal bleeding after the operation. Therefore, it is important as a post-operative procedure to find out suppuration and internal bleeding at the site of removal (cutting) of the affected part as soon as possible and take good action. If bacterium is mixed into an incision site or an extirpated (cutting) site at a site to cause suppuration, the pH value (hydrogen ion index) of the suppuration site changes. Accordingly, a sensor / communication module 1460 having a built-in pH sensor module for detecting a pH value or a blood sensor module may be used as the composite module 1295 to be embedded in the suturing location.

  In this case, the period of follow-up after the operation need not be so long. Therefore, as described in Section 1.6, it is possible to control the sensor / communication module 1460 to operate only during the postoperative observation period using the life management data 1794 or the operation period management data 1795 in FIG. 7B. good. In addition, the service life (battery life) of the power storage module (battery) 1554 in the sensor / communication module 1460 shown in FIG. 5 is set to be short beforehand. The communication module 1460 may be disabled. As a result, unnecessary radio wave transmission from the combined module 1295 (sensor / communication module 1460) after the postoperative follow-up period is prevented, and the burden on the system controller α_1126 that controls / manages network communication in the network system α_1132 can be reduced. The effect is born.

  Next, a method of inserting or invading the composite module into the human body will be described. In this case, the composite module 1295 having the form shown in FIG. 4A (b) is enclosed in a capsule, and the user swallows the capsule together with water, soft drink, or the like. For example, by lowering the selling price of the soft drink mixed with the capsule, the composite module 1295 can enter the body while reducing the mental burden on the user. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a user with a chronic illness regularly takes a medicine, the user may be asked to swallow the capsule together. Then, the capsule contained in the composite module 1295 stays in the body of the user until excreted in a toilet or the like, and can continuously transmit user information. Also, as described above, unnecessary radio wave transmission from the combined module 1295 after excretion can be prevented by utilizing the life management data 1794, the operation period management data 1795, or the battery life of the power storage module (battery) 1554.

  Examples of the application of this method include health management of the user, early detection of onset / onset, and management of the user's daily exercise status. First, an example of application to user health management and early detection of disease onset / onset will be described. In this case, the sensor module 1260 of FIG. 4B (b) is used as the other function module 1440 having a function other than the communication of FIG. 4A (b). As an example of the sensor module 1260, a temperature sensor module for measuring the temperature of the body may be used.

  Conventionally, as a method for early detection of a patient suffering from influenza, for example, there is a method of installing a sensor for measuring a body surface temperature of a user using infrared rays at an airport gate or the like. However, if the user passes the temperature sensor installed before the body temperature rises due to the onset of influenza (that is, immediately before the onset), there is a risk that the influenza patient will be missed. On the other hand, by tracking changes in body temperature over time using a capsule with a built-in temperature sensor module 1260, there is an effect of improving the accuracy of finding influenza patients.

  Further, as another example of the sensor module 1260 built in the capsule, a sensor module capable of measuring a blood glucose level may be used. In this method, the carbohydrate content in blood is measured from a near-infrared light spectral pattern obtained from blood. Diabetic patients tend to have higher blood sugar levels (sugar content in blood) than healthy subjects. When the blood sugar level of a diabetic patient exceeds an allowable range, prompt measures such as medication are required. Therefore, the capsule incorporating the blood glucose sensor module constantly monitors the blood glucose level in the body of the patient, so that it is possible to quickly detect abnormalities in the blood glucose level, thereby improving the therapeutic effect of the diabetic patient.

  Conventionally, in hospitals and facilities, nurses regularly measure the temperature and blood glucose level of inpatients. In contrast, by inviting patients to take the capsule containing the combined module 1295 on a regular basis, they can not only take immediate measures against sudden changes in the patient's condition, but also save the labor costs associated with measuring body temperature and blood glucose levels. It also has the effect of increasing the efficiency of facility management. Further, by combining the position detection of the composite module 1295 by the method described in Section 4.4 with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, there is also an effect that a wandering of a dementia patient in a hospital or facility can be detected.

  Also, as a part of the self-attribute data 1793 in the composite module 1295, the “name of the person who took the medicine” may be recorded together with the “name of the medicine” (see the corresponding section in section 1.6). Here, a camera installed in a hospital or facility is constantly monitored to manage the timing at which inpatients and residents take specified drugs. Then, when the inpatient or resident drinks the designated medicine, the system controller α_1126 records the above information in the composite module 1295. This makes it possible to constantly manage the medication status of inpatients and residents, which has the effect of preventing forgetting to drink.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of utilization for managing the exercise state of the user on a daily basis. In this case, an acceleration sensor may be used as the sensor module 1260 built in the capsule. By combining the output of the acceleration sensor incorporated in the body with the position detection information of the composite module 1295, the exercise state of the user can be sequentially monitored in real time. When the daily exercise amount of the managed user does not reach the predetermined target value, a suggestion of a coping method is given to the user from the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 or the display unit in the system controller β_1128. Presented to you.

  In addition, an example of an embodiment system in which “detection of a combination that cannot be normally performed” described with reference to FIG. Generally, a combination of a plurality of drugs is often prescribed to a patient. In this case, it is possible to automatically determine whether different medicines can be mixed. For example, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) is mixed in each of the medicine tablets. As described above, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) is enclosed in a capsule made of a material harmless to the human body. Then, if the capsule is taken out of the body simultaneously with excretion in the toilet of the patient, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) does not affect the human body. The capsule containing the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed in the medicine tablet as described above also stops emitting radio waves when it comes out of the body in the same manner as described above.

  The composite module 1295 (unit 1290) includes a communication module 1660 as shown in FIG. 4A. As shown in FIG. 7B, self-attribute data 1793 is recorded in the communication module 1660 in advance. In the system example of this embodiment, the identification data of the medicine is stored in the self-attribute data 1793.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the memory unit 1232 in the dedicated medicine test system controller α_1126 for examining a plurality of prescribed medicines has a data table of medicines that can be combined in advance and a medicine table of medicines that pose health problems. A data table indicating the combination is recorded. Then, at the moment when the patient or the dispensed pharmacist has a plurality of prescribed medicines and passes in front of the medicine inspection system controller α_1126, it is possible to quickly and easily determine whether or not the medicines can be combined.

  In the system according to the present embodiment, as described in section 4.4, the arrangement locations of all units 1290 or composite modules 1295 can be detected in real time. Therefore, when the compound module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed with the medicine passes through a predetermined place, the system controller α_1126 for medicine inspection appropriately detects the situation. Then, the drug test system controller α_1126 was prescribed by requesting the self-attribute data 1793 (drug identification data) to the compound module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed with the drug from the drug test system controller α_1126. The contents of a plurality of drugs can be monitored as appropriate. By referring the medicine information collected by the medicine inspection system controller α_1126 to the above-mentioned data table, it is possible to easily extract a combination of medicines incompatible with each other. When an inappropriate combination of medicines is found, a warning is given to the user or pharmacist by display or voice as appropriate.

  Conventionally, a data table showing combinations of medicines that pose health problems is managed for each dispensing pharmacy or each hospital clinic. Also, in Japan, there is a dedicated “medicine notebook” for each patient, and this is a system that allows the user to know the history of medications taken in the past. Therefore, by using the medicine notebook, a pharmacist can easily determine whether or not an inappropriate medicine is to be swallowed. Therefore, by referring to the data table and the medicine notebook, it is possible to easily confirm the mixing of incompatible medicines. However, when the dispensing pharmacy or the hospital's medical office becomes very crowded and the number of patients waiting for the medicine increases, the pharmacist cannot afford to refer to the data table each time. In such a case, the chance of performing an improper medicine swallowing discrimination based on the memory of the pharmacist increases. As a result, there is no risk that a pharmacist may inadvertently prescribe an incorrect combination of drugs due to a wrong memory.

  When the system application example of the present embodiment described above is used, it is not necessary for the pharmacist to manually refer to the data table. As a result, not only can the dispensing efficiency of the dispensing pharmacy be significantly improved, but also the effect of automatically checking the mixing of the medicines at a very high speed and with high accuracy can be obtained. In addition, in a pharmacy or a medical office of a hospital, since dispensing is performed manually (pharmacist), there is always a risk of dispensing errors. On the other hand, by using the system application example of the present embodiment, it is possible to detect a dispensing error with high accuracy. As a result, there is also an effect that the degree of security of the patient in taking the drug is greatly improved.

In this section 5.3.2, as a method of inserting the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) into the body, the method of incorporating the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) in the capsule has been described. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and any means may be used. For example, a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) composed of one chip (or a hybrid chip) may be laminated (or coated) with a material harmless to the human body, instead of being put in a capsule.
Section 5.3.3 Example of application of section division method to healthcare field As an example of application of the section division method to the healthcare field, similar to section 5.2.3, section 1142 is divided into ward floor units and hospital room units. The division may be performed, or the section 1142 may be divided in medical units of a ward. In the system of the present embodiment, various sensor information obtained from the information may be integrated / managed for each section 1142. This makes it possible to grasp the frequency of nurse calls and the frequency of occurrence of patients whose symptoms suddenly worsen, for example, as a situation grasp for each section by hierarchy. By reflecting the grasped result in a staffing plan such as a nurse, there is an effect that the quality of the patient care service in the hospital can be improved.

  On the other hand, as an example of application to the healthcare field, the sections may be divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m for each unit in the human body. Here, as sense information about the human body, various kinds of sense information such as local body temperature, local sweating amount, local skeletal muscle tone, local intravascular oxygen concentration change, and local pulse state are included. can get. By integrating / managing these various types of sense information for each section 1142, an abnormal part can be easily grasped in real time, so that there is an effect that it is easy to extract a rapidly deteriorated symptom part and grasp a patient's condition.

While some embodiments of the invention have been described, these embodiments have been presented by way of example only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the inventions. These new embodiments can be implemented in other various forms, and various omissions, replacements, and changes can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention. These embodiments and their modifications are included in the scope and gist of the invention, and are also included in the invention described in the claims and their equivalents.
The following appends the claims of the original application of the present application.
(Claim 1) A first connection to a network and a second connection to a predetermined module including a sensor function or a driving function;
A signal processing unit connected to the first connection unit and the second connection unit;
A memory unit connected to the signal processing unit;
A unit including a processor that controls at least one of the signal processing unit and the memory unit,
The signal processing unit operates based on the first application,
A unit that modifies, changes, adds, or updates the first application when a change in the purpose of use of the unit, a change in a use environment, or a change in operation mode is required.
(Claim 2) After the modification, change, addition, or update of the first application for the unit is performed,
The unit according to claim 1, wherein the unit performs an adaptive operation in a predetermined area including the unit.
(Claim 3) The memory unit stores life management data and / or operation period management data,
3. The unit according to claim 2, wherein the processor limits the operation of the unit based on the life management data and / or the operation period management data.
(Claim 4) A first connection to a network and a second connection to a predetermined module including a sensor function or a driving function;
A signal processing unit connected to the first connection unit and the second connection unit;
A memory unit connected to the signal processing unit;
A unit including a processor that controls at least one of the signal processing unit and the memory unit,
The signal processing unit operates based on the first application,
The first application is associated with a first system controller;
Communication is performed between the second system controller different from the first system controller and the unit,
A second application is specified by the second system controller based on the communication;
A unit according to the second application, wherein the processing in the signal processing unit is changed from the first processing content to the second processing content.
(Claim 5) In response to a command from the second system controller or a change request to the second system controller from the unit,
5. The unit according to claim 4, wherein a change from the first application to the second application is performed.
(Claim 6) When the unit moves from a predetermined area to another different area,
The unit of claim 5, wherein a change to the second application is performed.
(7) The unit according to (6), wherein the change to the second application is executed based on movement in a manufacturing process in a predetermined factory.
(Claim 8) One or more units having a network communication function are present in the network system,
One said unit is capable of communicating information with the system controller or other units;
The unit includes a first connection unit, a second connection unit, a signal processing unit, a memory unit, and a processor,
The first connection unit is connected to the network system;
The second connection unit is connected to a predetermined module including a sensor function or a drive function,
The signal processing unit is connected to the first connection unit and the second connection unit,
The memory unit is connected to the signal processing unit,
The processor controls at least one of the signal processing unit and the memory unit,
The signal processing unit operates based on an application,
A client system to which software for executing a new application is transferred via the first connection unit based on information related to the change of the application provided by the system controller.
(Claim 9) A modification or change, addition, or update of an application in the unit is executed based on the transfer of the software,
9. The client system according to claim 8, wherein the predetermined module operates adaptively in the network system.
(Claim 10) The system controller virtually forms a control area of the unit,
Modification or change, addition, or update of the application in the unit based on the transfer of the software is performed,
9. The client system according to claim 8, wherein efficient management, control, and information collection are performed for each unit.
(Claim 11) When a change in the purpose of use or a change in the use environment of the unit or the necessity of switching the operation mode occurs,
9. The client system according to claim 8, wherein the system controller provides the unit with information relating to the change of the application.
(Claim 12) The memory unit includes an application storage area,
11. The client system according to claim 9, wherein after executing modification, change, addition, or update of the application, common application software that is continuously used without being changed is stored in the application storage area. 12.
(Claim 13) The memory unit stores life management data and / or operation period management data,
13. The client system according to claim 8, wherein the processor limits the operation of the unit based on the life management data and / or the operation period management data.
(Claim 14) A method for controlling a unit including a first connection unit, a second connection unit, a signal processing unit, a memory unit, and a processor,
The first connection unit is connected to a network system;
The second connection unit is connected to a predetermined module including a sensor function or a drive function,
The signal processing unit is connected to the first connection unit and the second connection unit,
The memory unit is connected to the signal processing unit,
The processor controls at least one of the signal processing unit and the memory unit,
The signal processing unit operates based on an application,
A method for controlling a unit to which software for executing a new application is transferred via the first connection unit based on information provided from outside and related to the change of the application.
(Claim 15) Modification or change, addition, or update of an application in the unit is performed based on the transfer of the software,
The method of controlling a unit according to claim 14, wherein the predetermined module operates adaptively in the network system.
(Claim 16) When a change in the purpose of use or a change in the use environment for the unit or a need to switch the operation mode occurs,
The method of controlling a unit according to claim 15, wherein information related to the change of the application is provided.
(Claim 17) The memory unit includes an application storage area,
16. The unit control method according to claim 15, wherein common application software that is continuously used without being changed is stored in the application storage area after the modification, change, addition, or update of the application is performed.
(Claim 18) The memory unit stores life management data and / or operation period management data,
18. The unit control method according to claim 14, wherein the processor limits the operation of the unit based on the life management data and / or the operation period management data.
(19) The unit control method according to any one of (14) to (18), wherein the application is modified, changed, added, or updated based on movement in a manufacturing process in a predetermined factory.

1102 Wholesaler A
1104-1--2 Wholesalers B1-B2
1112-1-3-3 Service Providers AC
1114 Information sharing or resource coordination 1116-1-n Servers 1-n
1118-1 to -n Database 1122-1 to -3 Domains 1 to 3
1124 Smart Meter
1126 System controller α
1128 System controller β
1132 System α
1134 System β
1142-1--m Section 1-m
1152 predetermined product generation unit 1154 predetermined product storage unit 1202-1 to 10 communication module 1206 emission amount monitoring unit 1208 inflow amount monitoring unit 1212 emission amount control unit 1214 inflow amount control unit 1216 emission amount monitoring unit 1218 inflow amount monitoring unit 1220 (car ) Battery 1222 Sensor module 1226 Display module 1230 Processor 1232, 1242, 1244, 1246 Memory section 1234 User I / F section 1240-1 to -3 Device controller (processor)
1242 Memory unit 1244 Memory unit 1246 Memory unit 1248 Memory unit 1250-1 to -5 Device
1260-1 to -9 Sensor module 1270-1 to -4 Actuator module 1290-1 to -7 Unit 1295-1 to -7 Composite module 1300 Router (gateway) / Built-in battery 1330 Processor 1406, 1416 Emission amount monitor / Communication module 1408, 1418 Inflow monitoring / communication module 1412 Emission control / communication module 1414 Inflow control / communication module 1440 Other function module (functions other than communication)
1444 Remote cooperation 1450-1 to -4 Device
1460-1 to -5 Sensor / Communication Module 1465 Processor / Communication Module 1470-1-2 Actuator / Communication Module 1475 Memory / Communication Module 1478 Display / Communication Module 1480 Antenna 1490 Bus Line 1552 (Solar) Power Generation Module 1554 Storage module (battery)
1560 Near-field communication module 1602 Input terminal 1604 Output terminal 1606 Voltage output terminal 1608 Infrared light emitting element 1610 Variable resistance section 1614 Conduction / disconnection switching section 1618 Predetermined voltage generation section 1620 Setting resistance value storage section 1624 Setting state storage section 1628 Setting voltage storage section 1644 Format conversion unit 1648 Infrared light emission drive circuit 1660 Communication module 1660-1 Insulating substrate on which communication module is formed 1666 Communication module with built-in antenna 1670 Actuator module 1680 Processor module 1690 Memory module 1700 Communication control unit 1710 Interface unit 1734 processor 1736 processor 1738 processor 1740 management information (table) related information recording area 174 2, 1744, 1746, 1748 Management information (table)
1752 Communication module for the same system 1758 Communication module for the outside system 1764 Communication module 1766-1 to n Other function module 1768 Communication module 1770 Radio 1772 Antenna unit 1774 Antenna connection unit 1776 Power supply unit 1778 External module connection unit 1780 Signal processing unit 1772 Network line within the same system 1788 Network line outside the system 1790 Memory unit 1791 Application change software 1792 Application storage unit 1793 Self attribute data 1794 Life management data 1795 Operating period management data 1796 Sensor module management data 1797 Drive module management data 1799 Security target data 1810 Exchange Information (table)
1830, (ESV) communication access control information 1840, (EPC) type identification information of exchange information 1852 command (command issuance)
1854 Result report (status)
1872 Answer request (request)
1874 response
1894 Periodic / Aperiodic Report 1900 Area division status of main arterial roads or water and sewage pipes, distribution power lines, wired communication lines, etc. 1914 Physical layer frame generator 1918 Physical layer frame analyzer 1924 Address information generator 1928 Address information Extraction unit 1934 Content setting unit 1938 Content extraction unit 1940 Address information I / F (interface) unit 1950 Content information I / F (interface) unit 1960 Processor 2002 Communication module 2030 Processor 2032 Memory unit 2082 Network line in same domain 2100 Radio source Detection of direction or detection of intensity or phase 2310 elapsed time 2320 state item 2330 state probability 2340 user action item 2350 user action probability 2360 user required Request item 2370 User request probability 2600 Unit management pseudo drive 2610 List data folder 2612 Device correspondence folder 2614 Composite module correspondence folder 2616-1--m Unit within unit management folder 2622 Sensor / communication module correspondence folder 2624 Drive / communication module correspondence Folder 2626 Processor / Communication Module Support Folder 2628 Memory / Communication Module Support Folder 2630 Other Function / Communication Module Support Folder 2634 Binary Data Support Folder 2638 Multi-Value Data Support Folder 2710 Antenna 2720 Amplifier and Signal Processing Circuit 2730 Stealth Board 2734 Fine Surface Metal plate layer with fine uneven structure 2738 Weakly conductive organic layer with fine uneven structure on both front and back 2760 Pola La antenna 2800 incident radio wave 2920 resistors 2940-1, -2 voltage differentiator 2960 adder 3010 processor (hard portion)
3012 bus line 3014 recording medium (hardware part)
3015 In-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3016 Information communication execution unit 3017 Outside-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3018 Connection unit 3020 BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) control area 3022 Device driver area 3021 In-system connection correspondence communication control unit 3024 Recording medium control unit 3025 Communication driver area for internal connection 3030 Communication driver area 3027 Communication driver area for external connection 3028 Communication control unit 3029 External system communication control unit 3030 OS (Operating System) layer 3034 Management of unit in system / Control area
(Virtual device driver area)
3040 API (Application Programming Interface) command passing boundary 3045 API (Application Programming Interface) command 3050 Application software 3120 JVM (Java Virtual Machine)
3140 Unit management / control related method group 3144 File class instance method group 3148 Main method 3150 System unit management / control class 3154 File class 3158 Application class 3160 Class group 3170, 3174 Built-in (import)
3188 Program steps 3190, 3194 Reference 3501 Supermarket store area 3502 Supermarket cash register area 3503 Supermarket exit area 3505 Shoes 3506 Milk 3507 Bag 3511a, 3511b Cash register 3512 Monitoring device 3521 Refrigerator 3522 System controller 3523 Complex module (unit)
3525 Display 3531 Composite module (unit)
3532 System controller 3533 Smartphone 3540 Wall to be inspected 3541a, 3541b, 3541c Steel frame 3542, 3543 Composite module (unit)
3542a, 3543b Antenna of compound module (unit) 3545 Inspection vehicle 3546 System controller 3548 Tube such as gas pipe, water pipe, fire hydrant pipe 3549 Compound module (unit)
3550 Greenhouse 3551 System controller 3552 Monitoring camera 3553a, 3553b, 3553c Bar-shaped monitoring device with built-in composite module (unit) 3554 Composite module (unit)
3560 Patient bed 3561 Medical instrument box 3560a, 3561a, 3565a Composite module (unit)
3562 System controller 3565 Knife and other weapons 3567, 3568 Airport 3569 Airplane 3570 Passenger 3570a, 3573a Composite module (unit)
3571, 3572 System controller 3573 Carry bag 3581 System controller 3581a Internet connection unit 3581b Protocol recognition unit 3581c Communication standard recognition unit 3581d Data processing unit 3581e Data detection unit 3581f Communication standard matching format setting unit 3581g Internet matching data output unit 3581 Composite module 3584a Access Point 3584b Base station 3585 Internet ADRIEEEIEEE 802.15.4 compliant chip set address
(8 bytes)
APL02, APL06 Communication middleware layer APLDT Communication middleware data CEDT Extended transmission data CM-1 First-time control / processing information CM-n Nth-time control / processing information CMI Control / processing-related information
CMTID Composite module type identification information (6 bits)
(Complex Module Type Identifier)
CMST compound module structure information (1 bit)
CRC error check CT2DT Binary transmission data section CTMDT Multi-level transmission data section DEXADRS IEEE extension address on the receiving side
(Destination IEEE Extension Address)
DEOJ Receiver device identification information (3 bytes)
DIDC Device identification code within the same type (1 byte)
(Device Identification Code among the same Device Type)
DIPADRS Receiver IP address (16 bytes)
(Destination Internet Protocol Address)
DPANID PAN-specific identification information on the receiving side
(Destination Personal Area Network Identifier)
DTC device type code (1 byte)
DTGC device type group code (1 byte)
(Device Type (Class) Group Code)
E-DT E-format data (exchange information 1810)
E-HD E-format header [1X81h]
EDT individual exchange information (PDC specified size)
EPC, (1840) Type identification information of exchange information (1 byte)
ESV, (1830) Communication access control information (1 byte)
EXADRS IEEE Extension Address
EXDT extension data EXADADRS extension IEEE extension address (1 byte)
(Expanded IEEE Extension Address)
EXL06 Extended application layer FC1-FC5, FD1-FD5 Composite module (unit)
HPLMT Passable node remaining number information (Hop Limit) (1 byte)
IPADRS IP address IPCLS communication class information (1 byte)
IPLBL Communication type label information (2.5 bytes)
IPPKT IP packet related information (8 bytes)
IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6DU IPv6 data / payload IPv6HD IPv6 header IPVRS version information (4 bits)
LIPv6DU IPv6 data / payload length information (2 bytes)
(Length of Internet Protocol Version 6 Data / Payload)
LPSDU Physical layer data / payload length information (1 byte)
MAC02, MAC06 Media access layer MACHD MAC layer header MACNTL Control information of MAC layer frame (2 bytes)
MADRS address information MASQNM MAC layer sequence number (1 byte)
MPDU MAC layer frame MSDU MAC layer data / payload
(Medium Access Layer Data / Payload)
MST module structure information (1 bit)
NCM Control / Management (1 byte) (Number of Control / Management)
Header type identification information immediately following the NXHD IPv6 header (1 byte)
(Next Header Information to identify the type of header
immediately following the IPv6 header)
PANID PAN-specific information (PAN-specific identification information)
Data size of PDC individual exchange information (1 byte)
PHY02, PHY06 Physical layer PHYHD Physical layer header PPDU Physical layer frame PRM Preamble (4 bytes) [00000000h]
PSDU Physical layer data / payload SEOJ Identification information of the transmitting device (3 bytes)
SEXADRS IEEE extension address at the sender
(Source IEEE Extension Address)
SFD Physical layer frame start information (1 byte) [A7h]
SIPADRS IP address of sender (16 bytes)
(Source Internet Protocol Address)
SIPHD head information SPANID PAN-specific identification information on the transmitting side
(Source Personal Area Network Identifier)
SYNC synchronization header (5 bytes) (Synchronization Header)
TCPDU TCP data / payload
(Transmission Control Protocol Data / Payload)
TCPHD TCP header (Transmission Control Protocol)
Identification information for association between TID request transmission and response reception (2 bytes)

Claims (5)

A control method of a unit including a first connection unit, a second connection unit, a signal processing unit, a memory unit, and a processor,
The first connection unit is connected to a network system;
The second connection unit is connected to a predetermined module including a sensor function or a drive function,
The signal processing unit is connected to the first connection unit and the second connection unit,
The memory unit is connected to the signal processing unit,
The processor controls at least one of the signal processing unit and the memory unit,
The signal processing unit operates based on an application,
A control method in which software for executing a new application is transferred via the first connection unit based on information related to a change in the application provided from outside,
A method of controlling a unit in which the application is modified, changed, added, or updated when the unit is manufactured and shipped . Modifications or changes in the application within the unit with groups on the transfer of the software, add, update is performed,
The method according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined module operates adaptively in the network system. When the purpose of use or the environment of use of the unit changes, or the necessity of operating mode switching arises,
The method of controlling a unit according to claim 1, wherein information related to the change of the application is provided. The memory unit includes an application storage area,
2. The unit control method according to claim 1, wherein, after the modification, change, addition, or update of the application, common application software that is continuously used without being changed is stored in the application storage area. The memory unit stores life management data and / or operation period management data,
The unit control method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the processor limits the operation of the unit based on the life management data and / or the operation period management data.

Images